ahvary of Che ti\eolo0(cal Seminary PRINCETON • NEW JERSEY •(I^^ PRESENTED BY Rufus K. LeFevre JUL 16 1952 DISCIPLINES^*%^U^ / NITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST PART I. IN ENGLISH, 1814-1841. PART II. IN GERMAN, 1814-1819, 1841. TRANSLATED AND REPRINTED FROM THE ORIGINALS. EDITED BY Prof. A. W. Drury, D.D. DAYTON, OHIO: United Beethren Publishing Hoxtse, W. J. Shuey, Publisher. 1895. Copyright, 1895, By W. J. SHtTEY, Publisher. CONTENTS. Introduction, ---- '.....v PART I. DISCIPLINES IN ENGLISH. Discipline Prior to 1815. Translated by Prof. A. W. Drury, D.D., - - 3 Discipline of 1815. Translated by Prof. A. W. Drury, D.D., ... 7 Discipline of 1817. Translated by Rev. E. Light, D.D., - - - - 23 Discipline of 1817— Edition of 1819, 43 Discipline of 1821, 67 Discipline of 1825, -------- 93 Discipline of 1829, - 117 Discipline of 1833, - - - - I37 Discipline of 1837, 163 Discipline of 1841, - 199 Certification, 232 PART II. DISCIPLINES IN GERMAN. Discipline Prior to 1815, -....3 Discipline of 1815, 7 Discipline of 1817, 25 Discipline of 1817— Edition of 1819, ....47 Discipline of 1841, ---..........73 Certification, I09 Hi INTRODUCTION. The republication of the early Disciplines of the Church of the United Brethren in Christ has long been regarded not only as desirable, but as necessary. Of the edition of the Discipline issued after the first General Conference, convened in 1815, but a single copy is known to be extant. An earlier Discipline, assigned to the year 18 14, is extant in a single manuscript copy. Other Disciplines are getting to be almost equally rare. For- tunately, with the exception of a few mutilated phages in the Discipline of 1815 and the absence of a number of the pages of the Discipline of 1829, the entire list of Disciplines is yet preserved intact at the Publishing House. The Historical Society, founded in 1885, has awakened a new and special inter- est in the early archives of the Church. The fit thing would have been for the Historical Societj' to have begun a series of Historical Society publications. But in the absence of special funds for this purpose, the most that the Historical Society could do was to enlist itself on the editorial side of the work and leave the publishing to the Publishing House, trusting that the interest in the volumes published will lead to the reim- bursing of the House for all money expended. A second volume, consisting of the General and Annual Conference minutes up to 1830 or 1833, has already been arranged for. Other volumes should follow later. The present volume is not a history of the Disciplines, but a publication of the Disciplines themselves down to the year 1841. As the Church began among the Germans and then passed over prevailingly to the English side, the German form in the earlier Disciplines requires special attention, while in the later Dis- ciplines the English form holds the more important place. At a session of the Board of Managers of the Historical Society the writer was asked to take editorial charge of the two volumes proposed, and to call to his assistance what help might be necessary. He accordingly has translated the Disciplines of VI INTRODUCTION 1814 and 1815, and Rev. E. Light, English and German chaplain of the Central National Soldiers' Home, has furnished the trans- lation for the Discipline of 181 7. The edition of the Discipline bearing date " 1819 " and all others immediately following were at the time translated from the German to the English under the authority of the General Conference. Since 1S37 the English form has been the standard. The Disciplines are here reproduced as found, no effort being made to correct errors, typographical or otherwise. As the present plan contemplates giving the Disciplines rather than a comment on their contents, after a few explanations included in this preface, the Disciplines will follow without note or comment. The Discipline occupying the first place in the following pages, namely, the manuscript Discipline assigned to 1814, preserved, no one knows how long, at the Publishing House, belongs, beyond all doubt, to the relative position indicated. The first germs of Discipline were taken from the rules adopted in 1785 for Otter- bein's church in Baltimore. In allusion to the part performed by the Conference of 1789, Mr. Spayth iises the following language: "The disciplinary rules which governed the Church from the first conference held in Baltimore, 1789, up to 1815, the reader will not be displeased to find here in chief, although noticed before, comprising the Confession of Faith, same as in Discipline, and the following rules." Especially with reference to the Confession of Faith the above statement seems to be in the main correct. The rules of Discipline cited by Mr. Spayth are more closely in accord with the rules adopted by the Baltimore congregation in 1785 than with the special rules handed down in definite form. These rules seem to have been given special definiteness, begin- ning with 1809, and by 1813 and 1814 to have attained that pre- cision with which they appear in the manuscript Discipline and entered into the Discipline of 1815 under the head of duties of "Members in General." As bearing on the date of the manuscript Discipline, no one can fail to see that it is the basis of the Discipline of 1815. That a definite Discipline was in existence in 1813 is clearly shown by the following extract from the minutes of that year of the Eastern Conference: "Resolved, That the Confession of Faith and the Christian Discipline of the United Brethren in Christ be printed." In 1814, at the session of the Conference in the East, INTRODUCTION vii according to Mr. Spayth, "two manuscript copies of [a Disci- pline] were laid on the table, one by Bro. Christopher Grosh and the other b}'' Bro. C. Newcomer." The first error in the statement is in affirming that two Disciplines were presented, instead of one Discipline signed b}^ both of the persons named, due in part perhaps to the fact that in 1812 Mr. Grosh had presented to the Conference an elaborate confession over his own name. The second error is in the implication that what was presented was simply offered and not adopted. A point indicating the adoption of the Discipline is that Newcomer, who had been previousl}' elected bishop for one year, was in 1814 elected bishop for three years, according to the article on that subject in the manuscript Discipline. Another testimony is a paragraph in the Miami Conference minutes of 1814, which recites that the Discipline of the Church, evidently that adopted earlier in the year by the Conference in the East, was protested against. The article in the manuscript Discipline on temperance, really in advance of the times and the existing sentiment of the Church, will awaken special interest. Miami Conference, after the action just referred to, took the initiative in convening the first General Conference, in 1815, which revised the previous Discipline and provided for its print- ing, as shown in the following extract from the minutes: "The Confession of Faith and the Discipline were considered; some- what enlarged, some things omitted; on the whole improved and ordered printed." Though generally, and properly, called the "Discipline of 1815," the date on the printed Discipline was "1816," doubtless due to the fact that the printing was delayed till that year. This Discipline was exclusively in the German language. It may be proper to say that the word "church," either the English word or the German equivalent, except in composition, does not occur in any of the early disciplines; yet in translation the word * ' church ' ' has in some cases been used where clearness seemed to require it. In early usage the term ''society'' was used for a local church, and also for the church at large. In the latter sense, however, sometimes the expression was the "whole society." In the German the term for circuit, presiding elder's district, and conference district, and for some other uses as well, was the same. The more common English term in each of these cases has been used in the translation. Vlll INTRODUCTION The second General Conference met after an interval of two years, in 1817, though from the first it was intended that the regular interval should be four j'ears. After the fuller and printed Discipline had been resolved upon in 1815, there were misgivings among the members of the General Conference as to whether too miich of form, after the manner of some of the old and lifeless churches, had not been introduced, and so the next General Conference was ordered to be held in two years. Other reasons also ma}' have contributed to this. The Discipline bearing date "1819" has been an enigma to many, as no General Conference was held betw-een 181 7 and 1821. The explanation is this: The General Conference of 1817 had ordered the Discipline printed in English as well as in Ger- man. The Discipline bearing date "1817" was in German exclusivel)'. In 1819, in order to comply with the order of the General Conference, a new edition was printed having the German text and the English translation on opposite pages. A slight difiiculty is occasioned b}' the fact that the German text of 1819 varies somewhat from the German text of 1817. It is doubtless the case that the form in which things should appear was left largely with the editor of the Discipline, who was usually the secretar}^ of the General Conference. In 18 17 Rev. H. G. Spayth was the secretary-, and he doubtless prepared the Discipline of 1817 and no doubt also the German text and trans- lation of 1819. That the variations in the edition of 1819 were not due simply to liberty taken by the editor of the Discipline is evident b}' the fact that subsequent General Conferences retained in the main the changes made. The method followed was the regular method for the time. Yet the differences in the body of the two editions were, for the most part, purely verbal. A greater difference appears in the appendix, which may or may not have been regarded as part of the Discipline proper. In the appendix the forms for "Ordinations" and the " IMarriage Ceremony" were varied somewhat and consider- ably extended, and an entirely new article was added on the "Necessity of Union Among Ourselves." The most n;.tural explanation for the appearance of the new article is that it was adopted in 181 7, but for some cause had not been incor])orated in the Discipline published that year. The Di.scipline of 1817, in the section on the origin of the Church, inserted for the first time a list of the preachers present at the Conference of INTRODUCTION IX 1800. The list was in part incorrect. The edition of 1819 gave the list correctly, with the exception that the name of Jacob Baulus should probably be added. In addition to giving this correction, the edition of 1819 inserted a short account of the conferences of 1789 and 1791. The edition of 1819 has special importance, in that it established, through the English transla- tion then made, what continued to be the basis of the English Dis- cipline. From this time on the changes in the German editions of the Discipline are sufficiently indicated by the English text. Beginning with 1837 the German text was a translation of the English text. The Discipline of 182 1 will awaken special interest because of its references to slavery and intoxicating drinks. The Dis- cipline of 1825 gives an important addition to the Confession of Faith, which new feature was itself modified in 1841, and again in 1857. For the manifold changes made from time to time, the reader is referred to the republished Disciplines them- selves. The Discipline of 1829 gives the first law on Free- masonry. The Discipline of 1833 shows a disposition to guard more carefully the Confession of Faith. The Discipline of 1837 gives the new Constitution adopted that year, which was valid from the first, but was to be made binding under the terms of the final article by action of the General Conference four years later. The Discipline of 1841 gives the " new constitution " adopted that year by the General' Conference. The conception and action of the General Conference of 1841 were doubtless foreshadowed by the following editorial expression in the Relig- ious Telescope of November 25, 1840: "Any act of the General Conference is the act of the whole Church through their repre- sentatives thus assembled." Rev. A. Biddle, a surviving mem- ber of the Conference of 1841, states that the amendment clause of the Constitution then adopted was understood at the time as meaning that the action of the General Conference through the required majority was the action of the whole Church. An item of interest, furnished also by Mr. Biddle, is that the draft of the Constitution, as submitted to the General Conference, was drawn up by Mr. Spayth. On some accounts it is believed to be of sufficient interest and importance to give the German text of the Discipline for 1841. This will accordingly be found following the German text of 1819. X INTRODUCTION It is sincerely hoped that this volume will prove but the beginning in making easily accessible the early documents and publications of the Church, and that through the materials thus furnished a more intelligent interest will be awakened in the history and work of the Church. A. W. Drury. Dayton, Ohio, August 15, 1895. PART I. Disciplines in English, 1814-1841. THE DOCTRINE OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. Article i. In the name of God we confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; that these three are one; the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence with both; that this God created heaven and earth and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and sustains, governs, protects, and supports the same. Art. 2. We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is very God and man, Saviour and Redeemer of the whole world; that all men through him may be saved if they will; that this Jesus suffered for us; that he died and was buried, rose on the third day, ascended into heaven, and that he will come again, at the last day, to judge the living and the dead. Art. 3. We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he proceeds from the Father and the Son; that we through him must be sanctified and receive faith, thereby being cleansed from all filthiness of the flesh and spirit. Art. 4. We believe that the Bible is the word of God; that it contains the true way to our sotils' well-being and salvation ; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it, with the influences of the Spirit of God, as his only rule and guide; and that without repentance, faith in Jesus Christ, for- giveness of sins, and following after Jesus Christ, no one can be a true Christian. Art. 5. We believe that the doctrine which the Holy Scrip- tures contain, namely, the fall in Adam and salvation through Jesus Christ, shall be preached and proclaimed throughout the whole world. We recommend that the outward signs and ordinances, namely, baptism and the remembrance of the Lord in the distribution of the bread and wine, be observed; also the washing of feet, where the same is desired. 4 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. NOW [FOLLOW] THE RULES OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. Article i. Only such brethren shall be acknowledged as preachers by the United Brethren in Christ, who have been pro- posed at the conference or a great meeting and by the same have been regularly examined and have answered the following ques- tions: whether he believes in Christ, whether he has received the forgiveness of his sins, whether he follows after peace and holi- ness, whether the salvation of his soul, along with the salvation of his fellow-men, lies on his heart, whether he will submit him- self to the counsel of his brethren. Such persons shall receive a written permission. Art. 2. Such preachers shall, at the conference, every three years, elect bishops by a majority of votes. Art. 3. W/ial are the duties of a bishop ? ( i ) To preside at the conference. (2) He shall have the right, with the consent of the conference, to act. (3) By the consent of the conference he has the liberty to choose elders. Art. 4. To whom are the bishops, elders, and preachers answer- able for immoral conduct"? To the general \^allgemeine'\ confer- ence. But where the conduct is contrary to the Bible and the evidence is sufficient, the one to whom the case is known shall take other preachers with him and investigate the case. If it is found to be contrary to the Bible, then shall the accused remain silent till the conference. Art. 5. Every preacher shall use diligence to build up the Church, as far as possible, by doctrine and life, by prayer and a godly walk. He shall seek to become acquainted with all the members of his society, so that he can call the same by name, and when it is possible, to talk with them about the salvation of their souls. Art. 6. In each society leaders shall be chosen, whose duty it shall be to open and close the prayer- meetings and private meet- ings; also to visit the sick, and to exhort and keep in love every member of the society, and to keep a watch upon themselves. Art. 7. Every member of the Church shall confess that he receives the Bible as the word of God; that from now on he will strive from his heart to .seek his welfare in Christ, and to work out his salvation with fear and trembling, and flee the eternal wrath of God. DISCIPLINE PRIOR TO 1815. 5 Art. 8. Every member shall endeavor to lead a strict and godly life, to be diligent in prayer, especially in private, and whenever possible, to be present at all meetings, both public services and prayer-meetings, for his own edification. Art. 9. Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families morning and evening and to set them a good example in all Christian virtues. Art. 10. Every member shall endeavor to walk circumspectly as in the presence of God, to habituate himself to communion with God in his business occupations, to practice love toward friend and foe, to do good to the poor, and seek to be a follower of Jesus Christ indeed. Art. II. Every member shall abstain from strong drink, and use it only on necessity as medicine. Art. 12. Every member shall abstain from ordinary occupa- tions on Sunday, buying or selling, but spend the time in devo- tion, in singing spiritual songs to the [honor] and glory of God. Art. 13. Every member of this Church shall contribute quarterly, with a free will, as much as his circumstances will allow for the support of the traveling preachers. Art. 1*4. It is the duty of every member of this Church to live a peaceable, quiet, and godly life in his intercourse with all men, as it behooves a Christian to live in peace; especially shall each one be obedient to the government and the laws of the land, for government is ordained of God. Art. 15. If disputes should arise between two or more breth- ren of the Church concerning debts, or any other cause, and the disputing parties cannot come to an agreement, then the preacher who has the oversight of the society shall investigate the matter, and shall recommend to the disputing parties a reference to a committee, which shall consist of three members of the society, of whom the plaintiff shall choose one, the defendant another, [and these two a third,] and these three shall settle the difiiculties. In case, however, one of the contending parties should be dis- satisfied with the decision, he may appeal to the next great ipeeting, by making this known to the preachers, to have a second settlement. If the preachers find sufiicient reason therefor, a second settlement shall be allowed, in which case each of the parties shall choose two members of the Church, and these four a fifth, who shall decide the difficulties fully. If one of the persons should still not be satisfied with this decision, he thereby excludes 6 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. himself from the Church. If a member of the Church should refuse, in case of debts or other difficulties, to allow the matter to be settled, after this has been recommended to him bj' the preachers who have oversight of the society, or should a member of the Church begin suit before the civil court before the fore- going regulations have been followed, he shall be expelled from the Church, unless the difficulties are of such a kind that thej' demand and justify a legal decision. Christopher Grosh and Christian Newcomer. DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE United Brethren in Christ. HAGERSTOWN : Printed by John F. Koch. 1816. OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God to awaken persons in different parts of the world, to raise up anew a fallen Christianity and preach the doctrine of Christ crucified in its purity. At the same time he remembered also the Germans in America, who lived here and there in this extended country, and had therefore but seldom an opportunity to hear the preaching of the gospel of the cross for their edification, and but seldom in their mother tongue, and in many places not declared with the purit}' and earnestness demanded. Among others he awakened an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a Geeting, and armed them with his spirit, grace, and power, to labor in his neglected vineyard, that he might call also, among the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master, saw the divine blessing on their labors, and established in various places excellent societies, and led to Chri>st many precious souls. Their sphere of action at length extended itself more and more, so that they were com- pelled to look about for more laborers in the vine3'ard; for the harvest was so great, and the laborers but few. God awakened othej-s, whom he also made willing to consecrate their powers to the Lord. Such persons were accepted by one or another of the preachers and by them designated to the preacher's ofiice. The number of members in the different parts of the Church increased from time to time, and extended through the States of Pennsylvania, Maryland, and Virginia. At the same time, at great meetings, Otterbein held at times conferences with the preachers who were present. He placed before them the impor- tance of the preacher's office, how necessary it was to use all earnestness in the work of saving souls. They took, therefore, counsel as to how the\' might be most useful, and received such persons as fellow-laborers of whom the3' had reason to believe that they had experienced religion in their hearts, were faithful, 9 lO UNITED BRETHREX DISCIPLINES. and had qualified minds. These persons they armed for the work of the Lord. The number of members continued to in- crease more and more. In order now to Uibor in a truly useful and church-like waj-, the preachers saw themselves obliged to appoint a conference where they might come together to unite themselves properly; because some were Reformed, others Luth- erans, others INIennonites, etc. They therefore appointed the 25th of September, 1800, at the house of Frederick Kemp, in Frederick Count}-, Maryland, for the conference. There came together thirteen preachers, who united themselves into a society which bears the name, "The United Brethren in Christ." The}' elected William Otterbein and ]SIartin Boehm as superintendents or bishops. Each one was allowed liberty to baptize accord- ing to his own view. From this time forth the societ}'- increased more and more. Preachers were appointed who traveled continuall}' (because the preaching places could not otherwise be supplied). The work extended itself into the States of Ohio and Kentuck}-. It became now necessary to appoint a conference in the State of Ohio, be- cause it was too difiicult to go annually so far to the conference. Meantime, Brother Boehm died and Brother Otterbein desired that a bishop should be elected (because he was himself no longer able to superintend) who should take charge of the work and thereby preserve discipline and order, because it was determined at the first conference that if one of the bishops should die another should be elected. Therefore, Brother Christian Newcomer was elected bishop for a certain time to take the oversight of the Church. • For a long time the want of a discipline in the Church had been deeply felt, and already at different times something thereat had been done. Finally, it was resolved at the co'iference in the State of Ohio, that a head or general conference snould be held which should undertake the work of making the discipline in some respects more perfect, as might seem best for the Church. The members of this conference were to be elected from the preachers in the various parts of the Church by the members of the Church through a majorit)' vote. There were present at the conference the following preachers, namely: Christian New- comer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Troyer, George Beneduni, Abraham Troxel, Christian Berger, Abraham Mayer, John Snyder, Henry Kumler, Henry Spayth, Isaac DISCIPLINE OP 1815. II Niswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met June 6, 1815, near Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland County, Penn- sylvania, where they, after mature deliberation, approved as proper and useful the following doctrine and rules, and delivered the same in love and humility to the Church, with the sincere wish that this doctrine and these rules, along with the Word of God, might be observed. For God is a God of order, and where no order or discipline is, there love and fellowship are lost. Therefore, let vis follow the counsel of the Lord, who taught us that we, through humility, should esteem one another better than ourselves, and seek to have the same mind as Jesus Christ, who took upon him the form of a servant and became obedient even unto the death of the cross, that he might obtain for us grace and strength, that we, out of love and humility, might submit one to another. Whoever cannot submit himself lacks grace, love, and humility. Therefore said Jesus, "Whoever among you desires to be the greatest, let the same be the servant of others." Thus must we love one another. Therefore said Jesus, "Thus shall all men know that 3^ou are mj- true disciples, if you love one another; and whoever has not love abides in death." Thits let us practice love, that we may obtain the glory which Jesus besought from his Fathet for his disciples, that we may be one even as he and the Father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us seek to be like-minded, in unison, helpful, no one thinking or speaking evil of another, but imploring the Lord that he will grant us his Spirit and earnestness, that we may live a true Christian life, to his glory and to our eternal welfare. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST, In the name of God we confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the H0I3' Ghost equal in essence with both; that this triune God created heaven and earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, sustains, governs, protects, and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is very God and man; that 12 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. he, by the Holy Ghost, assumed his human nature in Mary, and was born of her; that he is the Saviour and Redeemer of the M'hole human race, if they with faith in him accept the grace proffered in Jesus; that this Jesus suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, rose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and that he shall come again at the last day, to judge the living and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he is equal in being with the Father and the Son ; that he proceeds from both ; that we are through him enlightened; through faith justified and sanctified. We believe in a holy church, communion of saints, resurrec- tion of the flesh, and a life everlasting. We believe that the Bible, Old and New Testament, is the word of God; that it contains the true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to receive it with the influ- ences of the Spirit of God, as his only rule, and that without faith in Jesus Christ, true penitence, forgiveness of sins, and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We believe that the doctrine which the Holy Scriptures con- tain, namely, the fall in Adam and the redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the whole world. We believe that the outward means of grace are to be in use in all Christian societies, namely: that baptism and the remem- brance of the death of the Lord in the distribution of the bread and wine are to be in use among his children, according to the command of the Lord Jesus; the mode and manner, however, shall be left to the judgment of every one. Also, the example of feet-washing remains free to every one. SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND ANNUAL CONFERENCES. In what manner and order shall the transactions of the con- ferences be conducted ? It is desired that on these occasions all things be done as in the presence of God; that whoever has anything to say, rise and speak freely whatever he has in his heart. How and after what manner shall the members of the General Conference be chosen ? DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 13 In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are present (if such are not present, then the local preachers residing on the district), shall advise the societies that they elect two elders from their district. But all of the elders of the district who are capable of going to the Conference shall be put in nomination and the same made known some time beforehand, and those two who shall have a majority of votes shall be the members of the General Conference. The votes taken aX each place shall be recorded in writing and be attested by a preacher present or a leader. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the statement, and should any two have a like number of votes, he shall decide which of them is elected. , How often shall the General Conference be held ? Every four years. Has the General Conference any power which the annual con- ference has not ? Yes; it alone has the power to elect a bishop from the presid- ing elders every four years, and to alter or amend the discipline or rules as it may find proper, under the conditions and with the exception that no article shall be established which shall abolish or do away the itinerant plan. The General Conference shall also determine the districts where the annual conferences shall be held. Who are the members of the annual conference? All of the elders and preachers who have received a written permission and are in the district of such conference or shall be received by the same. In what manner and order shall the transactions be con- ducted ? 1. There shall first be read a chapter from the Bible, and brief remarks made thereon; also singing and prayer as often as the conference convenes, with singing and prayer again at the close. 2. The conference shall elect a presiding elder and a secre- tary to act with the bishop. 3. The preachers shall be examined as to their conduct toward God, toward one another, and toward their fellow-men; whether their conduct is blameless; whether they employ as much time as possible in extending the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 5. What preachers must continue longer on trial ? 14 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 6. Are any to be elected elders ? 7. Have any of the preachers died ? 8. Who are the presiding elders ? 9. Who offers himself to travel ? 10. What has been collected to meet contingent expenses, and what to make up the allowance of the traveling preachers ? Has reckoning been made with them ? Have they received their dues ? 11. When and where shall the next conference be held ? 12. Have the elders been ordained ? 13. On what circuits are the preachers stationed this year.? 14. Is there anything more to do ? 15. Has the conference appointed the districts within its bounds for the election of members of the General Conference ? 16. Has all that has been done been entered upon the protocol ? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION AND ORDINATION OF A BISHOP, AND OF HIS OFFICE AND DUTY. How is a bishop constituted .-* The General Conference shall elect him bj- a majority of votes, from the presiding elders who have been elected to the General Conference; but the conference is at liberty to retain a bishop yet another four years. A bishop or a bishop-elect must be capable of traveling the different districts and conferences; otherwise he cannot be elected. A bishop thus elected shall be ordained by the laying on of hands b)' a bishop and a presiding elder. vShould no bishop be present, two presiding elders are authorized to act. What are the duties of a bishop? 1. To preside at our conferences, along with a presiding elder chosen for this purpose. 2. He shall, along with two presiding elders whom he may choose, appoint the traveling preachers to their various circuits; provided, however, that no preacher shall remain longer than three consecutive years at the same place, unless on account of family circumstances, and with the consent of the conference, no limits as to the time should be set. DISCIPLINE OP 1815. 15 3. The bishops shall designate the districts to be traveled by the presiding elders. 4. In the intervals of the conferences, he has power, along with the presiding elders in his district, to change traveling preachers where they think it best ; also to receive or to suspend preachers till the conference. 5. He shall travel throughout the bounds of the various con- ferences, and shall have in spiritual things the oversight of all the societies. 6. To him it belongs to perform the rite of ordination. 7. If a bishop ceases to serve the various conferences in the Church and to travel the districts, can he still exercise his epis- copal office among us? No; unless he should be sick, or there should be other like circumstances. 8. If at any time it should so occur that our Church, by reason of death, suspension, or other cause, should have no bishop, what course shall be taken ? Each annual conference shall choose a president from the presiding elders, who shall serve in the bishop's place during the session of the conference. The presi- dent thus chosen shall also attend the other conference. He shall take his seat along with the president there chosen, that he may act with him in the conference, and the president there chosen shall in like manner attend the other conference; so that each conference may know the state of affairs in the other con- ference, and that love and communion may be maintained, etc., until the General Conference, which shall again elect a bishop. SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS : THEIR ELECTION, OFFICE, AND DUTIES. How shall the presiding elders be elected? The bishop shall propose to the conference some of the elders who have finished their probation, and, with the consent of the conference, elect them for two years. What are the duties of a presiding elder? 1. To travel the district assigned him, and to preach as often as he can. 2. He shall have oversight of the traveling and local preach- l6 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. ers on his district, and see that they conduct themselves agree- ably to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible conduct them, administer the Lord's Supper, hold quarterly conferences with the preachers, exhorters, and leaders present, examine whether the traveling and local preachers do their duty, — especially whether the local preachers, where pos- sible, preach ever}^ Sunday, and where there are several change them at times, so that the most good ma}- result, — and exhort them that they maintain discipline, order, love, and earnestness in the societies. 4. He can also exchange the traveling preachers on his district, but he must first consult the bishop. He can also receive or suspend preachers till the conference. 5. He .shall give the bishop a report of the condition of his dis- trict, and have a reckoning with the traveling preachers, that he may lay the same before the conference. He shall allow a single man eighty dollars, and a married man and his wife twice that amount. Only traveling preachers who travel a circuit are to be reckoned with. Local preachers shall receive nothing, unless for a time the}' serve a circuit, in which case they shall receive an allowance for the time. Where a preacher is stationed in a city, the society there must support him. 6. How long may a bishop place a presiding elder over a given district ? As long as is believed useful and proper. 7. Should it so happen that there should be a time when there is no bishop, each presiding elder shall exercise special care over the societies in his district, that ever3'tliing maN' be preserved in love and earnestness, and that they each give the other imformation as to the condition of his district. Should it so happen that one or the other district should be without a presiding elder, what course should be taken? Information thereof should be given to the bishop, who should, from the elders of the district, make an appointment thereto' [to act till the conference, where it is possible. In case there should be no bishop, then the nearest presiding elder shall appoint one in case he cannot himself take charge of the work. ' Here the page is mutilated. The corresponding passage in the Discipline of 1817 is given in brackets, extending to "Section Fifth," on the follomag page. BISCIPLINE OF 1815. 17 [SECTION FIFTH.] OF THE ELDERS : THEIR ELECTION, OFFICE AND DUTY, AND ORDINATION. How is an elder constituted ? After a probation of two years he may be accepted by the annual conference; may, by the bishop and^ [[a presiding elder] with the laying on of their hands, be ordained; on this condition, however: that the conference is convinced that the requirements of verses 6-9 of the first chapter of Paul's Epistle to Titus are fulfilled in him. This Scripture shall be read to each one at his ordination. [What is an elder's office and duty? [ I. To preach as often and as much as] he can, and to baptize, to solemnize marriage, to assist the presiding elders in adminis- tering the Lord's Supper, and when the presiding elder cannot be present one or two elders shall perform this office ; he shall also conduct all parts of public divine worship, establish class- meetings where it is practicable, and hold the same, and help in the election of leaders. 2. To take quarterly a voluntary collection for the traveling preachers and for the poor, to take a statement thereof at every place and by the* [leader attested, and if there is no leader present, then it shall be signed by a member, enabling him thus to make settlement with the presiding elder, that everything may be done in order.] 3. Where a local elder or preacher preaches at a place where no traveling preacher comes, he shall take a collection and take a statement of the same and send it to the presiding elder, or bring or send it to the conference. 4. Should a traveling preacher or elder desire to leave the circuit assigned him, he shall first notify the presiding elder. Should any one leave or neglect his charge unless through sick- ness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be answerable therefor to the next conference. 'The break here may be supplied from the Discipline of 1817, as in brackets, extending to "as much as." 'Here a torn page must be restored from the Discipline of 181 7, as in brackets. l8 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLII'mS. SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR OFFICE AND DUTIES. How shall a preacher be received b}' the annual conference? 1. In the time between conferences, by the bishop or the pre- siding elder of the district, or an elder who supplies the place of the presiding elder at an annual or great meeting, till the next session of the conference. No one will be received otherwise than on probation. One who is on probation may be admitted or rejected without any injustice being done him. Otherwise there would be no probation. 2. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined by the conference, and the following questions shall be asked: Has he known God in Christ as a sin-pardoning God ? Has he received the forgiveness of his sins ? Is the love of God through the Holy Ghost shed abroad in your heart ? Has he received the peace of God? Does he follow after holiness ? Has he a right knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- tion, and sanctification, and redemption ? 3. Does the salvation of his own soul and the salvation of his fellow-men lie nearer his heart than all else in the world beside? Can he subject himself to the counsel of his brethren ? Will he be obedient, speaking or remaining silent as the breth- ren may think best? Is he willing, as far as he is able, to uphold the itinerant plan (or traveling the circuit), and to support the same as much as possible ? 4. What is the duty of a preacher? To preach Christ crucified wherever he can find hearers; to establish class-meetings where it is practicable; to converse with the members on the condition of their souls; to seek to direct aright the tempted, to seek to stimulate the slothful, and to seek to build up all as far as possible in faith, in the grace and knowl- edge of Jesus Chri.st; never to fail to visit the sick; to seek to confirm the word which he preaches by his life and walk. 5. What are the directions given to a preacher? That he be diligent, never trifle away his time in unnecessarj' DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 19 things at any place, always be serious; that his motto be, "Holi- ness unto the Lord"; that he avoid all lightness and jesting; that he speak with moderation, and conduct himself discreetly with women, and demean himself as a true Christian. 6. He shall ever be averse to crediting evil reports, unless with sufficient evidence, and always, as far as is consistent with truth, put the most favorable construction on all things. He shall speak evil of no one; whatever may be his thought, he should keep it to himself until he can declare it to the person concerned. 7. Let his business be to save as many souls as possible; to this employment he shall give himself up. He should visit those in need; in all things act not according to his own will, but as a son in the gospel. As such, it becomes him to emplo3' his time in the manner before described, — in preaching, in visiting from house to house, in teaching, and prayer, and medi- tating on the word of God; with these to be occupied till the Lord shall come. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DEALT WITH. What shall be done if a bishop, or presiding elder, or elder, or preacher is reported guilty of an offense which in the Word of God is made an act requiring expulsion ? I. If a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be dealt with J Where such accusation prejudicial to the gospel may occur, it shall be made known to a presiding elder and to an elder, who shall make an examination whether there is just cause of complaint. But, as the apostle says, they should not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. Should it now appear that he is justly accused, they shall make a written statement of the case and send a copy to the bishop, and appoint a time when they may come together, when the accuser and the bishop may be present. An investigation shall be made by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall remain silent till the annual conference. There the presiding elders and the elders shall again make an 20 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. investigation. If he is found guilty, he shall be suspended from his office. 2. If a presiding elder is accused of immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Where such accusations prejudicial to the gospel may occur, the nearest elder and a preacher shall investigate. Should it appear that he is guilt}', the}- shall make a written statement of the case and send a copy to the presiding elder, and appoint a time when they shall come together, when the accuser and the presiding elder may be present. *In the absence of the bishop another presiding elder and two elders shall be sum- moned, who shall make an investigation. If he is found guilty, he shall remain silent till the conference; there shall he be answerable. 3. If an elder, or preacher, or exhorter shall be accused of immoral conduct, what shall be done ? The preacher in the vicinity, to whom the matter is known, shall take with him an- other preacher, or an exhorter, or a leader and make an investiga- tion. Should it appear that he is guilty, notice thereof shall be given him and a time appointed when they and the accuser and the accused may be present. In the absence of the bishop or presiding elder three elders or preachers shall make an investiga- tion. If he is found guilty, he shall be silent till conference, where he shall be answerable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Every member of the Church shall confess that he receives the Bible as the word of God; that he will strive from his heart to seek his welfare in Christ Jesus, and to work out his salvation with fear and trembling, that he may flee the eternal wrath to come. Every member shall endeavor to lead a strict and godly life, to be diligent in prayer, especially in private, and whenever possible, to be present at all meetings, both public services and prayer-meetings, for his own edification. Heads of families should never omit to pra\' with their families morning and evening, and to set them a good example in all Christian virtues. Every one shall endeavor to walk circumspectly, as in the DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 21 presence of God, to habituate himself to communion with God in his business occupations, never to speak evil of his fellow- men, to practice love toward friend and foe, to do good to the poor, and seek to be a follower of Jesus Christ indeed. Every member shall refrain from all unnecessary work on Sunday; neither buy nor sell, but spend the time in devotion, in reading and hearing the Word of God, and in singing spiritual hymns, to the honor and glory of God. Every member of this Church shall contribute quarterly, with a free will, as much as his circumstances will allow, for the sup- port of the traveling preachers. It is the duty of every member to lead a peaceable, quiet, and godly life in his intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- tian to live in peace. Especially shall each one be subject to the government, as the Word of God requires. Among such members of the Church the preachers shall establish one or more class-meetings, where it is practicable. The members shall, where it is possible, assemble themselves once in each week at an appointed place to hold pra3'er-nieetings among themselves, that they may be built up in the presence of God and in love for good works in Christ Jesus. In every class, leaders shall be elected in the presence of the preacher, whose duty it shall be to appoint prayer-meetings; to open and close them; also to hold class-meetings at times; to exhort and preserve in love every member, and to keep watch upon himself. If members trespass against each other as brethren or sisters, correct the fault first between thee and him alone. If he hear thee, thou hast won him. If he hear thee not, take with thee one or two more in order that in the mouth of two or three witnesses the whole matter may be established. If he will not hear them, tell the matter to the church. If he will not hear the church, let him be to thee as a heathen and publican. If disputes should arise between two or more members of the Church concerning debts or any other cause, and the disputing parties cannot come to an agreement, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher who resides in the vicinity, shall investigate the matter and shall recommend to the disputing parties a reference to a committee, which shall consist of three members of the society; of whom the plaintiflF shall choose one, the defendant another, and these two a third. 22 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. These three shall settle the difficulties. In case, however, one of the contending persons should be dissatisfied with the deci- sion, he may appeal to the next quarterl}- or great meeting, by making this known to the presiding elder or elders, to have a second settlement. If the preachers find sufficient reason there- for, a second settlement shall be allowed; in which case each of the parties shall choose two members of the Church, and these four a fifth, who shall decide the difficulties full}-. If one of the persons should still not be satisfied with this decision, he thereby excludes himself from the Church. If a member of the Church should refuse, in case of debts or other difficulties, to allow the matter to be settled, after this has been recommended to him b}' a preacher or leader who has the oversight; or a member of the Church should begin suit at law, before the foregoing regula- tions have been followed, he shall be expelled from this Church, unless the difficulties are of such a kind that the}- demand and justify a legal decision, as in the case of executors or adminis- trators. DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. PRINTED BY ORDER OF A GENERAL CONFERENCE HELD ON THE SECOND DAY OF JUNE, IN THE YEAR OF OUR LORD, 1817, IN MOUNT PLEASANT, WESTMORE- LAND COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA. GREENSBURG, PENN.: PRINTED BY JOHN ARMBRUST & CO- 1817. 23 CONCERNING THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God to raise up men in the different parts of the world who should restore again the decayed Christianity, and preach the doctrine of the cross in its purity. He remembered at the same time the Germans in America, who resided widely scattered over this extensive land; who, therefore, had seldom opportunity to hear the preaching of the cross for their edification, and rarely in their mother tongue, and in many places not in that purity and earnestness of presen- tation as it should have been. Among others he raised up also an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a Geeting, and equipped them with spirit, grace, and power to labor in his so sadly neglected vineyard, that he might also call sinners to repentance among the Germans in America. These obeyed the call oi' their Lord and Master, were blessed in their labor, and so raised up here and yonder prosperous societies, and led many precious souls to Christ. Graduallj- the circle of their labors widened so that they felt constrained to look about for fellow-laborers in the vineyard, for the harvest was great and the laborers but few. God awakened others, who also became will- ing to consecrate their powers to the Lord. These were then received by one or another as fellow-laborers. The number of Chitrch members in the different portions of the land grew from time to time, and spread themselves in the States of Maryland, [Pennsylvania, and Virginia,] for which reason Otterbein would sometimes hold conference with the preachers who were present at the great meetings. He represented to them the solemnity of the ministerial office — how necessarj- it was to put forth earnest endeavors to save souls. They likewise coun- seled how they might be most useful, and received such as colaborers of whom they had reason to believe that they had experienced Christianity at heart. The number of members increased constantly more and more. That they might now labor 25 26 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. quite advantageously together, the preachers saw themselves obliged to appoint a conference, where thej' might meet to unite themselves thoroughh-, for some were Reformed, others Lutheran, others Mennonites, etc. Therefore, they determined to meet on the 25th of September, 1800, in the house of Frederick Kemp, in Frederick County, Maryland. There met of their number thirteen, namel}^ W. Otterbein, J. Boehm, J. Geeting, C. New- comer, P. Lehman, G. Pfrimmer, F. Kemp, C. Grosh, D. Strickler, C. Krum, H. Krum, A. Herschej'. They united them- selves into a societj' bearing the name, "The United Brethren in Christ." They chose William Otterbein and Martin Boehm as superintendents or bishops. They agreed to grant each one liberty to baptize in conformity with his own views. Henceforth the societj' spread more and more. They received preachers who traveled constantly (inasmuch as the appoint- ments could not be served otherwise). The work spread into the States of Ohio and Kentucky. It was now necessary to hold a conference in the State of Ohio, as it was too burdensome for those preachers to travel annually so far to conference. Brother Boehm died meanwhile, and Brother Otterbein desired that a bishop should be elected (because he himself could no longer superintend) who should take upon himself the work of maintaining discipline and order, for it was decided upon at the first conference that if one of the bishops died another should be chosen. Then Brother Christian Newcomer was chosen bishop for a time, who should assume the superintendence of the society'. The want of a discipline in the society had been felt for a long time, and several attempts toward this end had been made. Finally, it was resolved in the conference in Ohio that a principal or general conference should be held, which should undertake to make the discipline in some respects more perfectly to accord with the Word of God. The members of this General Conference should be chosen from the preachers in the different portions by a mr.jorit}^ vote of the members of the society; and the following preachers were pres- ent at the Conference, namely: Christian Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Troj-er, George Benedum, Abra- ham Troxel, Christian Berger, Abraham Mayer, John Snj-der, Henry Kumler, Henr}' Spaj^th, Lsaac Niswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mount Pleasant, in Westmoreland Count}-, Pennsylvania, DISCIPLINE OF I«I7. 27 where, after due consideration, they found the following doctrine and rules as proper and profitable for recommendation to the society, in love and humility, with the sincere wish that this doctrine and these rules, in connection with the Word of God, may be observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is no discipline there all love and union decline. Therefore, let us follow the counsel of the Lord, which teaches that we humbly seek in honor to prefer one another and seek the mind that was in Jesus Christ, who took the form of a servant and became obedient unto death upon the cross, that he might secure us grace and power to submit ourselves one to another in love and humility. Whoever is not able to submit himself is yet in lack of grace, love, and humility. Wherefore, Jesus says, " Whosoever among 3'ou would be the greatest shall be the servant of the others. ' ' Thus we must love one another. Jesus says, "Thus shall all men know that ye are my true disciples, when ye have love one to another; and he that doth not love abideth in death." Therefore, let us practice love, that we may obtain the glory for which Jesus pra3'ed the Father in behalf of his disciples, that we might be one even as he and the Father are one. Therefore, ye beloved brethren, let us seek to be of one mind, abiding in unity and harmony. Let no one speak or think evil of another, but pray the Lord that he may give us his spirit and zeal, that we may promote Christianity thoroughly, to his glory and our eternal welfare. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we confess before all men, that we believe in the one true God, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, and the Son in the Father, and the Holy Ghost of like being with both; that this triune God has created, sustains, governs, protects, and preserves heaven and earth, and all that therein is, both visible and invis- ible. We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is truly God and man; that he assumed his humanity through the Holy Spirit in Mary, 28 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. and that he was born of her; that he is the Saviour and Redeemer of the whole human race, if they accept the proftered grace of Jesus b}' faith in him; that this Jesus suffered for us; that he died on the cross, was buried, rose again on the third da}', ascended to heaven, is at the right hand of God and intercedes for us, and will come again at the last day to judge the living and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he is of like being with the Father and Son; that he comforts the believers, and guides them into all truth. "We believe in a holy Christian church, the fellowship of the saints, resurrection of the flesh, and an eternal life. We believe that the Bible, Old and New Testament, is God's word; that it contains the true waj' to our salvation; that every true Christian shall accept it under the influence of God's Spirit as his onl}' guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, genu- ine repentance, forgiveness of sins, and following Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We believe that what the Hoi 3^ Scriptures contain, namely, the fall in Adam and the redemption through Jesus Christ, should be preached to all the world. We believe that the external means should be practiced in Christian societies, namely, baptism and the remembrance of the death of the Lord Jesus, among his children. The mode and manner shall, however, be left to the judgment of the individual. Also, the example of feet-washing is left to the judgment of the individual. SECTION SECOND. CONCERNING THE GENERAL AND ANNUAL CONFERENCES. Question. According to what manner and order shall the pro- ceedings of the conferences be conducted? Answer. It is desired that whatever ma}- be done upon such an occasion shall be done as in the presence of God; whoever has anything to say, shall rise and speak freely, as it is in his heart. Ques. How and in what manner shall the members of a Gen- eral Conference be elected? Ans. In each district the itinerant preachers, if there be any DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 29 such (if not, then the local preachers who live in the circuit), shall represent to the societies that they elect two elders from their district. They shall not fail to put all the elders on the district who can go to the Conference in nomination, and make it known some time in advance; and the two who obtain the majority of votes shall be the members of the General Confer- ence. The votes shall, however, be recorded at each place and subscribed by a preacher who was present, or by a leader. The presiding elder of the district shall examine it, and should two of them have an equal number of votes, he shall decide which of the two is elected. Ques. How often shall the General Conference be held? Ans. Every four years. Ques. Has the General Conference any power which the annual conference does not have ? Ans. Yes; it alone has the power to choose quadrennially two bishops from among the elders, and to change or improve the discipline or rules according as it sees fit, under the condi- tion and exception that no clause be enacted which should suspend or put away the traveling of circuits [the itineracy]. The General Conference shall also determine the districts where the annual conferences shall be held. Qties. Who are the members of the annual conference ? Ans. All the elders and preachers who have received a writ- ten license and reside within the bounds of such conference or are received into it. Ques. After what manner and order shall the proceedings be undertaken? Ans. I. A chapter from the Bible shall be read and brief remarks made upon it; then there shall be singing and prayer, and this as often as the conference sits, also closing it with sing- ing and praj^er. > 2. The conference shall elect a secretary, and should one of the bishops be absent, elect also one of the presiding elders to assist in presiding. 3. The preachers are to be examined as to their conduct toward their neighbors; whether their conduct is blameless; whether they devote as much time as possible to the spreading of the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be received on probation ? 5. What preachers are to be continued on probation? 30 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 6. Are there any to be elected to elders' orders? 7. Have any of the preachers died? 8. Who are the presiding elders? 9. Who is willing to travel ? 10. What has been collected to defray contingent expenses and to raise the salary of the itinerant preachers ? Has settle- ment been made with them ? Have they received what is due them? 11. When and where shall the next conference be held? 12. Have the elders been ordained ? 13. On what circuits have the preachers this year been ap- pointed ? 14. Is there anj'thing more to be done ? 15. Has the conference determined the districts in its bounds for the purpose of electing the members of the General Confer- ence? 16. Have all the proceedings been recorded ? SECTION THIRD. CONCERNING THE ELECTION AND ORDINATION OF THE BISHOPS, AND MATTERS PERTAINING TO THEIR OFFICE AND DUTY. Ques. How shall the bishops be constituted ? Ans. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority of the votes ot the elders constituting the General Conference. The Conference is also at liberty to reelect the bishops for other four years. The bishops must, however, be able to travel over the different circuits and conferences; otherwise they cannot be elected. Those who are chosen shall be ordained through the laying on of hands by a bishop and one elder; but should there be no bishop present, the ordination ma^^ be performed by two elders. Qjtes. What are the duties of the bishops ? Ans. I. To preside at our conferences. 2. They shall, with the assistance of an elder, whom they choose, appoint the itinerant preachers to their respective circuits, with the limitation that no itinerant preacher shall remain longer than three successive years at the same place, except in DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 31 view of special circumstances and with the consent of the bishops. 3. The bishops shall assign the presiding elders to the dis- tricts which they shall travel. 4. During the interim between the conferences, they have power, along with the presiding elders, to change the itinerant preachers where they shall deem it better; also to receive or suspend preachers until the time of conference. 5. They shall travel over the different conferences, as far as their boundaries extend, and have the spiritual supervision over all the societies. 6. It is their duty to conduct the ordination service. 7. If a bishop ceases to serve the different conferences in the Church, and to travel over the different districts, can he never- theless perform the functions of his ofi&ce among us ? No; unless he should be sick, or hindered by other circumstances of like character. 8. Should it occur that our Church should at any time be without a bishop, because of death, or suspension, or on what- ever account, what shall be the advice in such case ? The elder who shall be chosen in the absence of a bishop to preside at the conference shall serve in the place of the bishop as long as the conference continues. This thus elected chairman shall also serve the other conference. He shall preside with the chairman chosen by the other conference concurrently, and the latterly chosen chairman shall in like manner serve the other conference, so that each conference may know the state of affairs in the other con- ference; so that love and fellowship, etc., may be maintained until the General Conference, which again elects bishops. 9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to provide for a suitable sermon to the preachers present at the close of each conference. SECTION FOURTH. CONCERNING THE PRESIDING ELDERS: THEIR ELECTION, OFFICE, AND DUTIES. Ques. How shall the presiding elders be chosen ? Ans. The bishops shall nominate several of the elders who have stood their, probation, and, with the consent of the con- ference, choose'them for four years. 32 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Qiies. What are the duties of the presiding elder? Ans. I. To travel the district to which he was appointed by the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has the supervision of the itinerant and local preachers in his district, to the end that they conduct themselves in con- formity with the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if ]iossible conduct them, administer the Lord's Supper, hold quarterly conferences with the preachers, exhorters, and leaders present, and inquire whether the traveling and local preachers perform their duties,— especially whether the local preachers preach, as far as possible, every Sunday, and where there are a num1)er of them cause them to exchange sometimes, as may result in the accomplishment of most good, — and exhort them to maintain discipline, and order, and love, and zeal in the societies. 4. He can also exchange the itinerant preachers in his dis- trict (he shall, however, advise with a bishop); he can also receive preachers or suspend them until conference. 5. He shall inform the bishop of the condition of his district, and see to it that the itinerant preachers receive quarterly a proportionate support, inasmuch as their salary is taken from the money they collect upon their circuits. A single preacher shall, however, not receive over eighty dollars, and a married one shall be allowed one hundred and sixt}- dollars. Should the amount collected on one or the other circuit, however, not suffice, then it shall be put into the hands of a committee of the confer- ence, which shall take off from other money collected and add to that which is deficient, according to their judgment. In the ca.se of a preacher stationed in a city, the congregation must care for him. 6. Should it occur at any time that there should be no bishop, the presiding elders shall, each in his own district especially, care for the .societies, that all things may be conserved in love and zeal; and information as to the condition of circuits shall be mutually exchanged between the elders. Should it occur, how- ever, that there should be no presiding elder in one or the other district, what shall be advised? The bishop shall be informed thereof. He shall appoint one from among the elders in the dis- trict until conference. Should there be no bishop, however, then the adjoining presiding elder shall choose one if he cannot do the work himself I5ISCIPI.I^'^ OF 1817. 33 SECTION FIFTH. CONCERNING THE ELECTION, OFFICIAL DUTY, AND ORDINATION OF ELDERS. Ques. How shall an elder be chosen ? Ans. After a probation of two years he may be presented to the annual conference for ordination by the bishops with the laying on of hands, on this condition, however: that the confer- ence is convinced that the requirements of verses 6, 7, 8, and 9 of the second chapter of Paul's Epistle to Titus are fulfilled in him. This shall be read to each candidate at the time of his ordination. 1. What is an elder's ofS.ce and duty? To preach as often and much as he can, and baptize, solemnize marriages, assist the presiding elder at communion, and when the presiding elder cannot be present one or two of the elders shall administer in his stead. He shall take part in all the public services of God, seek to establish class-meetings, where the majorit}^ of the members regard it advisable, conduct the same, and help to elect leaders. 2. To take quarterly a free-will contribution for the itinerant preachers and the poor, keep a record of the same at each place, attested by the subscription of the leader, and if there is no leader present, then it shall be signed by a member, enabling him thus to make settlement with the presiding elder and have everything done in proper order. 3. Where a local elder or preacher, who is not in need of sup- port, preaches at a place where no itinerant preacher serves, he shall take a collection and keep an account of the same and send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, or take it there, for the support of the needy local preachers who are poor and preach among the poor. 4. Should an itinerant preacher or elder wish to leave the circuit assigned him, then he shall first give the presiding elder written notice. Should any one leave or neglect [his charge], except on account of sickness or other unavoidable circumstan- ces, he shall be accountable for it to the next conference. 5. Where there are local preachers who are poor and needy, of whom it is desired that they preach, it is proper that the elders take collections in the societies to support such preachers according to the time they serve, yet not above that to which the itinerant preacher is limited. 3 34 UNITED BRETHREN^ DISCIPLINES. SECTION SIXTH. CONCERNING THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR OFFICE AND DUTIES. Qites. How shall a preacher be received through the annual conference.-" 1. In the time between the conferences, by the bishop, or the presiding elder of the circuit, or an elder who represents the office of a presiding elder at an annual or great meeting, until the next ensuing session of conference. No one will be received otherwise than upon probation. One who has been received on probation may be accepted or rejected without any injury to him. Otherwise there would be no probation. 2. Each person proposed for the ministr}- shall be examined by the conference on the following questions : Qucs. Has he learned to know God in Christ as a sin-pardon- ing God ? Has he obtained the pardon of his sins ? Has the love of God been shed abroad in your heart through the Holy Spirit ? Has he obtained the peace of God? Does he follow after holiness.? Has he a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifi- cation, sanctification, and redemption? 3. Has he more concern for his and his neighbor's salvation than for all else in the world? Can he submit to the advice of his brethren ? Will he l)e obedient to speak or hold his peace as the brethren VL\s.y deem best ? Is he willing to aid in sustaining the itinerant plan (or to travel the circuit) to the extent of his ability, and to support the same as much as possible? 4. What is the duty of a preacher? Ans. To preach Christ the crucified one wherever hearers are found; to establish class-meetings where it is profitable; to speak with the people concerning their souls' condition; lo guide the tempted, to stir up the l.ikewarm, and to edify all in the faith, grace, and knowledge of Jesus Christ as much as possi- ble; never to neglect visiting the sick, and with his life and con- duct to enforce the word he preaches. DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 35 5. What counsel shall be given a preacher? A}is. He shall be industrious, never squander time in un- necessary things at any place, be always grave; his motto be, "Holiness unto the Lord." He shall avoid all frivolity and jest- ing, speak modestly, and exercise discretion in his association with the female sex, and deport himself like a true Christian, 6. He shall always decline to believe accusations, unless they are sufficiently evident; he shall construe everything favorably as far as it can be made to agree with the truth. He shall speak evil of no one; whatever he may think of one, he shall keep it to himself until he can tell the one himself whom it concerns. 7. Let his employment be to save as many souls as possible; to this employment he shall consecrate himself entirely. He shall visit the needy. In all things he shall act not in view of self, but as a son of the gospel. As such it becomes him to use his time as prescribed, — in preaching, visiting from house to house, teaching and praying, and the stud}'- of the Word of God; thus he shall employ himself till the Lord comes. SECTION SEVENTH. CONCERNING THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS : HOW TO DEAL WITH THEM. Ques. What shall be done in case a bishop, or presiding elder, or preacher is reported to have been guilty of an offense for which the Word of God requires expulsion.? Ans. If a bishop be accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be dealt with.-* If accusation occurs which would be prejudi- cial to the gospel, it shall be made known to a presiding elder and an elder, who shall examine whether there is anything in the case; but they shall accept no complaint unattested by two or three witnesses, as the apostle says. Does it appear that he is justly accused, they shall put the case in writing and send the bishop a copy of it, and appoint a time to meet when the accuser and the bishop can be present, and the case shall be examined by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall be silenced until the annual conference, where the presiding elders and elders shall examine the case again. If he is found guilty, he shall be suspended from his office. 36 UNITED BRETHREN DlSCirUNES. Qiies. 2. If a presiding elder is accused of immoral conduct, what shall be done? Ans. In case of accusations detrimental to the gospel, the case shall be examined bj- the nearest elder and a preacher. Does it appear as if he were guilt3^ they shall make a written statement of the case and send the presiding elder a copy of it, and appoint a time when they shall meet, when the accusers and the presiding elder can be present. In the absence of the bishop another presiding elder and two elders shall be called. These shall examine the case. If he is found guilty, he shall be silenced till conference, where he shall be accountable. 07ies. 3. If an elder, or preacher, or exhorter be accused of immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Avs. The preacher in the vicinity, to whom it is known, shall take with him another preacher, or exhorter, or leader and exam- ine the case. Should it appear that he is guilty, he shall be notified, and a time shall be appointed when the accusers and the accused shall be present. In the absence of the bishop or presiding elder three elders or preachers shall examine the case. If he is found guilty, he shall be silenced until conference, where he shall be answerable. SECTION EIGHTH. CONCERNING MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Each member of the Church should confess that he believes the Bible to be the word of God; that he will henceforth endeavor to seek his salvation in Christ Jesus, and to work out his salva- tion with fear and trembling, that he may escape the impending eternal wrath. Each member shall endeavor to lead a strictly godly life; to be diligent in prayer, especially in secret prayer, and attend, if possible, all the meetings, both public divine services and praj-er-meetings, for his edification. Heads of families shall never neglect to have family prayers morning and evening, and set a good example in all Christian virtues. Every one shall endeavor to walk strictly as in the presence of God; to accustom himself in his business to a close fellowship with God; never to speak evil of his neighbor, to manifest love DISCIPLINE OF I»I7. 37 toward friend and enemy, do good to the poor, and seek in very deed to be a follower of Jesus Christ. Every member shall keep the Sabbath, as required b}' the Word of God; not to bu}' or sell, btit to vSpend the same in meditation, with reading and hearing the Word of God, and singing spirit- ual hymns to the honor and glory of God. Every member in this society should freely contribute every three months as much as his circumstances will allow to support the itinerant preachers. It is the duty of every member to lead a peaceable, quiet, and godly life; in his association with all people to live in peace as becometh a Christian. Especially shall every one be subject to the government, as the Word of God requires. Where the majority of the members regard it as profitable, the preacher shall establish one or more class-meetings, where the members, as man}'- as can, shall meet once a week to hold prayer- meetings together for mutual edification in the presence of God, and in love for good works in Christ Jesus. In each class, leaders should be elected in the presence of the preacher, whose duty it shall be to appoint prayer-meetings, to open and close them, and sometimes to hold class-meetings; to exhort each member, and conserve them in love, and to keep watch upon himself. When members offend against each other as brethren or sisters, rebuke first between thee and him alone. If he hears thee, then thou hast won him. If he hears thee not, then take one or two with thee, so that everything ma}' be attested by the mouths of two or three witnesses. If he refuses to hear them, tell it to the church. If he refuses to hear the church, regard him as a heathen and publican. If a dispute should arise between two or more members of the Church, because of debts or any other cause, and the contending parties cannot come to an agreement, then the preacher who has charge of the society, or the preacher who resides in the vicinit}-, shall examine the matter, and shall propose to the disputing parties a reference to a committee, which shall consist of three members of the Church, of whom the accuser shall choose one, the accused another, and these two the third, and these three shall adjust the dissension. In case one of the contending parties .should be dissatisfied with the decision, he may appeal to the next quarterly or great meeting by making 38 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. it known to the presiding elder, or an elder, and apply for a second endeavor to make peace. And if the preachers see a suflB- cient reason in this appeal, they shall grant it; in which case each party shall choose two members from the congregation and these four shall choose a fifth one; these shall determine the question in dispute finally. Should either of the persons, however, still be dissatisfied with the decision rendered, he shall thereby exclude himself from the Church. And if a member of the Church should refuse to submit a case of indebtedness or dispute, after it was recommended to him by a preacher or leader who had charge, or if a member of the Church enters suit at law, before the meas- ures aforesaid have been adopted, then such member shall be expelled from this Church, unless the matter in dispute had been of a nature to require or justify a legal decision, as in the case of executors or administrators. SUPPLEMENT. CONCERNING VISITATIONS FROM HOUSt TO HOUSE AND THE ENFORCEMENT OF A PRACTICAL CHRISTIANITY. Qiies. How can we further assist those who submit them- selves to our supervision? Ans. In this: that we impart to them instruction in their homes, which is very necessary to foster faith in and communion with God; further, bj^ avoiding a worldly disposition and culti- vating a heavenly one; in that we foster brotherl}- love, so that there may exist no evil thinking or judging in one against the other, and that we do as we wish to be done by. 2. Each preacher must consider it his dutj' to visit the people in their houses, and exhort them to abound to ever}' good work. Until this is done, and that seriously and zealously, we shall, upon the whole, be little benefited, and our godliness will not have a sufficiently deep foundation. Consequently, wherever we may be, we should not indulge in vain conversation. These visitations from house to house and special exhortations are, no doubt, founded upon the solemn words of the apostle, " I charge thee therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing. Preach the word; be instant in season, out of season; reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all longsuffering." DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 39 CONCERNING THE INSTRUCTION OF THE YOUTH. Ques. What shall be done in behalf of the rising generation? A?is. Whosoever has any zeal for God and the welfare of souls, let him begin the work without delay. Where there are children whose parents belong to the Church, let him gather them as often as practicable and profitable; converse with, in- struct, and exhort them in and to that which is good; pray with them earnestly, but simply, that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in their youth. MANNER AND METHOD OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. On the day appointed for the purpose a sermon and exhorta- tion shall be delivered, in which the office of the ministry and its duties shall be explained. Thereafter the bishop shall speak to the brethren present as follows: "Is there any among you to whom any trespass or other hindrance is known why one or the other of these persons should not be ordained to the office of an evangelical preacher, let him come forward in the name of God and make said transgres- sion known." If any violation or hindrance is discovered, the bishop shall defer the ordination of such person until the accused is found innocent. Then shall one of the elders read impressively the sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth verses of the first chapter of Paul to Titus. Thereafter the bishop shall proceed with the following examination of him who is to be ordained : Ques. Have you assurance that you are inwardly moved through the Holy Spirit to take upon you the office of a preacher, to serve God therein to his name's glory and the edification of his church? A?is. I trust I am. Ques. Do you believe without reserve all the canonical books of the Old and New Testaments ? A71S. I do believe them. Ques. Will you use diligence to order your walk according to the doctrine of Christ, and as much as in you lieth present yourself to the flock of Christ as an example of Christian living? A?is, I will, the Lord being my helper. Ques. Will you reverently obey those to whom the oversight 40 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. over 3-ou is entrusted, and follow their good exhortations with a willing and peaceable heart ? Ahs. I will strive to do so b}- the grace of God. The bishops (or a bishop and an elder) will now place their hands upon the head of each one severall}-, and the bishop shall saj': ' ' Take thou herewith authority to execute the office of an evan- gelical preacher in the church of God, in the name of God, the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost." The bishop shall then present to each one the Bible and say: "Take thou herewith authorit}' to preach and interpret the Word of God in the church of Christ." MANNER AND METHOD OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. After prayer, the twentieth chapter of the Acts of the Apostles may be read from the seventeenth verse to the close. Then shall the bishop ss-y to the one that is to be ordained: "Brother, inasmuch as the Holy Scriptures command us not to la}' hands hastily upon anj' one to rule in the church of Christ, you will answer the following questions:" Qites. Are j'ou convinced that the Word of God contains all that is necessary to our salvation through Christ, and are j^ou determined to teach the people from out of it ? Atis. Yes. Ques. Will you be faithful in ordaining others by laying on of hands and sending them out ? Atis. Yes. Then shall the bishop and one or two elders lay their hands upon the chosen person kneeling before them, and the bishop shall saj': " Receive thou the grace of God to the office and ser\'ice of a bishop in the church of God, which is herewith, by the laying on of our hands, committed unto }ou in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. Amen." Then shall the bishop present the Bible, saying: "Give heed unto reading, doctrine, and exhortation. Consider well the things contained in this book; be a shepherd of the flock of Jesus Christ, feeding them; assist the weak; seek the lost; be compassionate, that thou niayest receive the unfading crown of eternal life when the Chief Shepherd of the sheep shall appear. Amen." DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 41 ADDRESS TO CANDIDATES FOR MARRIAGE. " Much Beloved: We are here gathered in the sight of God and in the presence of these witnesses, for the purpose of unit- ing these two persons in wedlock as man and wife. "/. Taber: Will you take this woman to be your wedded wife, to live with her in wedlock, to love, comfort, and honor her, to support and cherish her in sickness and in health, and forsaking all others keep thee only unto her, and -that as long as God shall spare thy life.? If this is j^our purpose, then answer, ' Yes.' " Then the preacher shall address the woman: ''B. Cathar : Will you take this man to be 3'our husband, to live with him in wedlock after the ordinance of God; will you render him obedience, helpfulness, love, and honor; in health and sickness cherish him, and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him as long as God .shall spare thy life ? If this is your purpose, then answer, ' Yes.' "Extend to each other the right hand." The preacher \\\\\ take their two hands together and say: " ' What God hath joined together let no man put asunder.' And so I pronounce you man and wife, in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. God the Father, Son, and Hoh- Ghost bless you and keep you in the Lord, look upon 3'ou in mere}-, and endow 5-ou with his spiritual gifts and grace, that ye ma)' so live together in this world that in the future world ye may have eternal life. Amen." DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE United Brethren in Christ. Hagers-Town : PRINTED BY GRUBER & MAY. 1819. 43 OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. Amongst others he raised up an Otterbem, a Boslwt, and a Gucthing, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed ; they established in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious soul to Jesus Christ. There sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers as fellow labourers. The number of members of the society, in the different parts of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. ,, The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the year 1789. There were present: 45 46 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Bcehm, John Ernst, George Adam Guething, Henry Weidener. Christian Newcomer, The second conference was held in York count}', in Paradise township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, where there were present the following persons, viz. William Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, George Adam Guething, John Neidig, Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, Adam Lehman, And after mature deliberation, how the}- might labour most usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, the}^ again appointed such as fellotv' labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they had experienced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time the number of members continued to in- crease more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closelv, and labour most usefully to one common end; for some were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, others Mennonites, and 3'et others were Methodists. The}-, therefore, appointed a conference to be held the 25th of Septem- ber 1800, in Frederick countv, ISIaryland, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: William Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, George Adam Guething, John Hershey, Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Bcehm, Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf John George Pfrimmer, They there united themselves into a society, which bears the name of " The United Brethren in Christ;'' and elected William Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptise in such manner, as should best accord with his conviction. From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers were appointed, who travelled continually f because the number of preaching places could in no other wise be attended), and the DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 47 work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became necessary therefore to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too labourious for the preachers, who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the conference. In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected (because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend any longer), who should take charge of the society, and preserve discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the society. The want of a discipline in the society has long since been deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to accord with the word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the countrj^ by a majority of the votes of the members of the society; and there were present at the conference, that were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian New- comer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac Nigh- swander. Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, Westmoreland county, Penn. where they, after mature deliber- ation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to de- liver the following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines and rules together with the Word of God might be attended to and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our Lord, who taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we should esteem each other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded as Jesus Christ also was! Who took upon him the form of a servant, and became obedient even unto the death of the 48 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives of love and humility, might submit one to the other. He who cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humil- ity; hence Jesus saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire to be the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are to be the servants of each other, we must love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are mj^ true disciples, if 3'e have love to one another; and whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, that we maj' enjoy the glory and felicit)-, which Jesus obtained by prayer for his disciples, of his heavenly father, that we may be one even as he and the father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be likeminded, unanimous and con- cordant; and no one speak or think evil of the other : but implore the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his spirit and an earnest desire to lead a truh' Christian life, to the honour and glory of his holy name, and to our own eternal welfare. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. "We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost in the virgin Mary, and was born of her; that he is the saviour and mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered and died on the cro.ss for us, was buried, arose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the lavSt day to judge the quick and the dead. We believe in the Hoh* Ghost, that he is equal in being with the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. DISCIPLINE OF IS17 — EDITION OF 1819. 49 We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and the redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We further think, that the outward means, namely: baptism and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus, are to be in use and practised in all Christian societies; and that it is incumbent on his children particularly to practise them: But the manner in which, ought always to be left to the judgment and understanding of each. So also the practice or example of washing the feet must remain free to the judgment of every one. SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Question. After what manner and order are the transactions of the conferences to be considered ? Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these oc- casions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every person rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. Qst. How and after what manner are the members of a General conference to be chosen ? Ans. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put in nomination, and the same made known some time previous to the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of votes, shall be considered as members of the General conference. The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and 50 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there present. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the statement, and should any two or more have an equal number of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are elected. Ost. How often are the General conferences to be held? Ans. Every four years. Quest. Has the General conference any other powers, which the Annual conference has not? A?is. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not estab- lish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put aside the itinerant plan. The general conference has further to fix upon or determine the districts, where the j-earh' conferences are to be held. Quest. Which are the members of the yearly conference? Afis. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where the conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowledged in the same. Quest. In what manner and order are the transactions of a conference to be conducted ? Ans. I. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sit- ting closed with singing and prayer. 2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in con- junction with the bi.shop. 3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote or spread the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? What preachers are yet to continue on trial? Are any to be elected as elders ? Have any of the preachers died? Who are the presiding elders ? Who gives himself up to travel ? DISCIPLINE OF 1S17 — EDITION OF 1819. 5I 10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expences, and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preach- ers? Has reckoning been made with them? Have they received their dues? 11. When and where shall our next conference be held? 12. Are the elders ordained ? 13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 14. Is there any thing more to do? 15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the General conference? 16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION AND CONSECRATION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted ? Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General conference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the different circuits and of attending to the confer- ences, otherwise they cannot be elected. The persons thus elected shall be ordained by the laying on of the hands of our bishops and one or more elders, but if no bishop be present, then two elders shall perform the rite. Quest. What are the duties of the bishops? Ans. I. To preside in our conferences. 2. They have, in conjunction with an elder, whom they select, to fix the appointments of the itinerant preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station more than three years sucessively, unless particular circumstances require it, and then only with consent of all the bishops. 3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be travelled by the presiding elders. 4. They have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, 52 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- ant preachers, where they conceive it necessar}', and also to receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until the conference. 5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, attend to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the societies. 6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordination. 7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he still exercise his episcopal ofl&ce among us? No, unless it be that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more might be. 8. If, at au)^ time, it should so happen, that bj- reason of death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be with- out a bishop ; how is this want to be relieved ? The elder, who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the ab- sence of a bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other confer- ence, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each conference may know and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and the love and communion be maintained &c. unto the next general conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every conference. SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. Quest. How are the presiding elders to be elected? Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the elders, who have finished their time of probation ; and with the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. Quest. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? Ans. I . To travel through the district appointed him of the bishops, and preach as often as he can. DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 53 2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sunday; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and ser- iousness in their societies. 4. He can also change the travelling preachers in his district, but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or sus- pend preachers till the conference. 5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his district; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a propor- tioned part of their support quarterly, by giving them their allowance out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a single man, however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dollars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dol- lars: should the collection of one or the other district be insuffi- cient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they give each other all necessary information of the state of their districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other district should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. 54 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION FIFTH. OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. Quest. How is an elder constituted? A71S. After a probation of two years, he may be presented before the j'earlj' conference and ordained of the bishops b}- lay- ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 and 9th verses of St. Paul to Titus in his first chapter, are founded to be inherent in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, at his ordination. 1. What is the duty of an elder? To preach as often as he can and to baptise; to perform the office of matrimon}-, and assist the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper, but when the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine worship, endeavour to establish and hold class-meetings, where a majority of the members conceive it necessar}-, and assist in electing the leaders. 2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly, for the travelling preachers and for the poor; to take specification or catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all things be done in an orderlj' manner. 3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor and who preach amongst poor people- 4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the di.strict assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstance, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- ference. 5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is ■ reasonable and just that the elders should provide for their sup- port in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making DISCIPLINE OF 1S17— EDITION OF 1819. 55 a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district, though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling preachers. SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND OF THEIR DUTY. Quest. How is a preacher to be received ? A71S. I. By the yearly conference. 2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, ma}^ either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be no trial at all. 3. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by the conference, and the following questions put to him, viz. Have you known God as a pardoning God in Christ ? Have you obtained forgiveness of j'our sins? Is the love of God, through Christ, shed abroad in your heart? Have you obtained peace with God ? Do you follow after holiness? Have you a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifi- cation, holiness and redemption ? Does 5'our own salvation, and the salvation of j'our fellow mortals lie nearer to j-our heart, than all other things in the world ? Can you subject 3-ourself to the counsel of j-our brethren? Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold 3'our peace, as the brethren ma}' think fit and expedient ? Are you willing, as much as in you lies, to assist in upholding the itinerary plan (or travelling the circuit) and to support the same as much as possible ? Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher ? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class meetings where they may be found useful ; to converse with the members on the situation or condition of their 56 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those who are afflicted and labour under temptations; to animate the indolent or slothful, and endeavour as much as possible to edifj'' and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; nev'er to omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers b}' a well ordered exemplary life. Quest. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? Afis. Be diligent. Never trifle awa}- 3-our time with unneces- sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let 3'our motto be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; demean 3-ourself in all respects as a true Christian. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one without good evidence; and ahva3-s put the most favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will bear. Speak evil of no one; whatever ma3^ be 3'our thoughts, keep them within your own breast, till 3^ou can tell the person con- cerned, what 3'ou think wrong in his conduct. 3. Let 3'our business be to save as man3' souls as possible; to this emplo3'ment give yourself up wlioll3-. Visit those who need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a Son in the Gospel. As such it becomes 3^our duty to emplo3^ 3'our time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and visiting from house to house; in instructing and pra3'er, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord cometh. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qsf. I. What shall be done, when a Bishop, a presiding elder or a preacher is under report of being guilt3' of so)ne crime forbidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practise, suffi- cient for excommunication? Arts. When a l)ish()]) is accused of immoral conduct, how .shall he be dealt with ? _ When charges happen to be made, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the dutv of a presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 57 examine whether they are founded in truth; but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present to each other, when the cause shall be tried b}^ two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elders and elders shall again examine and trj- the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from ofiSce. Quest. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Aiis. Where charges happen to be brought against a presid- ing elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, the}' shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. Quest. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done? Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the accusers and the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be con- victed, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess that he believes the Bible to be and contain the Holy Word of 58 UNITED BRETHREX DISCIPLINES. God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus; and work out his salvation with fear and trembling to the end that he may be enabled \.o flee from the eternal wrath to come. Every member should endeavour to walk closeh* and lead a godl}- life; be diligent in prayer, particularly- in private; and, for his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, both public worship and private prayer meetings. Heads of families should never omit to-pra}' with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to v^^alk closelj-, as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communion with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day hoi}', as required in the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honour and glor}' of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godl)' life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- tian to live in peace — particularlj' to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Amongst the members of the societ}- the preachers shall establish one or more class-meetings, w-here a majority of the members may conceive it necessar}'; and the members, when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint prayer-meetings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their duty to hold class meetings at times, to exhort the members and preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. When members trespass against each other, as brethern or sisters, correct the fault first between thee and him alone: If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear DISCIPWNE OF 1817 — EDITION OP 1819. 59 thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word ma}' be established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a Publican. On any dispute between two or more of the members of our society, concerning the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled b}^ the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the societ}', or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recom- mend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defend- ant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third: the three arbiters are then to deside the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and if the preachers find suflB.cient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration, in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be .final; and an}' person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the society; or shall enter into a law suit with another member, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as: executors or administrators. APPENDIX. OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known) of the evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dread- ful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us.? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves — the work of God, and the souls of our people. Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other? 6o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. A?is. I. Let us be deepl}' convinced of the absolute neces- sit}' of it. 2. Pray earnestl}' for, and speak truly and freel}- to each other. 3. When we meet, let us never part without pra3er. 4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 5. Never speak lightl}' of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labour, in honour, each to prefer the other before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of //le muses, evils a7id cures of heart, a?id cJnirch divisions. OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Qriest. How can we further assist those under our care ? A?is. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is of unspeakable necessity, in order to promote confidence and communion with God among us; further to wean us of the love of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that no evil tlti?iking or jiidging of one another be found amongst us; and lastl}^ that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the people from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all good. Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, upon the whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not be deeply enough founded; therefore, wherever we may be, we should guard against useless or loose talking. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to house and exhorting the people, is founded or implied in those solemn words of the Apostle: ''I charge thee before God and the Lord fesus Christ, zvho shall judge the quick and dead at his appeanng, preach the JVord; be ifistatit in season, ojit of season: Reprove, rebtike, exhort, with all lo7ig suffering:' OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. Quest. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? A71S. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 61 souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are found, whose parents are in societj', meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray with them earnestly, yet simply and plain, that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days of their youth. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall say unto the people present: 3. Beloved Brethren in Christ! Is there any amongst you, who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be ordained elders (or deacons as the case may be), for which he ought not to be admitted to that office, let him come forth in the name of God and shew what the crime or impediment is. 4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party accused shall be found clear of the crime. Then shall be read i Tim. 3.8 — 13. Likewise must the deacons be grave, not double tongued, not given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre; holding the mystery of the faith in a pure conscience. And let these also first be proved, then let them use the office of a deacon, being found blameless. Even so must their wives be grave, not slan- derers; sober, faithful in all things. Let the deacons be the husbands oi one wife, ruling their children and their own houses well. For they that have used the office of a deacon well, pur- chase to themselves a good degree, and great boldness in the faith which is in Christ Jesus. Quest. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God in the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy name.'' Ans. I trust, with the help of God. Quest. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- ment? Ans. I do believe them. Quest. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 62 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholsome example of the flock of Christ ? Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. Quest. Will you reverently obey them, to whom the charge and government over you is committed, following with a glad mind and will their godly admonitions ? A71S. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. Then pra3'er is made. After prayer, the bishops (or bishop and elders) shall lay their hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say: "Take thou authority to execute the office of an elder (or minister) in the church of God. In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost," Amen. Hereupon the bishop shall deliver to every one of them the Holy Bible, saying: "Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in the church of Christ." Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke V. 35—38: Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knocketh, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those ser- vants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After which the following-benediction is pronounced bj^ the bishop: The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge of Jesus Christ otir Lord, Amen. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. After prayer the bishop reads as follows: Hear ye the Word of the Lord! Matth 28. V. 18—20. And Jesus came and spake unto them, saying: All power is given unto me in Heaven and in Earth. Go ye therefore, and teach all 7iations, baptizing them in the name DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 63 of the Father, afid of the Sou, and of the Holy Ghost; teaching them to observe all things, whatever I have commanded yozi: and, lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the ivorld. Acts 20. V. 27 — 32. For I have not shunned to declare unto you all the counsel of God. Take heed therefore, unto yourselves, and to all the flock, over which the Holy Ghost hath made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which he hath purchased with his own blood. For I know this, that after my departing shall grievous wolves enter in among you, not sparing the flock. Also of your own-selves shall men arise, speaking perverse things, to draw away disciples after them. Therefore watch, and remember, that by the space of three years I ceased not to warn every one night and day with tears. And now, brethren, I com- mand you to God, and to the word of his grace, which is able to build you up, and to give you an inheritance among all them, which are sanctified. I Tim. 3. V. I — 7. This is a true saying. If a man desire the office of a bishop, he desireth a good work. — A bishop then must be blameless, the husband of one wife, vigilant, sober, of good behaviour, given to hospitality, apt to teach; not given to wine, no striker, not greedy of filthy lucre; but patient, not a brawler, not covetous; one that ruleth well his own house, having his children in subjection with all gravity; (for if a man know not how to rule his own house, how shall he take care of the church of God.'*) not a novice, lest being lifted up with pride, he fall into the condemnation of the Devil. Moreover he must have a good report of them, which are without; lest he fall into re- proach, and the snare of the Devil. When the gospel and epistles are read, and the discourse there- after following ended, the bishop requires the person elected to step forth, moves the congregation to prayer, and then addresses him, who is to be ordained, as follows: Brother! For as much as the holy scriptures command, that we should not be hasty in laying on hands, and admitting any person to government in the church of Christ, which he hath purchased with no less price than the effusion of his own blood; therefore, before I admit you to this administration, I will ques- tion you on some certain points relative thereto. The Bishop. Are you persuaded, that the old and new testa- ments contain sufficiently all doctrine required of necessity for eternal salvation, through faith in Jesus Christ? and are you 64 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. determined out of the same hoi}'- scriptures to instruct the people committed to your charge, according to the abilitj', Avliich God shall grant you, and to teach or maintain nothing, but what may be concluded and proven b}' the same ? Ans. Yes, I am persuaded, and will, with the help of God, do according thereto. 77/1? Bishop. Are you willing to exercise j'ourself faithfull}- in the same holy scriptures, and to call upon God b}' praj'er for the true understanding of them, so that you may be able to teach wholesome doctrine ? A71S. I am willing with the help of God so to do. The Bishop. Will you, as much as in you lieth, maintain and set forth a kind and peaceable disposition towards ever}" one, and endeavour to promote the like good will amongst others, accord- ing to the authority vested in j-ou by the word of God ? Ans. I will so do, the Lord being ni}' helper. The Bishop. Will you, in ordaining, sending abroad and laying hands upon others, act faithfully and with a good conscience.'* Ans. I will so do b}^ the help of God. Then the bishop shall sa}^ Almighty God, our heavenl}' father, grant unto you strength and power to perform all these things, that yo\x maj' be found to be a true and faithful minister at the day of account, through Jesus Christ our Lord, Amen. The Bishop. Let us pray. After prayer the bishop and elders present, shall lay their hands upon the head of the elected person kneeling before them upon his knees, the bishop saying: Receive the Holy Ghost for the office and work of a bishop in the church of God, now committed unto thee by the imposition of our hands, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the H0I3' Ghost, Amen. Then the bishop shall deliver him the Bible, saj-ing: Give heed unto reading, exhortation and doctrine. Think upon the things contained in this holy Book. Be diligent to practise them. Take heed unto thyself, and to thy doctrine. Feed the flock of Christ. Hold up the weak. Be compassionate, and administer discipline with mercy, that 3^011 may receive the crown of glory, through Jesus Christ our Lord, Amen. Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall conclude with prayer. DISCIPLINE OF I«I7 — EDITION OE 1S19. 65 THE FORM OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. ADDRESS. Dear Beloved! We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, namely N. and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- mon}-: which is an honourable estate, instituted of God in the time of man's innocency. Quest. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just cause why these two persons ma}' not lawfully be joined together, let him now speak, or else hereafter for ever hold his peace. If no impediment be alledged, then shall the minister say unto the man: N. N. Avilt thou have this woman (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love her, com- fort her, honour and keep her, in sickness and in health; and forsaking all other, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. Then shall the minister say unto the woman: N. N. wilt thou have this man (N. N.) to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou obey him, serve him, love, honour, and keep him in sickness and in health ; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him, so long as ye both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands together, and the minister shall say: Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put asunder. For as much as N. and N. have consented together in wedlock, and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses present, I pronounce that they are man and wife together, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Hoi}'- Ghost. The God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and this woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal life, Amen. Let us pray. THE END. DOCTRINE AKD DISCIPLINE United Brethren in Christ. HAGERS-TOWN: PRINTED BY J. GRUBER and D. MAY. 1822. 67 OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHERN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in America, who, living scattered in this extensive countr}', had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. Amongst others he raised up an Otterbei?i, a Bcchni^ and a Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious soul to Jesus Christ. There sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard ; for the harvest was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow labourers. The number of members of the society, in the different parts of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. 6q \ 70 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the j^ear 1789. There were present: William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Bcehm, John Krnst, George Adam Guething, Henry Weidener. Christian Newcomer, The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, where there were present the following persons, viz. William Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, George Adam Guething, John Xeidig, Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, Adam Lehman, And after mature deliberation, how the}^ might labour most usefully in the vineyard of the I^ord, the}' again appointed such as fellow labourers, of whom thej' had cause to believe that they had experienced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time the number of members continued to increase more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closel}-, and labour most usefull}' to one common end; for some were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, others Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. The}- therefore appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: William Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Bcehm, Henry Krum, George Adam Guething, John Ilershey, Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henrj- Boehm, Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf. John George Pfrimmer, They there united themselves into a societ}-, which bears the name of "'The United Brethren in Christ-" and elected William Otterbein and Martin Bcehm, as superintendants or bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such manner, as should best accord with his conviction. From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers DISCIPLINE OF 182I. 71 were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number of preaching places could in no other wise be attended), and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the conference. In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected (because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend any longer,) who should take charge of the society, and preserve discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the society. The want of a discipline in the society has long since been deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to accord with the word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members of the society; and there were present at the conference, that were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac Nighswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, West- moreland county, Penn. where they, after mature deliberation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to deliver the fol- lowing Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines and rules, together with the Word of God, might be attended to and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our Lord, who taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we should esteem each other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded, as Jesus Christ 72 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. also was! AVho took upon him the form of a ser\'ant, and became obedient even unto the death of the cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives of love and humility, might submit one to the other. lie who cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humilit}'; hence Jesus saith: Whoso amongst j-ou shall desipe to be the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are to be the servants of each other, we must love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are my true disciples, if ye have love to one another; and whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, that we may enjoy the glorj' and felicity, which Jesus obtained b\' prayer for his disciples of his heavenl}' father, that we may be ojie even as he and the father are one. There- fore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be likeminded, unanimous and concordant; and no one speak or think evil of the other: but implore the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his spirit and an earnest desire to lead a trulj' christian life, to the honour and glory of his holy name, and our own eternal welfare. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost in the virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the saviour and mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suf- fered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third da}', ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with DISCIPLINE OP 1 82 1. 73 the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the bod}', and life everlasting. We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salva- tion; that every true Christian is boutid to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We further think, that the outward means, namely: baptism and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus, are to be in use and practised in all Christian societies; and that it is incumbent on his children particularly to practise them: But the manner in which, ought always to be left to the judgment and understanding of each. So also the practice or example of washing the feet must remain free to the judgment of every one. SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Qtiestio7i. After what manner and order are the transactions of the conferences to be considered ? Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. (Jst. ' How and after what manner are the members of a Gen- eral conference to be chosen ? A71S. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put in nomination, and the same made known some time previous to the election; and those two, who shall have.a majority of votes. 74 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. shall be considered as members of the General conference. The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there pres- ent. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the state- ment, and should an}' two or more have an equal number of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are elected. QsL How often are the General conferences to be held ? Afis. Every four years. QsL Has the General conference any other powers, which the Annual conference has not? Afis. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not establish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put aside the itinerant plan. The general conference has further to fix upon or determine the districts, where the j-early conferences are to be held. Quest. Which are the members of the yearly conference? A?is. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where the conference is held, or who ma}' be taken up and acknowledged in the same. Quest. In what manner and order are the transactions of a conference to be conducted? A71S. I. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and pra5'er performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sitting closed with singing and praj^er, 2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in con- junction with the bishop. * 3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be blameless and whether they emplo}' as much time as possible to promote or spread the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 5. What preachers are yet to continue on trial ? 6. Are any to be .sleeted as elders ? 7. Have any of the preachers died ? DISCIPLINE OF 1821. 75 8. Who are the presiding elders ? 9. Who gives himself up to travel? 10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expences, and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preachers ? Has reckoning been made with them ? Have they received their dues ? 11. When and where shall our next conference be held? 12. Are the elders ordained? 13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 14. Is there any thing more to do ? 15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the General conference? 16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol ? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION AND CONSECRATION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted ? Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise they cannot be elected. The persons thus elected shall be ordained by the laying on of the hands of our bishops and one or more elders, but if no bishop be present, then two elders shall perform the rite. Quest. What are the duties of the bishops ? Ans. 1. To preside in our conferences. 2. They have, in conjunction with an elder, whom they select, to fix the appointments of the itinerant preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station more than three years successive!}', unless particular circumstances require it, and then only with consent of all the bishops. 3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be trav- elled bj' the presiding elders. 76 VNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. . 4. Thej' have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- ant preachers, where they conceive it necessary, and also to receive and suspend preachers, as necessity maj^ require, until the conference. 5. The}' have to travel through the connexion at large, attend to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the societies. 6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- tion. 7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several confer- ences, and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he still exercise his episcopal ofRce among us? No, unless it be that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more might be. 8. If, ai any time, it should so happen, that by reason of death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be without a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the absence of the bi.shop, shall perform the duties of a bishop dur- ing the sitting of the conference; he shall akso attend the other conference, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each conference ma)' know and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and that love and communion be maintained &c. unto the next general conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every conference. SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. Quest. How arc the presiding elders to be elected ? A71S. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the elders, who have finished their time of probation ; and with the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. Quest. What are the duties of a presiding elder? DISCIPLINE OP I«2I '^'j Ans. I. To travel through the district appointed him of the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sunday ; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likelj^ to result, and to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness in their societies. 4. He can also change the travelling preachers in his district, but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or suspend preachers till the conference. 5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned part of their support quarterly, by giving them their allowance out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a single man however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dollars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annually. Should the collection of one or the other district be insuflScient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they give each other all necessary information of the state of their districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other district should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. 78 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION FIFTH. OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. Quest. How is an elder constituted? A?is. After a probation of two years, he may be presented before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by laying on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 and 9th verses of St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are found to be inherent in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, at his ordination. 1. What is the duty of an elder? To preach as often as he can and to baptize; to perform the office of matrimony, and assist the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine worship; endeavour to establish and hold class-meetings, where a majority of the members conceive it necessary, and assist in electing the leaders. 2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the travelling preachers and for the poor; to take {specification or catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed b}' some other mem- ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all things be done in an orderly manner. 3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer w^ant himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor and who preach amongst poor people. 4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the di.strict assigned him, he mu.st first acquaint the presiding elder of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstance, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- ference. 5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making a DISCIPLINE OF 1821. 79 collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district, though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling preachers. SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND OF THEIR DUTY. Quest, How is a preacher to be received ? A71S. I. By the yearly conference. 2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than on trial; aud one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be no trial at all. 3. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by the conference, and the following questions put to him, viz. Have you known God as a pardoning God iu Christ? Have you obtained forgivenesss of your sins ? Is the love of God, through Christ, shed abroad in your heart.? Have you obtained peace with God? Do you follow after holiness ? Have you a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justi- fication, holiness and redemption? Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow mortals lie nearer to your heart, than all other things in the world ? Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethern? Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as the brethren may think fit and expedient? Are you willing, as much as in you lies, to assist in upholding the itinerary plan ( or travelling the circuit ) and to support the same as much as possible ? Qst. 2. "What are the duties of a preacher? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class meetings where they may be found useful; to converse with the members on the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those who are afflicted and labour under temptations, to animate 8o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. the indolent or slothful, and endeavour as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never to omit to visit the sick, but on all occa- sions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers by a well ordered exemplar^' life. Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away 5'our time with unneces- sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let 30ur motto be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- verse sparingly, and conduct \ourself prudentlj^ with women; demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one without good evidence; and alwaj-s put the most favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will bear. Speak evil of no one; whatever ma}' Ije your thoughts, keep them within your own breast, till j'ou can tell the person con- cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need it, and act in all things not according to j^our own will, but as a Son in the Gospel. As such it becomes your duty to emplo}- your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and visiting from house to house; in instructing and pra5'er, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord cometh. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a Bishop, a presiding elder or preacher is under report of being guilty of some crime forbidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practice, suffi- cient for excommtinication? A71S. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be dealt with.'' When charges happen to be made, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it .shall be the dut}- of a presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and examine whether the}'' are founded in truth; but, DISCIPLINE OP 1 82 1. 81 as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elders and elders shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from oflSce. Quest. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done .? A71S. Where charges happen to be brought against a presid- ing elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. Quest. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done? A71S. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess, that he believes the Bible to be and contain the Holy Word of 82 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to Jicc from the eternal wrath to come. Every member should endeavour to walk closely and lead a godly life; be diligent in praj'er, particularly in private; and, for his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, both public worship and private praj'-er meetings. Heads of families should never omit to praj^ with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communioi'i with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ m deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- tian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall estab- lish one or more class-meetings, where a majority of the members may conceive it necessarj'; and the members, when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of the preacher, and their dut}'^ shall be to appoint pra5'er-meet- ings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their duty to hold class-meetings at times, to exhort the members and preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sisters, correct the fault first between thee and him alone: If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear DISCIPLINE OF 1 82 1. 83 thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a Publican. On any dispute between two or more of the members of our society, concerning the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recom- mend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defend- ant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third: the three arbiters are then to deside the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and if the preachers find sufiicient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another mem- ber, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except- ing the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a proc- ess at law, as: executors or administrators. APPENDIX. OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known) of the evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the work of God, and the souls of our people. Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other ? 84 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. A US. I. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. 2. Pray earnestly for, and speak trul}' and freeh' to each other. 3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 5. Never speak lightly of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's character in everj* thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labour, in honour, each to pefer the other before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of i/ie causes, evils a?id cures of heart, and church divisions. OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Qjiest. How can we further assist those under our care .'' A71S. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is of unspeakable necessity, in order to promote confidence and communion with God among us; further to wean us of the love of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that no evil thinking or judging of one another be found amongst us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the peo- ple from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all good. Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, upon the whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not be deeph' enough founded; therefore, wherever we may be, we should guard against useless or loose talking. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to house and exhorting the people, is founded or implied in those solemn words of the Apostle: "/ charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, ivho shall judge the quick and dead at his appearing , preach the Word; be instant in season, out of seasofi: Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all long suffering. ' ' OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. Q?icst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the DISCIPLINE OF 182I. 85 souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are found, whose parents are in society, meet them as often as possi- ble; speak freel}^ with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and praj^ with them earnestly, yet simply and plain, that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days of their j'outh. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall say unto the people present: 3. Beloved Brethren in Christ! Is there any amongst you, who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be ordained elders (or deacons as the case may be), for which he ought not to be admitted to that oflSce, let him come forth in the name of God and shew what the crime or impediment is. 4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party accused shall be found clear of the crime. Then shall be read i Tim. 3, 8 — 13. Likewise must the deacons be grave, not double tongued, not given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre; holding the mystery of the faith in a pure conscience. And let these also first be proved, then let them use the office of a deacon, being found blameless. Even so must their wives be grave, not slan- derers; sober, faithful in all things. Let the deacons be the husbands of one wife, ruling their children and their own houses well. For they that have used the office of a deacon well, pur- chase to themselves a good degree, and great boldness in the faith which is in Christ Jesus. Quest. Do you trust that you are inwardlj^ moved by the holy Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God in the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy name? A71S. I trust, with the help of God. Quest. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- ment? Ans. I do believe them. Quest. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 86 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 3'our own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the flock of Christ? A?is. I will, the Lord being my helper. Qiiest. Will 5'ou reverently obey them, to whom the charge and government over you is committed, following with a glad mind and will their godly admonitions; A71S. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. Then prayer is made. After prayer, the bishops (or bishop and elders) shall lay their hands upon the heads of ever}' one of them, and sa}'. "Take thou authority to execute the ofilce of an elder (or min- ister) in the church of God. In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost." Amen. Hereupon the bishop shall deliver to every one of them the Holy Bible, saying: ' ' Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in the church of Christ." Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, V. 35—38: Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he "will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those servants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After which the following benediction is pronounced by the bishop: The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge of J esiis Christ 02ir Lord. Amen. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. After prayer the bishop reads as follows: Hear ye the Word of the Lord! Matth 28. V. 18 — 20. And Jesus came and spake unto them, saying: All power is given unto vie in Heaven and in Earth. Go ye therefore, and teach all ?iations, baptizing them in the Jiame DISCIPLINE OF 1 82 1. 87 of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost; teaching them to observe all tJmigs, whatever I have commanded yo7i: a?id, lo, I ayn with yozi alway, even unto the end of the world. Acts 20. V. 27 — 32. For I have not shunned to declare unto you all the counsel of God. Take heed therefore, unto your- selves, and to all the flock, over which the Holy Ghost hath made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which he hath purchased with his own blood. For I know this, that after my departing shall grievous wolves enter in among you, not sparing the flock. Also of your ownselves shall men arise, speaking perverse things, to draw away disciples after them. Therefore watch, and remember, that by the space of three years I ceased not to warn every one night and day with tears. And now, brethren, I command you to God, and to the word of his grace, which is able to build you up, and to give you an inheritance among all them, which are sanctified. I Tim. 3, V. I — 7. This is a true saying: If a man desire the office of a bishop, he desireth a good work. — A bishop then must be blameless, the husband of one wife, vigilant, sober, of good behaviour, given to hospitality, apt to teach; not given to wine, no striker, not greedy of filthy lucre, but patient, not a brawler, not covetous; one that ruleth well his own house, having his children in subjection with all gravity; (for if a man know not how to rule his own house, how shall he take care of the church of God?) not a novice, lest being lifted up with pride, he fall into the condemnation of the Devil. Moreover he must have a good report of them which are without, lest he fall into reproach, and the snare of the Devil. When the gospel and epistles are read, and the discourse there- after following ended, the bishop requires the person elected to step forth, moves the congregation to prayer, and then addresses him, who is to be ordained, as follows; Brother! For as much as the holy scriptures command that we should not be hasty in laying on hands, and admitting any person to government in the church of Christ, which he hath purchased with no less price than the effusion of his own blood; therefore, before I admit you to this administration, I will ques- tion you on some certain points relative thereto. The Bishop. Are you persuaded, that the old and new testa- ments contain sufficiently all doctrine required of necessity for eternal salvation, through faith in Jesus Christ? And are you 88 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. determined out of the same holy scriptures to instruct the people committed to your charge, according to the abilitj', which God shall grant j'ou, and to teach or maintain nothing, but what may be concluded and proven by the same? Ans. Yes, I am persuaded, and will with the help of God, do according thereto. The Bishop. Are you willing to excercise yourself faithfull}' in the same holy scriptures, and to call upon God by praj-er for the true understanding of them, so that }ou ma}- be able to teach wholesome doctrine? Ans. I am willing with the help of God so to do. The Bishop. Will you, as much as in you lieth, maintain and set forth a kind and peaceable disposition towards ever}- one, and endeavour to promote the like good will amongst others, according to the authorit^^ vested in 5'ou by the word of God ? A71S. I will so do, the Lord being my helper. The Bishop. Will j'ou, in ordaining, sending abroad and lay- ing hands upon others, act faithfully' and with a good conscience? Ans. I will so do by the help of God. Then the Bishop shall sa}': Almighty God, our heavenly father, grant unto a'ou strength and power to perform all these things, that you may be found to be a true and faithful minister at the day of account, through Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. The Bishop. Let us pray. After prayer the bishop and elders present, shall lay their hands upon the head of the elected person kneeling before them upon his knees, the bishop saying: Receive the Holy Ghost for the office and work of a bishop in the church of God, now committed unto thee by the imposition of our hands, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. Amen. Then the bishop shall deliver him the Bible, saying: Give heed unto reading, exhortation and doctrine. Think upon the things contained in this holy Book. Be diligent to practise them. Take heed unto thyself, and to thy doctrine. Feed the flock of Christ. Hold up the weak. Be compassionate, and administer discipline with mercy, that you may receive the crown of glorj', through Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall conclude with prayer. discipline; of 1821. 89 THE FORM OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. ADDRESS. Dear Beloved/ We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, namely, N. and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- mony; which is an honorable estate, instituted of God in the time of man's innocency. Quest. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just cause why these two persons may not lawfully be joined together, let him now speak, or else hereafter forever hold his peace. If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto the man: N. N. wilt thou have this woman (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love her, com- fort her, honour and keep her in sickness and in health ; and forsaking all other, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. Then shall the minister say unto the woman: N. N. wilt thou have this man (N.N.) to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance.? Wilt thou obey him, serve him, love, lionoi:r and keep him in sickness and in health; and forsaking all othei-s, keep thee onlj' unto him, so long as j-e both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands together, and the minister shall say: Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put asunder. For as much as N. and N have consented together in wedlock, and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses present, I pronounce that the}'^ are man and wife together, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. The God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and this woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal life. Amen. Let us pray. 90 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. FURTHER APPENDIX OF THE GENERAL CONFERENCE, HELD THE 15th DAY OF MAY, 1821, AT THE HOUSE OF DEWALD MECHLING, IN FAIR- FIELD COUNTY, IN THE STATE OF OHIO. 1. Resolved, that the preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, shall also account at the annual conference, and limit their sala- ries according to their support and necessary expences; and should a surplus of their salary remain, to make a return of the same to the General conference, to be expended for the support of the itinerant preachers. 2. Resolved, that the presiding elder and preachers of each district appoint a Stewart, and in each class an assistant Stewart, to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which pro- duce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and to be proportionably distributed among the travelling preachers. All assistant Stewarts to sub- mit their accounts to the Stewart of the district and settle with him quarter yearly; the district stewarts to submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly meetings, and the presid- ing elder to submit the same to the Annual conference, in order to show what each travelling minister has received, and that order and equality be observed. 3. Resolved, that the presiding elders hold a conference at all quarterly meetings with the preachers and classleaders ; and where a person is recommended as a preacher or exhorter, the presiding elder is to examine him in the presence of the preach- ers; and should he be found competent in his standing and abilities, he may permit such brother to preach or exhort; and he shall transmit his testimony and examination in writing to the Annual conference, to be by them approved or disapproved, according as they may conceive the same consonant with the honor and glory of the Supreme Being. And the presiding elder and preacher shall have power to silence an admitted brother for unchristian like behaviour before the Annual confer- ence, if they think proper. 4. Resolved, That all slavery, in every sense of the word, be totally prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. Should some be found therein, or others apply to be admitted as DISCIPWNE OF 1 82 1. 91 members, who hold slaves, they can neither remain to be mem- bers or be admitted as such, provided they do not personally manumit or set free such slave, wherever the laws of the state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly conference, to be by them specified, what length of time such slave shall serve his master or other person, until the amount given for him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. 5. Resolved, That if any member of this society shall pub- licly transgress as aforesaid, such member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not hum- ble, the same shall be publicly excluded from the congregation. the; end. DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE United Brethren in Christ. BALTIMORE: PRINTED BY JOHN T. HANZSHE, 1826 93 OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN •IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the lyord, our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. Amongst others he raised up an Ottcrbem, a Boehm, and a Giicthing, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- lished in many places excellent societies, und led many a precious soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow labourers. The number of members of the society, in the different parts of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how; and in what manner they might be most useful. 95 96 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the year 1789. There were present: William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Boehm, John Ernst, George Adam Guething, Henry Weidener, Christian Newcomer. The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, where there were present the following persons, viz. William Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, George A. Guething, John Neidig, Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, Adam Lehman, And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they had experienced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time the number of members continued to in- crease more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, and labour most usefully to one common end; for some were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, others Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. The)- there- fore appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, Marj'land, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: William Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, George Adam Guething, John Hershey, Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, John George Pfrimmer. They there united themselves into a societ^^ which bears the name of " The United Brethren in Christ]''' and elected William Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops and agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such manner, as should best accord with his conviction. discipline; of 1825. 97 From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number of preaching places could in no other wise be attended), and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the conference. In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, und brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected (because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend any longer, ) who should take charge of the society and preserve discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the society. The want of a discipline in the society has long since been deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to accord with the word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members of the society; and there were present at the conference, that were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac Nighswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, West- moreland County, Penn. where they, after mature deliberation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to deliver the following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines and rules, together with the Word of God, might be attended to and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our Lord, who taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we should esteem 98 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. each other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded, as Jesus Christ also was! Who took upon him the form of a servant, and became obedient even unto the death of the cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives of love and humil- ity, might submit one to the other. He who cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humilit}-; htnce Jesus saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire to be the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are to be the servants of each other, we must love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are my true disciples, if ye have love to one another; and whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, that we may enjoy the glorj^ and felicity, which Jesus obtained by prayer for his disciples of his heavenly father, that we may be one even as he and the father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like- minded, unanimous and concordant and no one speak or think evil of the other but implore the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his spirit and an earnest desire to lead a truly christian life, to the honour and glory of his holy name, and our own eternal welfare. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the hol}^ Ghost equal in essence or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the virgin Mar}', and was born of her: that he is the saviour and mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace profferred in Jesus. That this Jesus siiffered and (lied on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third da}', ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. discipline; of 1S25. 99 We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the bod}^ and life everlasting. We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true peni- tence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We are convinced that the outward means of grace, namely: baptism & the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practised by all Christian societies: and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly to practise them; but the manner in which ought always to be left to the judgment and understanding of, every individual. So also the exemple of washing the feet is left to the judgment of every one to practise or not: but it is not becom- ing any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose judgment and understanding in this respect are different from his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of his brethren and shall therefore be answerable to the annual con- ference. SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Question. After what manner and order are the transactions of the conferences to be considered 1 Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these occasions, as in the immediate presence of God.- That every person rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. Ost. How and after what manner are the members of a General conference to be chosen ? lOO UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Ans. In ever}- district the itinerant preachers, if such are present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put in nomination, and the same made known some time pre- vious to the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of votes, shall be considered as members of the General confer- ence. The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there present. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the statement, and should any two or more have an equal number of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are elected. N. B. The votes shall be taken b}- an exhorter, leader, or Stewart. QsL How often are the General conferences to be held? Ans. Every four years. QsL Has the the General conference an}- other powers, which the Annual conference has not? Afts'-. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not establi.sh any article, which maj' tend to abolish, undo or put aside the itinerant plan. The General conference has further to fix upon or determine the districts, where the yearly conferences are to be held. OsL Which are the members of the yearlj' conference? Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where the conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowl- edo-ed in the same. But none then ordained preachers shall have a vote in the conference. OsL In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- ference to be conducted? Afis. I. Tliere will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sit- ting closed with singing and prayer. 2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the DISCIPLINE OF 1825. lOI bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in conjunction with the bishop. N. B. Wherever it is necessary two secretaries shall be elected, andthe records of the proceedings of the conference shall be kept, both in the English and German languages. 3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote or spread the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial .? 5. What preachers are yet to continue on trial ? 6. Are any to be elected as elders ? 7. Have any of the preachers died? 8. Who are the presiding elders ? 9. Who gives himself up to travel ? 10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preach- ers ? Has reckoning been made with them ? have they received their dues ? 1 1 . When and where shall our next conference be held ? 12. Are the elders ordained ? 13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 14. Is there any thing more to do? 15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the General conference? 16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted ? Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise they cannot be elected. Qst. What are the duties ol the bishops ? I02 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Aus. I. To preside in our conferences. 2. The3' have, in conjunction with the presiding elder, that may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the travelling preachers for the several circuits, provided the^- shall not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station more than three years successively, unless particular circum- stances require it, and then only with consent of all the bishops. 3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be travelled by the presiding elders. 4. They have also, in connection with the presiding elders, power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itinerant preachers, where the}- conceive it necessar}', and also to receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, vmtil the con- ference. 5. The3^ have to travel through the connexion at large, attend to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the societies. 6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- tion. 7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he still exercise his episcopal ofiB.ce among us? No, unless it be that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more might be. 8. If at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be with- out a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the absence of the bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other confer- ence, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner attend to the other conference: so that "each conference ma}- know and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and that love and communion be maintained &;c. unto the next General conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. g. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every conference. DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 103 SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. Qst. How are the presiding elders to be elected? Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. Qst. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? Ans. I. To travel through the district appointed him of the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeabl}^ to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible attend them ; he shall administer the Lords supper, and hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- da^'; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likely to result, & to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness in their societies. 4. He can also change the travelling preacher in his district, but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or sus- pend preachers till the conference. 5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned part of their support quarterl}^ by giving them their allowance out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a single man however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dol- lars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annually. Should the collection of one or the other district be insufiicient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, I04 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they give each other all necessary information of the state of their di.stricts. And should it also happen, that one or the other dis- trict should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. SECTION FIFTH. OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. Qst. How is an elder constituted ? Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by lay- ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 & 9th verses of St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are found to be in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, at his ordination. 1. What is the duty of an elder.? To preach as often as he can and to baptize; to perform the office of matrimon}^ and assist the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or tw'o elders shall perform this duty ; he shall also perform all parts of divine wor- ship; endeavour to establish and hold classmeetings, and assist in electing the leaders. 2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the travelling preachers and for the poor.- to take specification or catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all things be done in an orderly manner. 3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor and who preach amongst poor people. DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 105 4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary from the time he may have travelled during the year. 5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is reasonable and just that the elders should provide for their sup- port in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district thoiigh not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling preachers. SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS AND OF THEIR DUTY. Qst. How is a preacher to be received ? Ans. I. By the yearly conference. 2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the pre- siding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be no trial at all. No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of some trustworth}' persons, who are known as such to the conference or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference may take him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time of the con- ference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him licence to preach until the next annual conference in his district. 4. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by the conference and the following questions put to him: Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins? Io6 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Have j-ou now peace with God, and is the love of God shed abroad in your soul by the liol}- spirit ? Do you follow after holiness? Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that therein only is contained the true wa}- to our soul's salvation ? What foundation have j-ou for such belief? What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the gospel ? What is 5-our knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- tion, sanctification, and redemption? Does 3'our own salvation, & the salvation of your fellow mortals lie nearer to your heart then all other things in the world ? Can 3-ou subject j'ourself to the counsel of 3-our brethren? Will 3'()U be obedient and read3- to speak or hold 3-our peace as the brethren ma3' think it lit or expedient. Are 3'ou willing as much as in 3'our power to assist in uphold- ing the itinerant plan and support the same as much as possible. Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class meetings; to Gonverse with the members on the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those who are afiiicted and labour under temptations, to animate the indolent or slothful, and endeavour as much as possible to edif3' and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never to omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and con- firm the doctrines he delivers b3' a well ordered exemplar3- life. Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle awa3' 3-our time with unneces- sar3^ things, at an3' place. Be alwa3'S serious. Let your motto be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- verse sparingly, & conduct 50urself prudently with women; demean 3'ourself in all respects as a true Christian. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; l)elieve evil of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will bear. vSpeak evil of no one; whatever ma3' be 3'Our thoughts, keep them within 3'our own breast, till 3-ou can tell the person con- cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. DISCIPLIXE OF 1825. 107 3. Let 3'our business be to save as man}' souls as possible; to this emplo3-ment give yourself up wholly. A'isit those who need it, and act in all things not according to j'our own will, but as a son in the gospel.- As such it becomes your duty to employ your time in the manner here prescribed; in preaching, and visiting from house to house; in instructing and prayer, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord Cometh. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qst. I. What shall be done, when a bishop, a presiding elder or preacher is under report of being guilt}^ of some crime for- bidden in the woi'd of God, as an unchristian practice, sufficient for excommunication ? Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be dealt with? When charges hapjDen to be made, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a pre- siding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; but, as the Apostle sa3-s, the}' shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writ- ing, and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elder and elders shall again examine and tr}- the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from ofi&ce. Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral con- duct, what shall be done ? Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presiding elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers I08 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. with, the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilt}', he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. Qst. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done .? Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Qst. How shall members be taken into our societj' .'' Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire to become a member of our society', then the preacher present shall put to him the following question : Have you experienced pardon of your sins and are j'ou now determined by the grace of God to save 3'our soul ? If the person answers this question in the afl&rmative, and no objection by any person on account of his moral conduct, then the preacher shall give him the hand, and he shall henceforth be esteemed a full member of our society ; but so long as he is not able truly to answer the above question in the afl&rmative, shall he not be considered a full member, but only a seeker, and as long as he remains a seeker he has no vote in the society. Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess, that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy word of God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to Jlee from the etertial wrath to come. Every member should endeavour to walk closely and lead a DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 109 good life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, both public worship & private prayer meetings. Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communication with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ i7i deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glorj' of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- tian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall estab- lish one or more classmeetings, where a niajoritj^ of the members may conceive it necessary' ; and the members, when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint pra3'er-meet- ings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their duty to hold class-meetings at all times, to exhort the members and preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sis- ters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone; If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a Publican. no UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. On any dispute between two or more of the society, concerning the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recommend to the con- tending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintif, and another chosen by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen shall choose the third: the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and if the preachers find suflacient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society'. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recommended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the societj^; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as exec- utors or administrators. If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicl}' ex- cluded from the congregation. SECTION NINTH. IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. Should some be found in our societ}', or others desire to be admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- ally mannumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- ence, to be by them specified, what length of time such slave DISCIPLINE OF 1S25. Ill serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. SECTION TENTH. Qst. I. How and in what manner shall the bishops and preachers be provided for and how shall the necessary means be collected ? Ans. A collection shall annually be liftted for the bishops, at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the preachers shall pay over this collection to their respective pre- siding elders at the annual conference and the presiding elders shall give an account thereof to their respective annual confer- ences, out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; provided, that one who has a family does not receive more than $160 and his travelling expenses, and if without a family, |8o and his travelling expenses. 2d. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but it is their dut^^ to give an account to the annual conference, and limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, and if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the annual conference, to be applied for the benefit of the travelling preachers. 3d. For the support of the travelling preachers the presiding elder and preachers shall appoint on each circuit a Stewart, and in each class an assistant Stewart, to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and to be proportionably distributed among the travelling preachers. All assistant Stewarts will submit their accounts to the Stewart of the circuit and settle with him quarterly; the circuit Stewarts will submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly meeting and the presiding elder will submit his account to the annual conference, in order to show what each travelling preacher has received, that order and equality be observed. The annual salary of a travelling preacher or travelling presiding elder is also limitted like the salary of the bishops to $160, if with a family, or |8o if without family and travelling expenses. 112 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. APPENDIX. OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. Let us be deeply sensible ( from what we have known ) of the evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the work of God, and the souls of our people. Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other? Ans. I. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. 2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 5. Never speak lightly of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labour, in honour, each to prefere the other, before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of the caiises, evils a?id cures of heart a?id church divisions. OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Quest. How can we further assist those under our care? Ans. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is of unspeakable necessity', in order to promote confidence and communion with God among us; further to wean us of the love of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that no evil thinking or judging oi on^ another be found amongst us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the people from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all good. Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, upon the whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not be deeply enough founded; therefore, wherever we maybe, we should guard against useless or loose talking. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house discipline; of 1825. 113 to house and exhorting the people, is founded or implied in those solemn words of the apostle: ''I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall judge the quick a7id dead at his appearing, preach the Word; be instant in season, out of season: Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all lofig sujferi?ig." OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray with them earnestly, yet simply and plain, that they may learn to know their Creator and redeemer in the days of their youth. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall say unto the people present: 3. Beloved Brethre?i itt Christ \ Is there any amongst you, who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be ordained elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to that ofiice, let him come forth in the name of God and shew what the crime or impediment is. 4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party accused shall be found clear of the crime. Then shall read Titum i, 5 — 9: "For this cause left I thee in Crete, that thou shouldest set in order the things that are wanting and ordain elders in every city, as I have appointed thee. "If any be blameless, the husband of one wife, having faith- full children, not accused of riot or unruly. " For, a Bishop must be blameless, as the Stewart of God, not selfwilled, not soon angry, not given to wine, not striker, not given to filthy lucre. 114 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. "But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, holy, temperate; " Holding fast the faithfull word as he had been taught, that he ma}^ be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince the gainsayers, Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God in the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy name? Ans. I trust with the help of God. Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- ment? Ans. I do believe them. Qst. Will you appl}^ all your diligence to frame and fashion your own life according to the doctrine of Christ ; and to make yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the flock of Christ? Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. Qst. Will you reverentl}' obey them, to whom the charge and government over you is committed, following with a glad mind and will their godly admonitions? Ans. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. Then pra5'er is made. After prayer, the bishops (or bishop and elders) shall lay their hands upon the heads of every one of them, and sa}': "Take thou authority to execute the office of an elder in the church of God. In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost." Amen. Hereupon the bisbop shall deliver to every one of them the Holy Bible, saying: "Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in the church of Christ." Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, V. 35—38: Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he will return from the wedding, that when hecommeth and knock- eth, they may open unto him immediatel}'. Blessed are those serv- ants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 115 And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After which the following benediction is pronounced by the bishop: The Peace of God keep your hearts and mi?ids in the knowledge 0/ Jesus Christ 02cr Lord. Amen. THE FORAl OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. ADDRESS. Dear Beloved ! We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, namely N". and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- mony; which is an honorable estate, instituted of God in time of man's innocency. Qst. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just cause why these two persons may not lawfully be joined together, let him now speak, or else hereafter forever hold his peace. If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto the man: N. N. wilt thou have this woman: (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance.? Wilt thou love her, com- fort her, honour and keep her in sickness and in health; and for- saking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. Then shall the minister say unto the woman: N. N. wilt thou have this man { N. N. ) to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou obey him, serve him, love, honour and keep him in sickness and in health; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him, so long as ye both shall live ? If so, then answer: / will. Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands together, and the minister shall say: Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put asunder. For asmuch as N. and N. have consented together in wedlock, and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses present, I pronounce that they are man and wife together, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost. The God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and this woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal life. Amen. IvCt us pray. THE END. DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE United Brethren in Christ PUBLISHED BY JACOB ANTRIM GERMANTOWN. CINCINNATI : PRINTED BY JOHN M'CALLA 1829. 117 OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. Amongst others he raised up an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a Guethmg, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; thej' estab- lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fel- low labourers. The number of members of the society, in the different parts of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the gracious work spread itself thro' the states of Pennsylvania, Maryland, and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their iitmost endeavors to save souls. At one of those conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. 1^9 T20 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the vear 1789. There were present: William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Boehm, John Ernst, George A. Guething, Henry Weidener, Christian Newcomer, The second conference was held in York count}', in Paradise township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, where there were present the following persons, viz: William Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, Geo. A. Guething, John Neidig, Chris' n Newcomer, Benedict Sander, Adam Lehman, And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to b&lieve that they had experienced true religion in their souls. In the mean time the number of members continued to increase more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, and labour most usefully to one common end; for some were Presbyterians, or church reformed, some were Lutherians, others Menonites, and yet others were Methodists. They therefore appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick coiinty, Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: William Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, George A. Guething, John Hershey, Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, John George Pfrimmer. They there united themselves into a societ3% which bears the name of ''The Utiited Brethre?i hi Christ;" and elected William Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such manner, as should best accord with his conviction. DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 121 From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number of preaching places could in no wise be attended,) and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the conference. In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected (because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend any longer,) who should take charge of the society and preserve discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was re- solved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be elected in his place. — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the society. The want of a discipline in the society has long since been deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to ac- cord with the word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the mem- bers of the society; and there present at the conference, that were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zellar, Daniel Treyer, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, George Benedum, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac Nighswander, Jacob Baulus, and Christian Krum. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, Westmoreland county, Pennsylvania, where they, after mature deliberation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial, to deliver the following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in love and hitmility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines and rules, together with the Word of God, might be attended to, and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our Lord, who taught us: That in lowness of mind, we 122 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. should esteem each other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded, as Jesus Christ also was! Who took upon him the form of a servant, and became obedient even unto the death of the cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives of love and humility, might submit one to the other. He who cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humility; hence Jesus saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire to be the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are to be the servants of each other, we must love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are my true disciples, if ye have love to one another; and whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, that we may enjoy the glory and felicitj', which Jesus obtained by prayer for his disciples of his Heavenly Father, that we may be 07ie even as he and the father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like-minded, unanimous and concordant and no one speak or think evil of the other, but implore the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly christian life, to the honor and glory of his holy name and our eternal welfare. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence, or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and furthermore sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the Virgin M-Zxy, and was born of her; that he is the saviour and mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 123 We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the bod}^ and life everlasting. We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We are convinced that the outward means of grace, namely: baptism and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practised by all Christian societies; and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly to practise them; but the manner in which ought always to be left to the judgment and understanding of every individual. So also the example of washing the feet is left to the judgment of every one to practise or not; but it is not becom- ing any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose judgment and understanding in this respect are different from his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of his brethren and shall therefore be answerable to the annual confer- SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Question. After what manner and order are the transactions of the conferences to be considered.? Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. Question. How and after what manner are the members of a General conference to be chosen ? Answer. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are 124 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put in nomination, and the same made known some time previous to the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of votes, shall be considered as members of the General conference. The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and attested by one of the leaders or preachers then and there pres- ent. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the statement, and should any two or more have an equal number of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are elected. N. B. The votes shall be taken by an exhorter, leader, or Stewart. Question. How often are the General conferences to be held ? Answer. Every four years. Question. Has the General conference any other powers, which the annual conference has not ? Ans. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they maj' find it necessary and expedient: provided the}- do not estab- ish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put aside the itinerant plan. The general conference has further to fix upon or determine the districts, where the yearly conferences are to be held. QsT. Which are the members of the 3'early conference ? Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a writ- ten permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where the conference is held, or who maj^ be taken up and acknowledged in the same. But none then ordained preachers shall have a vote in the conference. QsT. In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- ference to be conducted ? Ans. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief re- marks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer per- formed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sitting closed with singing and prayer. 2. The Conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act iu con- junction with the bishop. DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 125 N. B. Wherever it is necessary two secretaries shall be elected, and the records of the proceedings of the conference shall be kept, both in the English and German languages. 3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote or spread the kingdom of God. 4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 5. What preachers are to continue on trial ? 6. Are any to be elected as elders ? 7. Have any of the preachers died? 8. Who are the presiding elders? 9. Who gives himself up to travel? 10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preach- ers? Has reckoning been made wath them ? Have they received their dues ? 11. When and where shall our next conference he held? 12. Are the elders ordained ? 13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 14. Is there any thing more to do? 15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the General conference ? - 16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. QsT. How are the bishops to be constituted? Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise they cannot be elected. QsT. What are the duties of the bishops ? Ans. I. To preside in our conferences. 2, They have, in conjunction with the presiding elder, that 126 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the travelling preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station more than three years successiveh-, unless particular circum- stances require it, and then only with consent of all the bishops. 3. The bishops point ovit the circuits, which are to be travelled by the presiding elders. 4. They have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- ant preachers, where they conceive it necessary-, and also to receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until the conference. 5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, attend to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the societies. 6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rights of ordi- nation. 7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he still exercise his episcopal oflSce among us? No, unless it be that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more might be. 8. If at any time, it should so happen, that b}' reason of death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be without a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the absence of the bishops, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other conference, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the president there elected, shall also in turn, and in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each conference may know, and be acquainted with the proceed- ings of the other, and that love and communion be maintained &c. until the next General conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every conference. DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 127 SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. QsT. How are the presiding elders to be elected ? Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. QsT. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? Ans. I. To travel through the district appointed him of the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and hold quarterl}^ meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- day; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness in their societies. 4. He can also change the travelling preacher in his district, but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or suspend preachers till the conference. 5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned part of their support quarterly, by giving them their allowance out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a single man, however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dollars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annu- ally. Should the collection of one or the other district be insuf- ficient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 6. Should it so happen, that the socity at a time should be without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, 128 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they give each other all necessary infomiation of the state of their districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other dis- trict should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. SECTION FIFTH. OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION, AND DUTY. QsT. How is an elder constituted ? Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by lay- ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 & 9th verses of St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are fohnd to be in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, at his ordination. 1. "What are the duties of an elder? To preach as often as he can and to babtize; to perform the ofiice of niatrimon}^ and assist the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall perform this dut}'; he shall also perform all parts of divine wor- ship; endeavor to establish and hold classmeetings, and assist in electing the leaders. 2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the travelling preachers and for the poor; to take specification or catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- ber, in order to account with thf presiding elder, so that all things be done in an orderly manner. 3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher conies to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor and who preach amongst poor people. DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 129 4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary from the time he may have travelled during the year. 5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling preachers. • SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR DUTY. QsT. How is a preacher to be received? Ans. I. By the yearly conference. 2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be no trial at all. No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of some trustworthy persons, who are known as such to the con- ference, or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference may take him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time of the conference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him license to preach until the next annual conference in his dis- trict. 4. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined by the conference and the following questions put to him: Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins .■* 9 130 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed abroad in your soul by the holy spirit? Do you follow after holiness ? Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation? What foundation have you for such belief? What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the gospel ? What is 3'our knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justification, sanctification and redemption ? Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the world? Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your bretheren? Will 3-ou be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as the brethren may think it fit or expedient? Are you willing as much as in your power, to assist in uphold- ing the itinerant plan, and support the same as much as possible? QsT. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class meetings; to converse with the members on the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those who are afflicted and labour under temptations, to animate the indolent or slothful, and en- deavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never to omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and con- firm the doctrines he delivers b}' a well ordered exemplary life. QsT. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favor- able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will bear. Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your thoughts, keep them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. discipline; of 1829. 131 3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and visiting from house to house; in instritcting and prayer, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord cometh. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qst. I. What shall be done, when a bishop, a presiding elder or preacher is under report of being guilty of soine crime for- bidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practice, suflScient for excommunication ? Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be dealt with ? When charges happen to be made, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to enquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accused they shall take down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and the accused shall be present to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elder and elders shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from office. Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done? Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presiding elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers 132 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. Qst. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Ans. The preachet thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or leader and examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where the}', the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire to become a member of our society, then the preacher present shall put to him the following question: Have you experienced pardon of 3'our sins and are j^ou now determined by the grace of God to save 3'our soul ? If the person answers this question in the affirmative, and no objection by any person on account of his moral conduct, then the preacher shall give him the hand, and he shall henceforth be esteemed a full member of our society' ; but so long as he is not able truly to answer the above question in the affirmative, shall he not be considered a full member, but only a seeker, and as long as he remains a seeker, he has no vote in the society. Every member of this societ}' should acknowledge and confess that he believes the Bible to be and contain the hoi}' word of God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to flee from the eternal UTafh to come. Every member shouM endeavour to walk closely and lead a good DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 133 life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at at all meetings, both public worship and private prayer meet- ings. Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communication with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, but practice love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ iyi deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in the wordof God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Christian to live in peace— particularly to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall establish one or more classmeetings, where a majority of the members may conceive it necessary; and the members, when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint prayer meetings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their duty to hold classmeetings at all times, to exhort the members and preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sisters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone: If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but 134 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a heathen man and a publican. On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- ing the payment of debts or other causes, which cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter to be chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third: the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party ma}^ refer to the next quarterl}^ or great meet- ing, and apply to the presidiag elder for a secotid arbitration, and if the preachers find suflBcient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration ; in which case each part}^ shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as executors or administrators. If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicly excluded from the congregation. SECION NINTH. IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. Should some be found in our societ}-, or others desire to be admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- ally manumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the discipline; of 1829. 135 state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- ence, to be by them specified, what length of time such slave shall serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. SETCION TENTH. Qst. I. How and in what manner shall the bishops and preachers be provided for, and how shall the necessary means be collected ? Ans. A collection .shall annually be lifted for the bishops, at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the preach- ers shall pay over this collection to their respective presiding elders at the annual conference and the presiding elders shall give an account thereof to their respective annual conferences, out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; pro- vided, that one who has a family does not receive more than |i6o and his travelling expenses, and if without a family, |8o and his travelling expenses. 2d. The preachers in towns or cities who stand under the direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but it is their duty to give an account to the annual conference, and limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, and if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the annual conference, to be applied for the benefit of the travelling preachers. 3d. For the support of the travelling preachers the presiding elder and preachers shall appoint on each circuit a Stewart, and in each class an assistant Stewart, to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and to be proportionably distributed among the travelling preachers. All assistant Stewarts will submit their accounts to the Stewart of the circuit and settle with him quarterly; the circuit Stewarts will submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly meeting and the presiding elder will submit his account to the annual conference, in order to show what each travelling preacher has received, that order and equality be observed. The annual salary of a travel- DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE OF THE United Brethren in Christ. HARRISBURG, PA. PRINTED BY J. & F. WYETH. 1833. 137 ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans of America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. ' Amongst others he raised up an Otter-bein, a Boehtn, and a GuetJmig, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labor in his neglected vineyard, and call, amongst the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow labourers. The number of members of the society, in the different parts of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present, represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all the preachers in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the year 1789. — There were present: 139 I40 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Boehm, John Ernst, George A. Guething, Henry Weidener, Christian Newcomer. The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, where there were present the following persons, viz. William Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer George A. Guething, John Neidig, Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, Adam Lehman. And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they had experienced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time the number of members continued to increase and the preachers were obliged to appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, and labour more use- fully to one common good : for some were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherians, others Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. They therefore appointed a confer- ence to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: William Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, George A. Guething, John Hershey, Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, John G. Pfrimmer. There they united themselves into a society, which bears the name of ''The United Brethreti in Christ;'' and elected William Otterbein & Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops and agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such manner, as should best accord with his conviction. From this time the society increasing still more, preachers were appointed who traveled continually (because the number of DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 141 preaching places could in no other wise be attended to;) and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became necessary to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the conference. In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected (because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend any longer,) who should take charge of the society and preserve discipline and order; for at a conference formlj' held, it was re- solved that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the society. The want of a discipline in the society has long since been deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times been made, it was resolved at the conference held in the state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to accord with the word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members of the society; and there were present at the conference, that were duly elected, the following preachers, namely; Christian Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George Benedum, Abra- ham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry G. Spayth, Isaac Nighswander, Christian Krum and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June 1815, near Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland count}'-, Pennsylvania. Where they after mature deliberation, presented to their brethren, the following doctrine and discipline with the sincere desire that these doctrines and rules, with the ivoi-d of God, should be observed. God is a God of order, but where there is no order nor church discipline the spirit of love and charity will soon be lost. Therefore, brethren, we beseech you follow the example of our Lord. As it is written, be kindly affectionate one to another with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon him the form of a- servant, humbled himself & became obedient unto 142 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. death, even the death of the cross, that by his grace we may sub- mit ourselves one to another in the fear of God. He who will not submit, is in want of humble love; Jesus said, whosoever will be chief among you, let him be your servant. By this shall all men know that ye are mj' disciples, if you have love one to another, and whoso loveth not, abideth in death. Let us walk in newness of life, that the prayer of our Lord may be answered in us; that we may be one in him, and that he may give us the glory, which he gave to his disciples, that we may be one even as he and the Father. Therefore beloved brethren, let us strive to be like-minded, having the same love, being of one accord, of one mind, let no one speak or think evil of his brother, but pray God that he may grant us his spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly devoted life, to the honor and glory of his holy name. Amen. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, & furthermore sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the saviour and mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; and that he shall come again at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 143 We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new Testaments, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, true repentance, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We believe that the ordinances, namely: baptism and the re- membrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practised by all Christian societies: and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to practice them; but the manner in which ought always to be left to the judgment and understanding of every individual. So also the example of washing the feet is left to the judgment of every one to practice or not; but it is not becoming any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose judgment and understanding in this respect are different from his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of his brethren and shall therefor be answerable to the annual conference. SECTION SECOND. OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Question. After what manner and order are the transactions of the conferences to be considered.? Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. Qst. How and in what manner are the members of the general Conference elected.? Ans. It shall be the duty of each annual conference, preceding the general conference, to nominate not less than four elders, (who have stood in that capacity for a period of two years at least,) as candidates; two of which number shall be elected by the brethren within the bounds of each conference. And for the better regulation, it shall be the duty of the said conferences ( at 144 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. the same time ) to nominate and elect two individuals, to whom the several election accounts, as taken in each society, shall be sent by the class leaders, or preachers, whose duty it shall be immediately after the annual conference, to hand each class a list of the candidates thus nominated for election; moreover, when all the returns are received bj' the individuals thus appointed, it shall be their duty in the presence of a third indi- vidual, to open and count all the votes, after which the two candi- dates who may have the majority, shall receive immediate information of their election, in writing, from the individuals as above appointed. Should anj^ two or more of the candidates have an equal number of votes, the individuals thus appointed, shall determine by lot who or which of them is elected. N. B. The votes shall betakenby anexhorter, leader, orsteward. Qst. How often are the General conferences to be held. Ans. Every four years. Qst. Has the General conference any other power, which the Annual conference has not ? Atis. The General conference has the power alone to elect one or more Bishops, from among the elders for a period of four years, furthermore to adopt such rules as may be necessary for the better interest of the society in general. Yet, nothing shall be done by the said conference, which would in anj^ wise affect or change the article of faith, neither the spirit, intent, or mean- ing of the rules or discipline as they now stand. The General conference has to determine the districts and bounds of the yearly conferences. Qst. Who are the members of the j-early conference ? Ans. All the elders and licentiate preachers, who are for the time being in the district where the conference is held; but when such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the elders only shall determine the same by their vote. Qst. In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- ference to be conducted ? Ans. I. A portion of scripture shall be read at the opening of the conference, also singing and prayer, the latter of which shall be performed during the sitting and adjournment of the same. 2. The conference also elect two secretaries, one for the ger- man and one for the english records, wherever it may be con- sidered necessary'. 3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 145 towards their fellow beings is, whether their conduct in life be blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote the kingdom of God. 4. Have any of the preachers died in the last year? 5. Who are the candidates for the Ministery ? 6. What preachers are yet to continue on trial. 7. Are any to be ordained to the office of an elder ? 8. Who is willing to travel the ensuing year without reserve ? 9. Who are the presiding elders .? 10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, and partly for making up the allowances of the traveling preach- ers ? Has reckoning been made with them ? have they received their dues ? 11. When and where shall our next conference he held ? 12. In what circuits are the different preachers placed? 13. Is there any thing more to do? 14. Is all that has been transacted entered upon record? SECTION THIRD. OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. Qsf. How are the Bishops to be elected? Ans. The General conference shall elect them by a majority of votes, yet the conference may at their option retain the former Bishop or Bishops, yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as those retained, must be capable of attending the conferences appointed them, otherwise they cannot be elected. Qst. What are the duties of the Bishops ? Ans. I. To preside in our conferences- 2. They have, in conjunction with the presiding elder that may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the traveling preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant preachers to remain in the same station more than three years successively, unless particular circum- stances require it, and then only with the consent of the con- ference. 3. The bishops point out the circuits which are to be traveled by the presiding elders. 4. They have also, in connection with the presiding elders, power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- 10 146 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. ant preachers where they conceive it necessary, and also receive and suspend preachers as necessity may require, until the ensu- ing conference. 5. They have to attend the conferences, and oversee the spirit- ual concerns of the societies. 6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordi- nation. 7. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several con- ferences committed to his charge, can he be suffered to retain his office? No, unless it be through sickness or some other unavoid- able circumstance. 8. If at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of death, suspension or other cause, our society should be with- out a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the absence of the bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other conference, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the president there elected shall also in turn and in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each conference may know and be acquainted with the proceed- ings of the others, and that love and communion be maintained &c. until the next general conference when and where, one or more Bishops shall be elected. 9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every conference. SECTION FOURTH. OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. Ost. How are the presiding elders elected? Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with the consent of the conference, elect them for one year. Qst. What are the duties of a presiding elder. Ans. I. To travel through the district appointed him by the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has to take charge of the traveling and local preachers DISCIPLINE OF 1833, 147 in his district and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to the gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if possible attend them; he shall administer the Lords supper, and hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether the traveling and local preachers do their duty, particularly whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- day: and where there are more of them, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness in the societies. 4. He can also change the traveling preacher in his district, he can further receive and suspend preachers till the conference. 5. And should it so happen that a district should be without a presiding elder, information thereof shall immediately be given to the Bishop, who will appoint an elder in the district, to act as presiding elder till conference, and in the absence of the presid- ing elder, at any quarterly meeting, or conference, an elder present shall perform the duty of the presiding elder. SECTION FIFTH. OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. Qst. How is an elder constituted f Ans. I. After a probation of three years, a preacher ma}' be presented to the yearly conference, for consideration, and if on examination by the conference, he should be chosen to be an elder, he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a Bishop and two elders. 2. What is the duty of an elder? — To preach as often as he can and to baptize; and assist the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine worship; endeavour to establish and hold class meetings, and assist in electing the leaders. 3. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly, for the traveling preachers and for the poor; to take specification thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 148 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all things be done in an orderly manner. 4. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no traveling preacher comes to, he shall make a collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the conference, for the support of needy preachers who preach amongst poor people. 5. ijhould a traveling preacher or elder desire to leave the district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder of his intention by writing; and should an}' one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary for the time he may have traveled during the year. 6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support in proportion to the time they may be employed, and by making a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district, though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to traveling preachers. SECTION SIXTH. OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS AND THEIR DUTY. Qst. How is a preacher to be received? Ans. I. By the yearly conference. 2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place of a presiding elder at a great meeting, until the next sit- ting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be no trial. 3. No preacherof any other society can be taken up as a preacher in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of some trust-worthy persons, who are known as such to the con- ference or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 149 may take him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time of the conference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him licence to preach until the next annual conference in his dis- trict. 4. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined by the conference and the following questions put to him: Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed abroad in your soul by the holy spirit? -Do you follow after holiness ? Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation? What foundation have you for such belief? What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the gospel? What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of jus- tification, sanctification, and redemption? Does your own salvation, and the salvation of j'our fellow mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the world ? Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? Will 3'OU be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace as the brethren may think it expedient. Are you willing as much as in your power to assist in uphold- ing the itinerant plan and support the same as much as possible. Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher. Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class meetings; to converse with the members on the situation or condition of their, souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those that are afflicted and labour under temptations, to animate the indolent, and endeavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers by a well ordered and exemplary life. Qsi. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher. Atis. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto be. Holiness to the Lord. — Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- verse sparing!}', and conduct yourself prudently with women; demean yourself in all respects as a true Cl^ristian. 150 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favour- able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will admit. Speak evil of no one; whatsoever may be your thoughts, keep them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need it, and act in all things not according to j'our own will, but as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes j'our duty to employ your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and visiting from house to house; in instruction and prayer, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord cometh. SECTION SEVENTH. OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qst. I. What shall be done, when a bishop, presiding elder, or preacher is reported of being guilty of some crime forbidden in the word of God. Ans. When a bishop is thus accused, it shall be the dut}- of a presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and examine whether they are found in truth; but, as the Apostle says, thej^ shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accu.sed, the\' shall take down their proceedings in writing, and send a cop}' thereof to the l)ishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be {^resent to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders and three elders. — If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elder and elders shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, he .shall be suspended from office. Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is thus accused. Ans. It shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in DISCIPLINE OF 1833, 151 writing- and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two elders shall be called who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. Qst. 3. When an elder or preacher is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elder, three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. SECTION EIGHTH. OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? Aris. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire to become a member of our society, then the preacher present shall put to him the following question; Have you experienced the pardon of your sins and are you now determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? If the person answers the question in the afl&rniative, and no objection made by any member, on account of his, or her, moral conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as members of our society, and with consent of the person, the preacher will record his or her name on the class book, but so long as any member can not answer the above question in the affirma- tive, such will have no vote in the society. Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy word of God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled to flee from the wrath to come. 152 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Every member should endeavour to lead a good life; be diligent in prayer, particularl}- in private; and, for liis own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, both public worship and pra3-er meetings. Heads of families should never omit to pra}' with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communication with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow beings, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day lioh', as required in the word of God. Neither bu}' nor sell, but spend the same in exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willinglj^ and freely. It is the dut}^ of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godly life in intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Christian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall establish one or more class-meetings, and the members, when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote the love of good works in Christ Jesus. In every class the leader should be elected in presence of the preacher, and it is his duty to appoint prayer and class meetings, to commence and conclude the same; the freedom of our prayer and class meetings shall extend to any sincere and well disposed person or persons, who may desire to attend them, although such persons be not members of our society. When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sisters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone : If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may l)e established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 153 if he neglect to hear the church; let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a Publican. On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- ing the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third ; the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a seco7id arbitration, and if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration ; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of thesociet}-; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as executors or administrators, or when a member is in danger of suffering an unexpected loss of property, which will allow him immediate legal process. If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicly excluded from the congregation. SECTION NINTH. IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. Should some be found in our society, or others desire to be admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue 154 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- ally manumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- ence, to be by them specified what length of time such slave shall serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. SECTION TENTH. Qst. I. How and in what manner shall the bishops and preachers be provided for and how shall the necessary means be collected ? Ans. A collection shall annually be lifted for the bishops, at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the preachers shall pay over this collection to their respective pre- siding elders at the annual conference, and the presiding elders shall give an account thereof to their respective annual confer- ences; out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; provided, that one who has a family does not receive more than |i6o and his traveling expenses, and if without a family, $80 and his traveling expenses. 2d. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but it is their duty to give an account to the annual conference, and limit their salarj' to the usual salary and necessary expenses, and if their should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the annual conference, to be applied for the benefit of the traveling preachers. 3d. For the support of the traveling preachers the presiding elder and preachers shall appoint in each class a Stewart, to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and proportionably distributed among the traveling preachers. All stevVards will submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly meeting, and the presiding elder will submit his account to the annual conference, in order to show what each traveling preacher has received, that order and equality be observed. The annual salary of a traveling preacher or traveling presiding elder is also limited like the DISCIPLINE OP 1833. 155 salary of the bishops to $160, if with a family, or ^o, if without family, and traveling expenses. 4. Yet when a traveling preacher has a family of children, the yearly conference of which he is a member, will in that case grant him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in their judgment will accord with the wants of said preacher's family. 5. Should the collection of any one d strict be insufficient, then it shall be left to a committee appointed by the conference, who will as they may find it advisable, make up such deficiency, out of other collections made. 6. Resolved, that the presiding elders shall receive pay only in proportion to the time they may actually have traveled. APPENDIX. OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. Let us be deeply sensible ( from what we have known ) of the evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the work of God, and the souls of our people. Qst. What can be done inordertoacloserunionwitheachother? Ans. I. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. 2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 5. Never speak lightly of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labour, in honour, each to prefer the other, before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils and aires 0/ heart aiid church divisions. OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? Ans. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is necessary in order to promote confidence and communion with 156 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. God among us; further to wean us from the love of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage us to strive after and practice brotherl}^ love, that no evil think- ing or judging of one another be found among us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the people on every occasion, both public and private, and exhort them to be diligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this be done, and that in sincerity, we shall iipon the whole, be of little use, and our good shall be evil spoken of, therefore wherever we ma}^ be, we should guard against useless and idle conversation. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these solemn words of the apostle: " I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, iL'ho shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing, preach the Word; be instayit in season, and out of season; Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all long sujfering.'" OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation? Ans. Let him, who is in anj- wise zealous for God and the souls of men, begin the work without dela}-. Where children are found, meet them as often as possible; speak freeh' with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray with them earnestly, yet simply and plainly, that the}'- may learn to know their Creator & Redeemer in the days of their j^outh. THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop or elder shall say unto the people present: 3. Beloved Brethren ifi Christ ! Is there an}'' among you, who know any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be ordained elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to that oflfice, let him come forth in the name of God and show what the crime or impediment may be. 4. If any crime or impediment be alleged, the bishop shall cease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party accused shall 1)e found clear of said crime. discipline; of 1833. 157 5. If no accusation be alleged, the Bishop, or elder, .shall read the following articles, to any and all who may be chosen for ordination. "For an elder must be blameless, as the Stewart of God, not self willed, not soon angry, not given to wine, no striker, not given to filthy lucre. "But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, holy, temperate: "Holding fast the faithful word as he had been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince the gainsay ers." Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry, to serve God in the church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy name? Ans. I trust with the help of God. Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptvires, old and new testa- ment? A71S. I do believe them: Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make yourself, as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of th flock of Christ? Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- ment over you is committed, following with a glad mind and ■will their godly admonitions? Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. Then prayer is made. After prayer the bishop and elder shall lay their hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say: ' ' Take authority to execute the office of an elder in the church of God. In the name of the Father, the Son and the Holy Ghost." Amen. Hereupon the bishop or elder shall deliver to everj' one of them the Holy Bible, saying: ' ' Take authority to read and preach the word of God in the church of Christ " Then the Bishop or elder shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, 35-38: Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto men that wait for the Lord, when he 158 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those servants whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watch- ing. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. Then the bishop, or elder shall pray. After which the follow- ing benediction is pronounced. The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds i?i the knowledge of Jesus Christ onr Lord. — Amen. THE FORM TO SOLEMNIZE MARRIAGE. ADDRESS. We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as man and wife. If any person present know any just cause or impedi- ment why these two persons should not be joined in marriage they will now speak or for ever hereafter hold their peace. If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto the man. N. N. Wilt thou have this woman M. ]\I. to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor and comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and ad- versit}^ forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live ; If so, then answer yes. Then shall the Minister sa}^ unto the woman. M. M. Wilt thou have this man N. N. to thj^ wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance, wilt thou love, honor and obey him, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in ad- versity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him so long as ye both shall live; If so, then answer yes. Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands together and say. Those whom God hath joined together let no man put asunder. In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, I pronounce them man and wife, in the name of the Father, Son and Holy Ghost. — Amen. DISCIPWNE OF 1833. 159 OATH OF PURGATION. We, the United Brethren in Christ, Do believe, that the prac- tise of swearing, either by the Bible, or in the name of Almighty God, is, in our opinion, contrary to the word of our Lord Christ Jesus, who says, " swear not at all," and that the mode of testi- fying to the Truth, when thereto required so to do in a legal form, by way of affirmation, is on us solemnly, conscienciously and fully binding before God and man to tell the truth, the whole truth & nothing but the truth. HOW TO RECEIVE AN EXHORTER. Any Brother desiring license to exhort, will first make it known to the class leader, and the class leader will procure a recommen- dation from the class of which the applicant is a member at the time, upon which the presiding elder with the advice of the quarterly conference will license the brother. RESPECTING BOOK PRINTING. Resolved, that none of our members, either preachers or lay- men, shall be permitted to become the author of a Doctrinal Book, or Pamphlet, in a printed form, without the approbation of the annual conference or a select committee by them chosen. THE VENDING AND DISTILLATION OF ARDENT SPIRITS Should any Exhorter, Preacher, or Elder, from and after the next annual conferences in 1834, be engaged in the distillation or vending of ardent spirits, he shall for the first and second offence be accountable to the quarterly or yearly conference, of which he is a member; said conferences will in meekness admonish the offending brother to desist from the distillation or vending of ardent spirits, as the case may be; should these friendly admonitions fail, and the party continue to act in the same and it be proven tothesatisfaction of the yearly conference, if a preacher or elder, and if an exhorter proven before a quarterly conference, such preacher, elder or ex- horter, will for the time not be considered a member of this church. FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. Whereas it is made the duty of elders and preachers to form and hold class meetings, which should always be done in great moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any l6o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. means or measure to hinder or prevent an elder or preacher in the discharge of this their duty, a member acting to the contrary must be accountable to the next quarterly conference. RESPECTING FREE-MASONRY. Resolved, that Free-Masonry in every sense of the word, be totally discountenanced, and in no wise tolerated in our society, should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, or join as a member of Free-Masonry in any of their processions, or otherwise join the fraternity, he will by so doing be no longer a member of this church. RESPECTING PRESENTS. Every traveling preacher in our society shall yearly account to the conference for all presents he may have received on his circuit, to the amount of one dollar or more, for the use of him- self or family. And if the conference be convinced that any one circuit has given presents instead of collections, or that the preacher endeavoured to get such in the place of collections, in such case presents shall be considered as collections by the con- ference. But if on examination it should not so appear, then those preachers receiving presents shall hold them as their own, and in addition receive all the discipline allows them. THE END. DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 161 INDEX. page. Origin of the United Brethren in Christ 139 The Confession of Faith 142 Of the General and Yearly Conferences 143 Of the election of the Bishops and their Duty 145 Of the Presiding Elders, their election and Duty 146 Of the Elders, their election. Ordination and Duty 147 Of the method of receiving Preachers and their Duty 148 Of the immoral conduct of Preachers, and how they are to be disposed of. 150 Of the members in general 151 In respect to Slavery 153 Of the support of traveling Preachers 154 Of the necessity of Union among ourselves 155 Of Visiting from House to House 155 Of the instruction of Children ^ 15G The form and manner of Ordaining Preachers 156 The form to solemnize Marrriage 158 Oath of Purgation 159 How to receive an Exhorter 159 Respecting Book Printing 159 The vending and distillation of ardent Spirits 159 Forming and Meeting Classes 15!) Respecting Free-Masonry 160 Respecting Presents 160 1 62 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. GENERAL CONFERENCE HELD JUNE, I4TH. 1833, AT GEO. & JONATHAN DRESBACH'S, PICKAWAY COUNTY OHIO. MEMBERS PRESENT. Henry Kumler, Bishop. William Brown, Ezekiel Boring, Jacob Snider, John Dorcas, G. H. Spayth, Adam Hetzel, S. C. Briggs. Jacob Bauhis, Samuel Hiestand, John Coonts, William Hastings. Henry Kumler, Jr. John Federhof, S. Hofner, J. Sweaningen. John Denham, John McNamer, James Griffith. Pennsylvania Conference. Jacob Erb, James Niman, Frederick Gilbert. Virginia Conference W. R. Rhinehart. Muskingum Conference Christian Knegey, John Echard, Sciota Conference. George Benedum, Daniel Davis, John Russel, Miami Co?ifere?tce. Fred. Bonebrach, A. S. Decker, Daniel Kiser, Indiana Confcre?ice. Josiah Davis, Aaron Former, ORIGIN, CONSTITUTION, DOCTRINE DISCIPLINE, United Brethren in Christ CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO: PRINTED AT THE CONFERENCE OFFICE. 1837. 163 ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the century last past, it pleased the Lord our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of Christ crucified, in its purity. At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans of America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them in their native language. Amongst others he raised up an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a Geetmg, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labor in his neglected vineyard, and call, among the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. — These men obe3'ed the call of their Lord and Master; their labors were blessed; they established in many places, excellent societies and led many precious souls to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow laborers, to engage in the vineyard of the Lord; for the harvest was great, and the laborers but few. The Lord called others, who were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow laborers. The number of members in the society, in different parts of the country, continued to increase from time to time; and the gracious work of reformation, spread through the states of Penn- sylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Several great meetings were appointed, and held annually; when, on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavors to save souls. At one of these meetings, it was resolved to hold a conference with all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. The first Conference was held in the City of Baltimore, Md. ; in the year of our Lord, 1789. The following preachers were present : — 165 l66 united brethren disciplines. Wm. Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Boehm, John Ernst, Geo. a. Geeting, Henry Weidner. Chr. Newcomer, The second Conference was held in York count5',Pa., in Para- dise township; at the house of brother Spangler, in the year of our Lord 1791: — The following preachers were present: — Wm. Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, John Pfremmer, Geo. a. Geeting, John Neidig, Chr. Newcomer, Benedict Sander. Adam Lehman, After a mature deliberation, how they might labor most use- fully in the vineyard of the Lord; they again appointed such as fellow laborers, of whom they had cause to believe had experi- enced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time, the number of members continued to increase, and the preachers were obliged to appoint an annual Conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, and labor more success- fully in the vineyard of the Lord: for some were Presbyterians, or church Reformed; some were Lvitherians, others Mennonites, and some few Methodists. They accordingly appointed a Conference, to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, Maryland; at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. — The following preachers were present: — Wm. Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, Geo. A. Geeting, John Hrrshey, Chr. Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, Abr'm Dracksel, Diet'k Auraup. John Pfremmer, There they united themselves into a society, which bears the name of "UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST;" and elected William Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty, as to the mode and manner of baptism, and to perform it according to their own convictions. From this time, the society increasing still more and more. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 167 preachers were appointed to travel regularly, inasmuch as the number of preaching places could not otherwise be attended to; and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky: It then became necessary to appoint a Conference in the state of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, who labored in those states, to travel, annually, such a great distance, to the Conference. In the mean time, brothers Boehni and Geeting died, and brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected, because infirmity and old age would not permit him to superintend any longer, who should take charge of the society and preserve Discipline and order. It was resolved at a former Conference, that whenever one of the bishops died, another should be elected in his place ; — accordingly, brother Christia7i Newcomer was elected bishop, to take charge and superintend the concerns of the society. The want of a Discipline in the society, had long been deeply felt; and partial attempts having been made at different times ; it was resolved at the Conference held in the State of Ohio, that a General Conference be held, in order to accomplish the same, in a manner, not derogatory to the word of God. The members of this Confer- ence were to be elected from among the preachers, in the different parts of the country; by a vote of the members throughout the society in general. The following brethren were duly elected: Chr. Newcomer, Daniel Treyer, ■ Ab'rm. Hiestand, Geo. Benedum, Andrew ZellER, Ab'rm. Tracksel, Christian Berger, Henry G. Spayth, Abraham Meyer, I. Nighsw anger, John Schneider, Christian Krum, Henry Kumler, & Jacob Bowles. The Conference convened on the 6th of June 1835, near Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland county, Pennsylvania. After a mature deliberation, they presented to their brethren, a Discipline, con- taining the doctrine and rules of the church; desiring that they, together with the word of God, should be strictly observed. God is a God ol order, but where there is no order nor church Discipline, the spirit of love and charity will soon be lost. Therefore, brethren, we beseech you to follow the example of our Lord. As it is written, be kindly affectionate one to another with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the l68 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon himself the form of a servant, humbled himself and became obedient unto death, even the death of the cross, that by his grace we may submit ourselves one to another in the fear of God. — He who will not submit, is in want of humble love; Jesus said, whosoever will be chief among you, let him be 3'our servant. B3' this shall all men know that ye are m\' disciples, if ye have love one to another, and whoso loveth not, abideth in death. Let us walk in newness of life, that the prayer of our Lord may be answered in us; that we may be one in him, and that he may give us the glory, which he gave to his disciples, that we may be one, even as he and the Father are one. — Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like-minded, having the same love, being of one accord, of one mind ; let no one speak or think evil of his brother, but pra}' God that he ma}- grant us his spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly devoted life, to the honor and glory of his holy name. Amen. CONSTITUTION OF THE CHURCH. WE as members of the Church of the UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST, in order to retain a perfect union, — accomplish the ends oi justice and eqjiity , — insure ecclesiastical, as well as domestic tranqiiility ; provide for the common interest of the Church, — promote the general ivelfare of society, and to secure the blessings of the gospel to ourselves, our posterity, and our fellow men in general ; do ordain and establish the following CONSTITUTION, for the Church aforesaid. ARTICLE I. Sec. I. — All ecclesiastical power herein granted, to make or reppeal any rule of Discipline, shall be vested in a General Con- ference, which shall consist of ministers chosen and elected by the members, in every Conference district, throughout the society. Nevertheless, nothing shall be done, so as to change the article of faith, or in anywise destroy the itinerant plan. Sec. 2. — No minister .shall be considered eligible for election, until he has stood in the capacity as Elder, for the term of three years; having maintained a good moral character, during that time. Any Elder, receiving a transfer, from one Conference to another, shall not be considered eligible for election, undei a tenn of two years; and not then, without a sufficient reconmien- dation from the Conference, of which he had been a member. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 169 Sec. 3. — The number of delegates from each Conference Dis- trict, shall not exceed one, for every five hundred members. But should it so happen, that a Conference would be formed in a territory, not having five hundred members within its District; that Conference, shall nevertheless, have one delegate to repre- sent its members in General Conference. Sec. 4. — If any vacancies should occur, through sickness or otherwise, after the election of delegates; it shall be the duty of the Presiding Elder or Elders, immediately, to notify the next highest on the list of votes, that he is now a member, to repre- sent that District, in the ensuing General Conference. Sec. 5. — The Bishops shall upon all occasions, be considered members of the General Conference, to preside as the organs of that body, as in annual Conferences. Bishops shall be elected every four j^ears, during the sitting of the General Conference, by the members of that bod}^ from among the Elders throughout the Church; who may have stood in that capacity for a term, not less than six years. Sec. 6. — The General Conference shall be held once, every four years. At the adjournment of which, it shall be the duty of the same, to publish or cause to be published, (excepting such parts as may not be considered expedient,) all their proceedings, for the benefit of society in general. ARTICLE II. Sec. I. — The members in each Conference District, shall solely have the privilege of choosing and electing the delegates for General Conference; which shall invariably de done, at least, three months previous to the sitting of the same. Sec. 2. — In the election of delegates for General Conference; it shall be the dut}' of each annual Conference, to appoint a committee of three, in their several Conference Districts, to receive and count the votes, and immediately apprize those who may have been elected. Sec. 3. — It shall also be the duty of the annual Conference, to furnish the Presiding Elders, with a list of all the Elders, eligi- ble for election: The Presiding Elders shall furnish each circuit preacher in charge; whose duty it shall be, to furnish each class- leader or steward throughout the circuit, with a copy of the same. Sec. 4. — It shall be the duty of each classleader or steward, to appoint a meeting of the members of each class ; for the purpose of IJO UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. electing, by ballot or otherwise, one or more delegates to repre- sent them in General Conference. Sec. 5. — It shall also be the duty of each classleader or steward, to sign, enclose and seal, each bill of election — hand it over to the preacher in charge; he again, to the Presiding Elder; whose duty it shall be, to transmit the same, to the committee appointed by the annual Conference. Sec. 6. — The committee appointed to receive and count the votes, shall make a list of all the persons voted for, and the num- ber of votes for each. Should anj' two or more of the candidates, have an equal number of votes, the individuals thus appointed, shall determine by lot, who, or which of them are elected. They shall also forward the names of those elected, to the Conference Printing Establishment, for publication. ARTICLE III. Sec. I. — Each annual Conference shall come fully under the jurisdiction of the General Conference; except, under such regu- lations as the General Conference may deem expedient, in relation to local matters, so as not to prove prejudicial to the interest of the whole societ}'. Sec. 2. — The business of each annual Conference, shall strictly be done according to Discipline. Sec. 3. — Any annual Conference.actingin violation of the doings of General Conference, shall b}' impeachment, be tried bj^ the same. Sec. 4.- No annual Conference, shall have the exclusive right, to form or admit any new Conference within the bounds of societ5^ wdthout the consent of the General Conference. Sec. 5. — All officers, whether Bishops, Presiding Elders, &c.; shall, on impeachment, be dealt with according to Discipline, as other members, expelled or retained, as the case may require. ARTICLE IV. . Sec. I. — If at any time, after the passing of this Constitution, it should be contemplated either to alter or amend the same: It shall be the privilege of any member in societ)^ to publish or cause to be published, such contemplation, at least three months, before the election of delegates to the General Conference. Sec. 2. — No General Conference, shall have the power to alter or amend, the foregoing Constitution, except it be, by a vote of two thirds of that body. DISCIPUNE OF 1837. 171 RESOLUTIONS. Inasmuch, as it is the indefeasible right of every man, to think and act for himself, in matters of faith and morality. This right not only being granted by the charter of his creation, but also, by the Discipline adopted for the better government of the Church of the United Brethren in Christ; be it resolved there- fore: — ist. That no rule be adopted by General Conference, so as to infringe upon the rights of any, as it relates to the mode and manner of baptism, the sacrament of the Lord's supper, or the washing of feet, &c. 2d. Resolved, No rule or ordinance shall be passed in Gen- eral Conference, so as to deprive the local preachers of the eligibility of election, as delegates to the same. Nor yet, to deprive them of their legal vote in the annual Conferences, to which they severally belong. 3d. Resolved, that the foregoing resolutions, shall neither be altered or appealed, vpithout the unanimous consent of the whole Conference. Done in General Conference, by the unanimous consent of that body, this nth day of May, in the year of our Lord, one thou- sand eight hundred and thirty-seven. In witness whereof, we have hereunto set our names. HENRY KUMLER, It,.,.. \ Bish'ps SAMUEI. HIESTAND, ) JACOB ERB, JACOB WINTER, JACOB RHINEHART, JACOB J, GLOSSBRENNER, ADAM HETZLER, DAVID WEIMER, JOHN DORCAS, GEORGE HISKEY, JOHN COONS, WILLIAM HANBY, JNO PETHERHOFF, WILLIAM STUBBS, FRANCIS WHITCOM, JOHN LOPP, FREDERICK KENOYER, WILLIAM DAVIS. 172 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. CIRCULAR. To the members of the Church of the United Brethren in Christy throughout these United States. Dear brethren, by whose authorit}^ we as a General Confer- ence, have been authorized to legislate, on matters pertaining to the government of our Church; and having long since been convinced, of the great necessity of a constitution, for the better regulation thereof; have by unanimous consent, framed and established the foregoing. We are well aware that we have tran- scended the bounds given us by our Discipline, which will be found in the Constitution; Article fourth, Section second: Declar- ing that the said Constitution, can neither be altered or amended, without a majority of two-thirds of a General Conference. If there had been a general notice given to the Church, previous to the election of delegates, that there would be a memorial offered to General Conference, praying them to adopt a constitution, and to ratify it, agreeable to Article fourth; Section second: then the General Conference would have had full power, to have done so. The object of this circular is, (feeling that the government of our Church is not as firm as it ought to be,) to give notice to our Church throughout the union, that we intend to present a mem- orial to the next General Conference, praying them to ratify the constitution now adopted, according to Article fourth; Section second: In testimon}' of our ardent desire for the welfare of our Church, and the general spread of the gospel. Written by order of General Conference, Germantown, Ohio; May 12th 1837. Signed in behalf of the same, b}^ William R. Rhinehart, Sefry. SECTION FIRST. THE CONFESSION OF FAITH. In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence or being with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and furthermore, sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 173 We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost in the Virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the Saviour and Mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God, to intercede for us, and that he shall come again at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with the Father and the Son, and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new Testament, is the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, true repentance, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We believe that the ordinances, namely: baptism and the re- memberance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practiced by all Christian societies: and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to practice them; but the manner in which, ought always be left to the judgment and understanding of every individual. Also, the example of washing feet, is left to the judgment of every one to practice or not; but it is not becoming, for any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren, whose judgment and understanding, in this respect, are different from his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty in this respect, shall be considered a traducer of his brethren, and shall be answerable for the same, to the annual Conference. 174 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION SECOND. GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. Questio7i. After what manner, are the transactions of the Con- ferences to be considered ? Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. Qst. How, and in what manner are the members of General Conference elected ? — i^^Scc Constihdion. — Qst. How often are the General Conferences to be held. Ans. Every four years. Qst. Has the General Conference any other power, which the annual Conference has not ? Ans. The General Conference has the power alone to elect one or more Bishops from among the Elders, for a period of four years; furthermore, to adopt such rules as may be necessary for the better interest of the society in general. Yet, nothing shall be done by the said Conference, which would in any wise afifect or change the article of faith; neither the spirit, intent, or mean- ing of the rules or Discipline as they now stand. The General Conference has to determine the districts and bounds of the yearly Conferences. Qst. Who are the members of the yearly Conference ? Ans. All the Elders & licentiate preachers, who are for the time being in the Di.strict where the Conference is held; but when such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the Elders only shall determine the same by vote. Qst. In what manner are the transactions of a Conference to be conducted ? Ans. A portion of scripture will be read; also singing and prayer each day, at the opening of Conference; — singing and prayer at the close. 2. The Conference shall also elect two Secretaries, one German and one English, wherever it may be necessary. 3. The preachers will be examined, respecting their deport- ment towards their fellow beings; whether their conduct in life be blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote the kingdom of God. 4. Have any of the preachers died during the last year? DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 175 5. Who are the candidates for the Ministry? 6. Are any to be ordained to the oflSce of Eldership ? 7. Who is willing to travel the ensuing year, without reserve ? 8. Who are the Presiding Elders ? 9. What has been collected for contingent expenses, and the salary of travelling preachers? 10. Has reckoning been made with the travelling preachers ? 1 1 . Have they received their dues ? 12. Where are the preachers stationed this year? 13. When and where shall our next Conference he held? 14. Is there any thing more to do ? 15. Is all that has been done entered upon record? SECTION THIRD. ELECTION OF BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. QsL How ar e the Bishops to be elected ? A?is. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority of votes, nevertheless, the Conference may, at their option, retain the former Bishop or Bishops, yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as well as those retained, must be capable of attending the Conferences appointed them, otherwise they cannot be elected. QsL What are the duties of the Bishops ? Ans. I. To preside in our Conferences. 2. They have in conjunction with the Presiding Elders, of the past and present year, to fix the appointments of the travelling preachers for the several circuits, provided, they shall not allow any itinerant preachers to remain in the same station, more than three years successively; unless particular circumstances require it, and only then, with the consent of the Conference. 3. The Bishops, in conjunction with two Elders appointed by Conference; shall point out the Districts which are to be travelled by the Presiding Elders. 4. They have to attend the Conferences, and oversee the spirit- ual concerns of the Church. 5. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordi- nation. 6. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several Con- ferences committed to his charge, he cannot be suffered to retain 176 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. his ofl&ce; unless it be through sickness or some other unavoidable circumstance. 7. If our Church should at any time, be destitute of a Bishop, in consequence of death, suspension or otherwise; a chairman shall be elected from among the Elders, at each annual Confer- ence, — each chairman shall attend the next succeeding Confer- ence, in conjunction with the chairman there elected; that a reg- ular correspondence be maintained, until the ensuing General Conference, where one or more Bishops shall be elected. 8. It shall be the duty of the Bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present, during the sitting of every annual Conference. SECTION FOURTH. PRESIDING ELDERS, ELECTION AND DUTY. Qst. How are the Presiding elders elected. Ans. The Bishops shall propose to the Conference some of the Elders, who have stood their time of probation, and with the consent of the Conference, elect them for one year. Qst. What are the duties of a Presiding Elder. Atis. I. To travel through the District appointed him, and preach as often as he can. 2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers in his District, and see that they conduct themselves as becometh the gospel of Christ. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and camp-meetings, and if possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's Supper, and hold quarterly-meeting Conferences with the preachers, exhorters, leaders and stewards; he shall further enquire into, and examine whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particu- larly, whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sunday: and where there are more than one, to change them at times, where the most benefit is likely to result ; and to exhort them, that they maintain discipline and order, love and seriousness in the societies. 4. He can also, in conjunction with two Elders, preachers, ex- horters or leaders, (one from each circuit,) change the preachers on his District. Should any circuit be found without a travelling preacher, it shall be his duty to employ a preacher to travel on that circuit, until the next annual Conference. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 177 5. And should it so happen, that a District should be without a Presiding Elder, information thereof shall immediately be given to a Bishop, who shall appoint an Elder in the district, to act as Presiding Elder until the ensuing annual Conference. SECTION FIFTH. DUTY OF CIRCUIT PREACHERS AND HOW RECEIVED. Qst. What are the duties of a circuit preacher ? Ans. To submit peaceably to the station appointed him by Conference. 2. He shall attend the appointments on his circuit regularly, preach to the people, and hold society meetings with the mem- bers, wherever it is acceptable with the class. 3. It shall be the duty of the preacher in charge, to see that there are suitable persons appointed in each class, as steward, leader or leaders. 4. He shall read three sections of our Discipline, every six months, in each class; namely, — the Article of Faith, the Duty of Members, and the Diity of Leaders a7id Stewards. 5. He shall sit as president on the trial of members, and keep a correct account of the same. 6. He shall render a strict account of the condition of his circuit, to the Presiding Elder, at each quarterly Conference. 7. He shall give charge to all sub-agents of the Religious Telescope, to keep an account of all its subscribers, in their re- spective neighborhoods. 8 He shall also make settlement with the sub-agents once a year, and render an account thereof to the district agent. 9. He shall furthermore make out a list of all the appoint- ments on his circuit, and present them to the Presiding Elder, at each annual Conference, for the benefit of the next who may travel that circuit. SECTION SIXTH. ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND t»UTY. Qst. How is an Elder constituted ? Ans. After a probation of three years, a preacher may be presented to the yearly Conference, for consideration; and if on 12 178 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. examination by the Conference, he should be chosen as an Elder, he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a Bishop and two Elders. It shall, however, be the privilege of an Annual Conference, to grant a permit to licentiates, to perform the ordi- nance of baptism, and administer the sacrament where circum- stances make it necessary. 2. What is the duty of an Elder? — To preach as often as he can and to baptize; and assist the Presiding Elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the Presiding Elder cannot attend, then one or two Elders shall perform this dut3'; he shall also perform all parts of divine worship; endeavor to establish and hold class-meetings, and assist in the election of leaders and stewards. 3. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly, for the traveling preachers and for the poor; to take specification thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other member, in order to account with the Presiding Elder, so that all things be done in a regular manner. 4. Where a local Elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no traveling preacher comes to, he shall make a collection and in like manner take a cata- logue thereof, and bring or send it to the Presiding Elder or to the Conference, for the support of needy preachers who preach among poor people. 5. Should a traveling Preacher or Elder desire to leave the district assigned him, he must first acquaint the Presiding Elder of his intention bj^ writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstances, he .shall be accountable to the next annual Con- ference, and shall not be entitled to' any salary for the time he may have traveled during the year. 6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and 3'et required to preach, it is rea- sonable and just that the Elders should provide for their support in proportion to the time they may be employed, and bj' making a collection for their benefit among the societies in their District; though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to the travelling preachers. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 179 SECTION SEVENTH. THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR DUTY. Qst. How is a preacher to be received ? Ans. Any person desiring license to preach among iis, must obtain a recommendation from the class to which he belongs, or one or more trustworthy persons, and present it to a Quarterly Conference, where he may be, (if in their judgment, expedient,) licensed, until the setting of the next Annual Conference, whose duty it shall be to examine said applicant agreeable to Discipline, and act accordingl3\ No one, however, can be admitted other- wise than on trial, and one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted or rejected without doing him any harm, otherwise it would be no trial 2. No preacher of anj^ other society can be taken up as a preacher in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation of his standing and behavior from his own society, or of some trust-worthy persons who are known as such to the Con- ference or to the Presiding Elder. In such case, the quarterly or annual Conference may take him on trial for one year, after which, if his conduct prove to be in accordance with the Gospel of Christ; he shall be considered as standing in the same capacity among us, as he did in the society from which he came. 3. Every person proposed as a preacher, shall be examined by the conference and the following questions put to him: — Have 3^ou known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed abroad in your heart by the holy spirit ? Do you follow after holiness ? Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation ? What foundation have you for such belief? What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the gospel ? What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- tion, sanctification, and redemption? Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the world? l8o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPI.INES. Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace as the brethren may think it expedient ? Are you willing as much as is in your power, to assist in up- holding the itinerant plan, and support the same as much as possible? Ost. 2. What are the duties of a preacher ? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, and establish class-meetings; to converse with the members on the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those that are afflicted and labor under temptations, to animate the indolent, and endeavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of 'Jesus Christ; never omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers by a well-ordered and ex- emplary life. Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher ? Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with un- necessary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto be, Holijiess to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Converse sparingly, and conduct yourself pru- dently with women; demean 3^ourself in all respects as a true Christian. 2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favor- able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, consistent with truth, will admit. Speak evil of no one; whatsoever may be your thoughts, keep them within j'our own breast, till you can tell the person con- cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 3. Let your business be, to save as many souls as possible; to this employment give yourself up wholly. \'isit those who need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching and visiting from house to house; in instruction and prayer, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord Cometh. DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 181 SECTION EIGHTH. THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. Qst. I. What shall be done, when a Bishop, Presiding Elder, or preacher is reported of being guilty of some crime forbidden in the word of God ? Ans. When a Bishop is thus accused, it shall be the duty of a Presiding Elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. If it then appear that he is justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof to the Bishop accused; and appoint a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two Presiding Elders and three Elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly Conference, where the Presiding Elder and Elders shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended or expelled as the case may require. Qst. 2. When a Presiding Elder is thus accused. Ans. It shall be the duty of the next or nearest Elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And in the absence of the Bishop, another Presiding Elder and two Elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the Conference, where he shall be accountable. Qst. 3. When an Elder or preacher is charged with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, shall take with him another preacher or exhorter, or leader, and examine into the charge; should he appear guiltj^ then notice thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each other. Three Elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, which are to be appointed by the parties concerned, each party appointing one, and the two a third; and if he be convic^d, he l82 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be ac- countable. But should sufl&cient satisfaction be given in either of the fore- going cases, by an expression of repentance or otherwise, they may be retained if considered expedient. SECTION NINTH. MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire to become a member of our society, then the preacher present shall put to him the following question: Have you experienced the pardon of your sins, and are you now determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? If the person answers the question in the affirmative, and no objection be made by any member, on account of his, or her moral conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as members of our societj-, and with consent of the person, the preacher will record his or her name on the class book, but so long as an}' member cannot answer the above question in the affirma- tive, such will have no vote in the societ}-. Every member of this societ}' should acknowledge and confess, that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy Word of God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled \.o flee fro7n the zvratJi to come. Every member should endeavor to lead a good life; be diligent in praj-er, particularly in private; and, for his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, both public worship and prayer meetings. Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk as in the presence of God; also accustom himself to a close communion with God in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow beings, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 183 the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in exercise of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. Every member of this society should contribute something quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- tian to live in peace, particularly to the higher or ruling powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. Among members of the society, the preachers shall establish one or more class-meetings, and the members when practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer-meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and pro- mote the love of good works in Christ Jesus. In every Class, the leader should be elected in presence of the preacher, whose duty it is to appoint prayer and class meetings, to commence and conclude the same; the freedom of our prayer and class-meetings shall extend to any sincere and well-disposed person or persons, who may desire to attend them, although such persons be not members of our society. When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sisters, correct the faults ' ' first between thee and him alone : If he hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses, every word may be established. And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a Publican. On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- ing the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third; the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- l84 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. ing, and apply to the presiding Elder for a second arbitration, and if the preachers find sufl&cient cause, they shall grant a second arbitration; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as executors or administrators, or when a member is in danger of suffering an unexpected loss of propertj-, which will allow him immediate legal process. If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not humble himself, the same shall be publicly excluded from the church. SECTION TENTH. SALARY OF PREACHERS. Qst. I. How and in what manner shall the Bishops and preachers be provided for, and how shall the necessar}' means be collected ? Ans. A collection shall annualh' be lifted for the Bishops, at ever}' preaching place throughout our whole society, the preachers shall pay over this collection to their respective Pre- siding Elders at the annual Conference, and the Presiding Elders shall give an account thereof to their respective annual Confer- ences; out of this collection the Bishops shall receive their salary; provided, that one who has a famih- does not receive more than |i6o and his travelling expenses; and if without a family, $80 and his traveling expeuvses. 2nd. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand .under the direction of the Conference with the itinerant preachers, receive their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but it is their duty to give an account to the annual Conference, and limit their salary to the usual salarj' and necessary expenses, and if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 185 annual Conference, to be applied for the benefit of the traveling preachers. 3rd. For the support of the traveling preachers, the Presiding Elder and preachers shall appoint in each class a steward, to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and proportionably distributed among the traveling preachers. All stewards will submit their accounts to the Presiding Elder at the quarterly meeting, and the Presiding Elder will submit his accounts to the annual Conference, in order to show what each traveling preacher has received, that equal- ity be observed. The annual salary of a traveling preacher, or traveling Presiding Elder is also limited, like the salary of the Bishops to $160, if with a family; or $80, if without a family, and traveling expenses. 4. Yet when a traveling preacher has a family of children, the yearly Conference of which he is a member, will in that case grant him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in their judgment will accord with the wants of said preacher's family. 5. Should the collection of any one District be insuflScient, then it shall be left to a committee appointed by the Conference, who will as they may find it advisable, make up such deficiency, out of other collections made. 6. Resolved, that the Bishops, Presiding Elders, and Circuit Preachers, shall receive pay only in proportion to the time they may actually have traveled. Provided however, that they shall not be docked for any provi- dential interventions, such as sickness, &c. &c. APPENDIX. OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. Let us be deeply sensibly ( from what we have known ) of the evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the work of God, and the souls of our people. Qst. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other ? Ans. I. lyCt us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. l86 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 5. Never speak lightly of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labor, in honor, each to prefer the other, before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils and cures of heart and cJmrch divisiojis. VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE, AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? Ans. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is necessar}' in order to promote confidence and communion with God among us; further to wean us from the love of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage us to strive after and practice brotherly love, that no evil think- tng or jicdging of one another be found among us; and lastly, that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the people on every occasion; both public and private, and exhort them to be diligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this be done, and that in sincerity, we shall, upon the whole, be of little use, and our good shall be evil spoken of, therefore wherever we may be, we should guard against useless and idle conversation. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from hou.se to house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these solemn words of the apostle: '' I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, ivho shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing , preach the Word; be instant in seaso?i, and out of season; Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all long sufferi7ig. ' ' THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God, and the souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are found, meet them as often as possible; speak freel)' with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray DISCIPLINE OP 1837. 187 with them earnestly, yet simply and plainly, that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days of their youth. FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2. After their names have been read aloud, the Bishop or Elder shall say unto the people present: — 3. Beloved Brethren in Christ ! Is there any among you, who know any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be ordained Elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to that office, let him come forth in the name of God, and show what the crime or impediment may be. 4. If any crime or impediment be alleged, the Bishop shall cease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party accused shall be found clear of said crime. 5. If no accusation be alleged, the Bishop, or Elder, shall read the following articles to any and all who may be chosen for ordination. ' ' For an Elder must be blameless, as the steward of God, not self-willed, not soon angry, not given to wine, no striker, not given to filthy lucre. "But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, holy, temperate: "Holding fast the faithful word as he had been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince th^, gainsa3'ers. ' ' Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the Holy Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry, to serve God in the church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy name ? Ans. I trust with the help of God. Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures; old and new Testa- ment ? Ans. I do believe them. Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion your life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make yourself, as much as in you lietli, a wholesome example of the flock of Christ? Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- l88 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. ment over you is committed, following with a glad mind and will, their godl\- admonitions? Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. [Then prayer is made.] After pra3'er, the Bishop and Elder shall lay their liands upon the heads of every one of them, and sa^-: "Take thou authority to execute the office of an Elder in the Church of God. In the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost." Amen. Hereupon the Bishop or Elder, shall deliver to every one of them the Hoi}- Bible, saying: "Take thou authoritj' to read and preach the Word of God in the church of Chri.st." Then the Bishop or Elder shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, 35—38: Let 3'our loins be girded about and your lights burning, and ye 3'ourselves like unto men that wait for the Lord, when he will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those servants whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. Verily I say unto 3'ou, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and vvill come forth to serve them. And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. Then the Bishop or Elder shall pray.— After which the follow- ing benediction is pronounced. The peace of God keep your hearts and minds hi the knowledge of Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. THE FORM TO SOLEMNIZE MARRIAGE. ADDRESS. We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as man and wife, if any person present know any just cause or impedi- ment wh^- these two persons should not be joined in marriage, they will now speak or for ever hereafter hold their peace. If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto the man. N. N. Wilt thou have this woman M. M. to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 189 and comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in adversity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live : — If so, then answer yes. Then shall the Minister say unto the woman. M. M. Wilt thou have this man N. N. to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance; wilt thou love, honor, and obey him, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in ad- versity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him so long as ye both shall live; — If so, then answer yes. Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands together and say. Those whom God had joined together let no man put asunder. In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage, and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, I pronounce them man and wife, in the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost. Amen. HOW TO RECEIVE AN EXHORTER. Any Brother desiring license to exhort, will first make it known to the class-leader, and the class-leader will procure a recommen- dation from the class of which the applicant is a member at the time, upon which the Presiding Elder with the advice of the Quarterly Conference, will license the brother. FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. Whereas it is made the duty of Elders and Preachers to form and hold class-meetings, which should always be done in great moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any means or measures to hinder or prevent an Elder or Preacher in the discharge of this their duty, a member acting to the contrary shall be accountable to the next quarterly Conference. BOOK PRINTING. Resolved, that none of our members, either preachers or lay- men, shall be permited to become the author of a Doctrinal Book or Pamphlet, in a printed form, without the approbation of the Annual Conference, or a select committee by them chosen. FREE-MASONRY. Resolved, that Free-Masonry in every sense of the word, be totally discountenanced, and in no wise tolerated in our society, 190 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, or join as a member of Free-]Masonr\' in any of their processions, or otherwise join thefraternit}-, he will bj' so doing exclude him- self as a member of our church. PRESENTS. Every traveling preacher in our society, shall yearly account to the Conference, for all presents he may have received on his circuit, to the amount of one dollar or more, for the use of him- self or family. And if the Conference be convinced that any one circuit has given presents instead of collections, or that the preacher endeavored to get such in the place of collections, in such case presents shall be considered as collections b}- the Con- ference. But if on examination it should not so appear, then those preachers receiving presents shall hold them as their own, and in addition receive all the Discipline allows them. SLAVERY. Resolved, That all slavery, in every sense of the word, be totally prohibited, and in no way tolerated in our church. — Should any be found in our .society, who hold slaves, the}' cannot con- tinue as members, without they do personally manumit, or set free such slaves. OATHS. We, the United Brethren in Christ, Do believe, that the prac- tice of swearing, either by the Bible, or in the name of Almighty God, is, in our opinion, contrary to the word of our Lord Jesus Christ, who says, " swear not at all," and that the mode of testi- fying to the Truth, when thereto required so to do in a legal form, by way of affirmation, is on us solemnly, conscientiously and fully binding before God and man to tell the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. VENDING AND DISTILLATION OF ARDENT SPIRITS. Should anj' Exhorter, Preacher, or Elder, from and after the next annual conference in 1834, be engaged in the distillation or vending of ardent spirits, he shall for the first and second offence be accountable to the quarterly or yearly conference, of which he is a member; the said conference shall in meekness admonish the offending brother to desist; should those friendly admonitions fail, DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 191 and the party continue to act in the same, and it be proven to the satisfaction of the yearly conference, such Preacher, Elder or Ex- horter, shall for the time being, not be considered a member of our church, CIRCULAR. TO THE MEMBERS OF THE CHURCH OF THE "UNITEDBRETHREN IN CHRIST." Dearly beloved Brethren iji the Lord: — We, as your humble servants in the Gospel yoke, feeling as much as ever convinced of the great evil existing in our world, in consequence of the inordinate use of ardent spirits, do hereby express our entire disapprobation to the rage of that great mon- ster, in our land. We would therefore, in the most affectionate terms beseech you all by the mercies of him, who, in this lower world, went about doing good; and by whose authority it is said that no drunkard shall inherit eternal life; to withhold your influence from the inordinate use of the hydra monster, which has done so much evil in this christian land. And we would now ask our brethren, have any of you Distilleries in operation? And do you sell to the Tavern keeper, or to him who keeps a grocery, or to any of your neighbors, for the purpose of occasional drinking or public gatherings ? If j-ou do. Brethren ! It is to be feared, that there are heavy respon- sibilities resting upon you. Take care that in the great day of eternity, you do not suffer loss, and some of your works be burned. We would also say, that if any of our brethren are engaged in selling or retailing this disgraceful trafiic; they are in our opinion, under equal responsibilities — for to say the least of it; it is demoralizing in its tendency; and feeling dis- posed, as a General Conference, to advise, rather than legislate on this subject; we do say, that if our brethren regard us as those who are watching over their souls for good, the}' will at once desist from every kind of traffic mentioned in this article as a drink. And, in conclusion, we would say, that whatever the sacrifice may be on the part of our brethren in consequence of our humble request, they will have a conscious- ness of having complied with the request of those who wish them well; and we trust, a conscience void of offence towards God and man. 192 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. May the great head of the church, bless us with the mind that was in Jesus Christ. Amen. Written and passed in General Conference, Germantown, Montgomery Co., Ohio, Ma}' i6th, 1837. \V. R. Rhinehart, Secy. PREAMBLE. At a meeting of a General Conference held by the United Brethren in Christ, in Germantown, Ohio, May loth 1837, it was resolved that a constitution should be formed, for the better government of a Printing Establishment, now in operat ion in the town of Circleville, Ohio, belonging to said Church. CONSTITUTION. ARTICLE L Sec. I. Resolved, That the above Printing Establishment be known by the name of the Conference Printing Establishment, of the United Brethren in Christ. Sec. 2. Resolved, That all legislative authority herein granted, shall be vested in the General Conference of said Church; whose duty it is, to make or amend any rules which in their judgment, may seem expedient. Sec. 3. Resolved. That it be the duty of the General Confer- ence, to appoint or elect three Trustees every four years; and also, to employ an Editor and Treasurer. Sec. 4. Resolved, If a vacancy should occur in the Editorial or Treasury department, by sickness, death, or otherwise, that, it shall be the duty of the Trustees to employ some other suitable person or persons to fill said vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. Sec. 5. Resolved, Also, that in case a vacancy should occur with the Trustees either by death or otherwise, it shall be the duty of the remaining two, to make choice of a third person to fill said vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. vSec. 6. Resolved, That the proceeds of said establishment, over and above contingent expenses, shall l)e applied to the traveling and worn out preachers and their widows and orphans; to be divided among the different annual conferences, as the General Conference may direct. DISCIPUNE OF 1837. 193 ARTICLE II. Sec. I. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Trustees to make settlement with the Treasurer and Editor every six months, and cause the Treasurer to make out and report to each annual Conference of the Scioto district, and also to make a Special report to each General Conference. Sec. 2. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Scioto annual Conference, in the interval of a General Conference, to see that the Editor, Treasurer and Trustees, discharge their ofl&cial duties as required in this constitution. Sec. 3. Resolved, That on impeachment of any of the above named officers, it shall be the duty of the above named annual Conference, to examine into said impeachment, and if guilty in their opinion, to dismiss them, and supply the vacancy until the sitting of the next Conference. ARTICLE III. Sec. I. Resolved, That it be the duty of the Editor to pay strict attention to all 'communications sent for insertion, to revise them if necessary, and insert them; nevertheless, if he should receive any, which, in his opinion are inconsistent with the doctrine and rules of our Church, he shall present them to the Treasurer, or one or more of the Trustees, and if rejected by them shall be withheld, otherwise inserted. Sec. 2. Resolved, That it be the duty of the Editor to write editorial for each paper, and attend strictly to the reading of proof-sheet; making selections, &c. ; and when not employed in either, to put in his time in labor in the office as other hands. Sec. 3. Resolved, Also, that it be the duty of the Editor to keep a general oversight over the hands in the office, and see that they do not spend their time in idleness. Sec. 4. Resolved, That the Trustees shall have a general over- sight over the Editor and Treasurer, and see that they discharge their duties, and if they do not, may be suspended from office, until the setting of the next annual Conference, who shall deter- mine the case; in which case said Trustees shall supply the vacan(?y, for the time being. ARTICLE IV. Sec. I. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Treasurer to take charge of all temporary concerns of the office, keep all the 13 194 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. books pertaining thereunto, furnish b}^ the direction of Trustees, such materials as may be needed at all times, and to act as a general Book-agent under the instruction of said Trustees. Sec. 2. Resolved, That the Treasurer, when not employed in his ojQBcial duties, shall work in the office as another hand. Sec. 3. Resolved, Finally, that the Trustees shall have a right to make any by-laws that to them may seem expedient, for the better regulation of the minor concerns of the office. Provided, they do not violate any of the provisions of this constitution. Signed in behalf of the Conference on the day and date above written. HENRY KUMLER, | ^^•^, .g SAM'Iv HEISTAND. ) ^ " W. R. Rhinehart, Se(fy. BUILDING MEETING HOUSES, AND THE ORDER TO BE OBSERVED. Q. Is any thing advisable in regard to building meeting houses. A. Let all our meeting houses be built plain and decent with free seats, and not more expensive than necessary. Q. To whom are our meeting houses and the premises belong- ing to them, to be deeded? A. To a Board of Trustees and their successors in office, in trust as the property of the church of the United Brethren in Christ. Q. How is a Board of Trustees constituted ? A. Whenever it is contemplated by a society to build or pur- chase a meeting house, it shall be the duty of a leader or steward of such society, to make it known to the Quarterly Conference of the circuit or station to which they belong, whose duty it shall be to appoint a judicious Board of Trustees, of not less than three in xwwwhitx ,— Provided, however, that none be required to serve more than four years unless indispensably necessary. No person shall be considered eligible as a Trustee for any of of our meeting houses, who is not a regular member of our church. Q. How are the Trustees to proceed in building a meeting house ? A. They .shall form an estimate of the amount necessary to procure a lot of ground, to build and make such other improve- ments as may be conceived necessary: however, they shall not DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 195 commence building, until two-thirds of the money according to such estimate shall be secured, or subscribed; and also, a lawful title for the lot upon which they intend to build. To hold annual meetings, and keep a fair and regular record of all the transactions of their board, in a book provided for that purpose, which shall at all times be open for inspection, by the Quarterl}^ Conferences of said circuit, or station. To take care of the meeting-house property, furniture, prem- ises, burial ground, &c. Q. What shall be done when a vacancy or vacancies occur in the Board of Trustees, by ceasing to be a member, by suspensation, death or otherwise. A. It shall be the duty of the Quarteny Conference, to ap- point a suitable person or persons, to fill such vacancy or vacan- cies. Q. What shall be done when any of our houses are vacant ? A. It shall be the duty of a Quarterly Conference of the nearest circuit, to appoint not less than than three suitable per- sons for Trustees, who shall have the power when authorized by two-thirds of the members of that Conference, to lease, rent, or sell such meeting house and the appurtenances belonging to it, and appropriate the money arising from such lease, rent or sale; to what it may direct. Note. — The Trustees will be careful in all cases to have deeds of conveyance legally executed and recorded in the county records where the property is, that is, to have the deed made to them and to their successors in office, in trust for the Church of the United Brethren in Christ, and that they will erect and biiild, or cause to be built, a house of worship, for the use of the mem- bers of the said church, according to the rules of Discipline, which may from time to time be adopted by the church. BOOK-AGENTS. 1. Resolved — That there shall be a Book Agent appointed in each Annual Conference District, whose duty it shall be to take charge of all books, &c. sent him by the Treasurer of, and ap- pertaining to the Conference printing establishment, in Circle- ville. 2. Resolved, That he, (the said agent) shall be accountable to the Treasurer of the Conference printing establishment, in Circle- ville, Ohio. 196 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 3. Resolved — That it shall be the duty of the Book Agent, so far as may be safe or expedient, to distribute all the Books sent him by the Treasurer, to the circuit preachers, for the use of the church. 4. Resolved, That the Agent keep an accurate account o f all the distributions and collections for, and in behalf of the said Conference printing establishment. If books are wanted in his District, he is to notify the Treasurer by letter. 5. Resolved — That the Agent shall make settlement with the Treasurer, by letter or otherwise, every six months. ERRATA. Eighth page— 2d line; read 1815, instead of 1835.— This error was noi discovered until some ■were struck off. DISCIPWNE OF 1837. 197 INDEX. Page. Book Printing 189 Book-agents 195 Building meeting houses, and the order to be observed - - - - 194 Constitution of Printing Establishment 192 Constitution of the Church 168 Circular, to the members of the Church 191 Duty of Circuit Preachers, and how received ----..- 177 Election of Bishops and their duty 175 Elders, their Election, ordination and duty ------- 177 Forming and Meeting Classes -------.--- 189 Form and manner of Ordaining Preachers - 187 Free-Masonry -------.-...-. lyg General and yearly Conferences - - - . - 174 How to receive an Exhorter, 189 Members in general .---- 182 Of the Necessity of Union among ourselves ------- 135 Oaths - - - 190 Origin of the United Brethren in Christ - 165 Presents 190 Preachers ------ 187 Presiding Elders, election and Duty 176 Slavery 190 Salary of Preachers 184 The method of receiving Preachers and their duty - . - . . 179 The Instruction of Children - - - 186 The form to Solemnize Marriage - 188 The Immoral Conduct of Preachers, and how they are to be disposed of 181 The Confession of Faith - 172 Vending & distillation of ardent spirits - - 190 Visiting from house to house, and enforcing Practical Religion - - - 186 ORIGIN, DOCTRINE, CONSTITUTION DISCIPLINE, United Brethren in Christ. CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO. PRINTED AT THE CONFERENCE OFFICE. 1841. 199 ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. In the eighteenth century, it pleased the Lord our God, to awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the Gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. About the middle of the said century the Lord, in mercy, remembered the Germans of America, who, living scattered in this extensive countr}', had but seldom an opportunity to hear the Gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them, in their native language. Amongst others, he raised up William Otterbein and Martin Boehm in the State of Pennsylvania, and George A. Geeting in the State of Maryland, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labor in his neglected vineyard, and to call, among the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labors were blessed; they established, in many places, excellent societies, and led many precious souls to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more fellow-laborers, to engage in the vine- yard of the Lord; for the harvest was great, and the laborers but few. The Lord called others, who were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow-laborers. The number of members in the society, in different parts of the country, continued to increase from time to time; and the gracious work of reformation spread through the States of Penn- sylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Several great meetings were appointed, and held annually; when on such occasions, Otterbein would hold particular conversations with the preachers then present, represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the necessity of their utmost endeavors to save souls. At one of these meetings, it was resolved to hold a conference with all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what manner they might be most useful. The first conference was held in the city of Baltimore, Md. ; 202 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. in the year of our Lord, 1789. The following preachers were present, viz: — Wm. Otterbein, Adam Lehman, Martin Boehm, John Ernst, Geo. a. Geeting, Henry Weidner, Chn. Newcomer. The second conference was held in Paradise Township, York Co. Pa., at the house of brother Spangler, in the year of our Lord 1 79 1. The following preachers were present, viz: — Wm. Otterbein, John Ernst, Martin Boehm, J. G. Pfremmer, Geo. a. Geeting, John Neidig, Chn. Newcomer, Benedict Sander. Adam Lehman, After mature deliberation, how they might labor most use- fully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such, as fellow laborers, of whom they had cause to believe, that they had experienced true religion in their own souls. In the mean time, the number of members continued to increase, and the preachers were obliged to appoint an Annual Conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, and to labor more suc- cessfully in the vineyard of the Lord; for, some had been Presby- terians or German Reformed, some Lutherans, and others Meno- nists. — They accordingly appointed a conference, to be held on the 25th of Sept. 1800, in Frederick Co. Md., at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. The following preachers were present, viz : — Wm. Otterbein, Christian Krum, Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, Geo. a Geeting, John Hershey, Chn. Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, Abr'm Dracksel, Diet'k Aurauf. J. G. Pfremmer, There they united themselves into a society which bears the name, "UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST," and elected Wm. Otterbein and Martiii Boehm, as superintendents or bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty, as to the DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 203 mode and manner of baptism, to perform it according to their own convictions. From this time, the society increasing still more and more, preachers were appointed to travel regularly, in as much as the number of preaching places could not otherwise be attended to; and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It then became necessary to appoint a conference in the State of Ohio; because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers who labored in those States, to travel, annually, such a great distance, to the Conference. In the mean time, brothers Boehni and Geeting died, and brother Otterbeiyi desired that another bishop should be elected, (because infirmity and old age would not permit him to superintend any longer,) who should take charge of the society, and preserve discipline and order. It was resolved, at a former Conference, that whenever one of the bishops died, another should be elected in his place: accordingly, brother Christia?i Newcomer v^as elected bishop, to take charge of and superintend the concerns of the society The want of a Disc ipline in the society, had long been deeply felt, and partial attempts having been made at different times, it was resolved at the Conference held in the State of Ohio, that a General Conference should be held, in order to accomplish the same, in a manner, not derogatory to the word of God. The members of this Conference were to be elected from among the preachers, in the different parts of the country, by a vote of the society in general. The following brethren were duly elected, viz: — Chn. Newcomer, Daniel Treyer, Abr'M HiESTAND, GEO. BenEDUM, Andrew Zeller, Abr'm Tracksel, Christian Berger, Henry G. Spayth, Abraham Meyer, I. Nighswanger, John Schneider, Christian Krum, Henry Kumler, & Jacob Bowles. The Conference convened on the sixth day of June, 1815, near Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland Co. Pa. After a mature delib- eration, they presented to their brethren a Discipline, containing the doctrine and rules of the church, desiring that they, together with the word of God, should be strictly observed. 204 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. God is a God of order, but where there is no order, nor Church Discipline the spirit of love and charity will be lost. Therefore, brethren, we beseech ^-ou to follow the example of our Lord; as it is written. Be kindly affectionate one to another with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon himself the form of a servant, humbled himself and became obedient unto death, even the death of the cross, that bj- his grace we may submit ourselves one to another in the fear of God. He who will not submit is in want of humble love. — Jesus said: Whosoever will be chief among you, let him be your servant. By this shall all men know that ye are my disciples, if ye have love one to another; and whoso loveth not his brother, abideth in death. Let us walk in newness of life, that the prayer of our Lord may be answered in us; that we may be one in him; and that he may give us the glor}', which he gave to his disciples, that we may be one even as he and the Father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like minded, having the same love, being of one accord, of one mind; let no one speak or think evil of his brother, but pray God, that he may grant us his Spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly devoted life, to the honor and glory of his holy name: Amen. SECTION FIRST. CONFESSION OF FAITH. In the name of God, we declare and confess before all men, that. We believe in the only true God, the Father, the Son, and Holy Ghost; That these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence or being with both: That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and furthermore, sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. We believe in Jesus Christ: That he is very God and man: That he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost, in the virgin Mary, and was born of her: That he is the Saviour and Mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, accept the grace profferred in Jesus; That this Jesus suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 205 hand of God, to intercede for us; and that he shall come again at the last day, to judge the quick and the dead. We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with the Father and the Son; and that he comforts the faithful, and guides them into all truth. We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of saints, the resurrection of the body and life everlasting. We believe that the Holy Bible, old and new Testaments, is the word of God; That it contains the only true way to our salvation: that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it with the influence of the Spirit of God, as the only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, true repentance, forgiveness of sins, and following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. We also believe, that what is contained in the Holy Scriptures, to wit: the fall in Adam, and redemption through Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the world. We believe that the ordinances, namely, baptism and the re- membrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use, and practised by all Christian societies: And that it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to practise them; But the manner in which, ought always be left to the judgment and understanding of every individual: Also, the example of washing feet, is left to the judgment of every one, to practise or not; but it is not becoming, for any of our preachers or members to traduce any of his brethren whose judgment and understanding, in this respect, are different from his own, either in public or private. Whosoever shall make himself guilty in this respect, shall be considered a traducer of his brethren ; and shall be answerable for the same. SECTION SECOND. CONSTITUTION. WE, the members of the Church of the UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST, in the name of God, do, for the perfecting of the saints, for the work of the ministry, for the edifying of the body of Christ, as well as to produce and secure a uniform mode of action, in faith and practice, as also to define the powers and the business of Quarterly, Annual and General Conferences, as 2o6 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. recognized by this Churcli, ordain the following articles of CONSTITUTION. ARTICLE I. Sec. I. — All ecclesiastical power herein granted, to make, or repeal any rule of Discipline, is vested in a General Conference; which shall consist of Elders elected by the members in every conference district, throughout the Society: Provided, however, such Elders shall have stood in that capacity three years, in the conference district to which they belong. Sec. 2. — General Conference is to be held every four years; The Bishops to be considered members and presiding officers. Sec. 3 — Each Annual Conference shall place before the society the names of all the Elders eligible to membership in the General Conference. ARTICLE II. Sec. I. — The General Conference shall define the boundaries of the Annual Conferences. Sec 2 — The General Conference shall, at every session, elect Bishops from among the elders throughout the church, who have stood in that capacity, six years. Sec. 3 — The business of each Annual Conference shall be done strictly according to Discipline; and any Annual Confer- ence, acting contrar}^ thereunto, shall, by impeachment, be tried by the General Conference. Sec. 4 — No rule or ordinance vshall at any time be passed, to change or do away the Confession of Faith as it now stands; nor to destroy the itinerant plan. Sec. 5. — There shall be no rule adopted that will infringe upon the rights of any, as it relates to the mode of Baptism, the Sac- rament of the Lord's Supper, or the the washing of feet. Sec. 6. — There shall be no rule made that will deprive local preachers of their votes in the Annual Conferences to which they severally belong. Sec. 7. — There shall be no connection with secret combinations, nor shall involuntary servitude be tolerated, in any way. ARTICLE III. The right, title, interest, and claim, of all property, whether consisting in lots of ground, meeting houses, legacies, bequests, or donations of any kind, obtained by purchase or otherwise, by DISCIPLINE OF 1 841. 207 any person or persons for the use, benefit, and behoof of the Church of the United Bretnren in Christ, is hereby fully recog- nized and held to be the property of the Church aforesaid. ARTICLE IV. There shall be no alteration of the foregoing constitution, un- less by request of two thirds of the whole society. May 19. 1841. SECTION THIRD. GENERAL CONFERENCE. Qjiestion ist. Who are the members of the General Conference ? '^^See Constitution. — Qst. 2. How are they to be elected ? Ans. I. It shall be the duty of each Annual Conference, to appoiiit a committee of three, in their several Conference Dis- tricts, to receive and count the votes, and immediately apprize those who may have been elected; also, to Jumish the Presiding Elders with a list of all the Elders eligible 2. The Preriding Elders shall furnish each preacher in charge, whose duty it shall be to furnish each class-leader or steward, throughout the circuits, with a cop^^ of the same, at least six months before the sitting of General Conference. 3. It shall be the duty of each class leader or steward, to ap- point a meeting of the members of each class, for the purpose of electing by ballot or otherwise, one or more delegates to represent them in General Conference. 4. It shall also be the duty of each class-leader or steward, to sign, enclose, and seal, each bill of election, hand it over to the preacher in charge, who shall deliver it to the Presiding Elder, whose duty it shall be to transmit it to the committee appointed by the Annual Conference, as aforesaid. 5. Said committee shall make a list of all the persons voted for, and of the number of votes for each. And should any two or more of the candidates have an equal number of votes, the committee shall determine b}^ lot, who, or which of them, are elected. They shall also forward the names of those elected, to the Conference Printing Establishment for publication. Qst. 3. What shall be the number of delegates to General Conference? 2o8 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Ans. Three from each Annual Conference district. QsL 4. How shall the expenses of the delegates to the General Conference be defrayed ? Afis. When the class-leader, or steward, takes the vote for delegates to General Conference, he shall lift a collection for that purpose, which he shall remit to the committee which are to count the votes, and the committee shall pay it over to the dele- gates elected. SECTION FOURTH. ANNUAL CONFERENCE. QsL I. Who are the members of this Conference? Afis. All the Elders, and the licentiate preachers, who are, for the time being, in the district where the Conference is held: but, when such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the Elders only shall determine the same by vote. Qst 2. In what manner are the transactions of a conference to be conducted ? Ans I. A portion of Scripture is to be read; There is also to be singing and prayer, each day, at the opening, and at the closing of Conference. 2. The conference shall elect two secretaries, one German; and one English, wherever it may be necessary. And when but one Bishop is present, the Conference shall elect a chairman to act in conjunction with the Bishop. 3. The preachers shall be examined respecting their deport- ment towards their fellow beings, whether their conduct in life be blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible to promote the kingdom of God. The following questions shall then be asked: I. Have any of the preachers died during- the last year? 2 Who are the candidates for the ministry' ? 3. Are any to be ordained to the office of Elder? 4. What has been collected for contingent expenses and the salary of travelling preachers? 5 Has reckoning been made with the travelling preachers? 6. Have they received their dues ? 7. Who are willing to travel the ensuing year, without reserve? DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 209 8. Who are the Presiding Elders ? 9. Where are the preachers stationed this year ? 10. When and where shall our next Conference he held ? 11. Is there any thing else to be done? 12. Is all that "has been done, entered upon record? SECTION FIFTH. RECEPTION OF PREACHERS. Qst How are preachers received? Ans. Every person proposed as a preacher, shall be examined by the Conference, or a select committee; and the following questions shall be put to him, viz: Have you known God in Christ Jesus to be a sin pardoning God, and have you obtained the forgiveness of your sins ? Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed abroad in your heart by the Holy Spirit ? Do you follow after holiness ? Do you believe the Bible to be the Word of God; and that therein is contained the true way to our salvation ? What foundation have you for that belief? What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the Gospel ? What is your knowledge of faith, of depravity, of repentance, justification, sanctification, and redemption? Does your own salvation and the salvation of your fellow- mortals, lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the world ? Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? Are you satisfied with our church government? Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as your brethren may think expedient? Are you willing, as much as is in your power, to assist in up- holding the itinerant plan, and supporting the same as much as possible ? ]f None, however, can he admitted otherwise, than on trial: and may be admitted, or rejected without doing him any harm; other- wise it would be no trial. 14 2IO UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION SIXTH. QUARTERLY CONFERENCE. Qsf. I. Who are the members of the quarterly Conference ? Ans. All the preachers, exhorters, leaders, and stewards, who reside within the bounds of the circuit or station. Qsi 2. What is the business of the quarterly conference ? A?is. I. To elect a secretary whose duty it shall be to keep a correct record of all their proceedings, in a book provided for that purpose, in which the names of all the members composing the said conference, shall be entered 2. To make a general, or, if necessary, a particular enquiry into the moral deportment o f all its members. 3. To receive and try all appeals, references, and complaints, that may come regularly before them. 4. To make settlement with the stewards and travelling preachers. 5. To grant license to exhort, or preach, to such person or persons, as may have been recommended by, at least two thirds of the class of which he or they are members: Provided, how- ever, that none shall receive license, who cannot give satisfactory evidence of his or their call, experience, soundness in doctrine, and attachment to our church and government. Qsf. 3. How are preachers from other societies received .■* Ans. If they come to us with certificates of good standing in the society in which they have had membership; and give satisfaction to the Quarterly Conference, of their willingness to conform to our Church Government, and usages, then the Quarterly Conference may license them till the next Annual Conference ensuing; after which if their conduct is in accord- ance with the Gospel of Christ, they shall be considered as preachers or elders, who stand under a similar license among us. QsL 4. What directions are necessary in case of appeals ? Ans. Any Exhorter, or Preacher, dissatisfied with the decision of a Quarterly Conference, shall, within thirty days after the Quarterly Conference, notify the Secretary' in writing, of his in- tention to appeal, together with his reasons for so doing; and it shall be the duty of the vSecretary to take or send a certified copy of the proceedings, the notifications and reasons assigned, to the Annual Conference. DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 211 It shall also be the duty of the quarterly Conference to open and close by singing and prayer. SECTION SEVENTH. MEMBERS IN GENERAL. Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? Ans. When, at any meeting, a person makes known a desire to become a member of our society, then the preacher present shall put to him the following question: Have you experienced the pardon of your sins, and, are you determined by the grace of God, to save your soul ? If the person answers the question in the any affirmative, and no objection be made by any member, on account of his or her immoral conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as a member of our society, and with consent of the person, the preacher will record his or her name on the class book ; but so long as any person cannot answer the above question in the affirma- tive, such person shall not be considered in full membership, and shall have no vote in the society. Every member of this society shall acknowledge and confess that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy Word of God: that he will henceforth strive, with all his heart, to seek his eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with' fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled to Jlee from the wrath to come. Every member shall endeavor to lead a good life, be dilligent in pra5'er, particularly in private, and, for his own edification, to be present at and attend to, when practicable, all meetings for worship. Head? of families should never omit to pray with their families, morning and evening, and to set them a good example in all the Christian virtues. Every one should strive to walk as in the presence of God; also, to accustom himself to a close communion with God, in all his employments, and never to speak evil of his fellow beings; but to practise love towards friend and foe, to do good to the poor, and and to endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ indeed. Every one shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in the word of God. — Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 212 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet peaceable and godly life among men, as it becomes a Christian to live in peace; and to be subject to the higher or ruling powers, as the word of God requires. Every member of our society should willingly and freely contribute something quarterly, "as the Lord has prospered him," I Cor. XVI, 2, towards the support of the itinerant preachers. The foregoing rules are drawn up for the better regulation of our society; and we believe they are founded in the word of God, and incumbent on all who are members of our Church to observe. Should any habitually neglect them, they shall be admonished, and if they do not reform they cannot continue among us. SECTION EIGHTH. FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. Whereas it is made the duty of elders and preachers to form and hold class-meetings, which should always be done in great moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any means to prevent an elder or preacher in the discharge of his duty. A member doing so, shall be accountable to the next Quarterly Conference. SECTION NINTH. CLASSES. I. A class shall consist of three or more members, who shall annually elect one member from their own or some other class, who shall be called their leader. Ost. What is the duty of a leader. Ans. It shall be his duty to meet his class in praj'er-meeting or class-meeting, at least once a week; to speak to them concern- ing the spiritual welfare of their souls, and to exhort them to unity and love. And he shall extend the freedom of our prayer and class-meetings to all sincere and well disposed persons who may desire to attend them. DISCIPLINE OF 1 84 1. 213 II. Every class shall annually elect one who shall be called class steward. Qst. What is the duty of a steward ? Ans. I. He shall collect quarterly contributions for the sup- port of the traveling preachers ; keep an accurate account thereof, and return the same to each Quarterly Conference. 2. He shall be accountable to the Quarterly Conference, for the faithful discharge of his duties as steward of his class. Qsi. What shall be done in case of immoral conduct? Ans. The member or members complained of, or charged with immorality, shall be tried by the class to which they belong, or a select number thereof chosen by the parties concerned, with the preacher in charge of the circuit or station, who shall be chair- man; and, if found guilty, the accused shall be expelled, unless satisfaction be given by an expression of repentance or other- wise. But, should any member be dissatisfied with the decision, an appeal may be had to the quarterly conference, by giving notice thereof to the preacher in charge. In such case, however, the same persons shall not sit in judgment, on the same case. Qst. What shall be done when members trespass against each other .'' A?is. If thy brother shall trespass against thee, go and tell him his fault between thee and him alone; if he shall hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother; but, if he will not hear thee, then take with thee one or two more; and if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a heathen man and a publican. Qst. What shall be done, in casse of disputes between mem- bers or preachers ? Ans. The preacher to whom it shall be known, shall inquire into the circumstances of the case, and shall recommend to the contending parties a reference consisting of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff and another by the defendant, and a third by those two; then these three are to decide. But, if either be dissatisfied with the decision ; such may have a right to an appeal to the next quarterly Conference, for a second arbitration ; where each party shall choose two arbiters, and the four shall choose a fifth; a decision of a majority of whom shall be final. Any person refusing to abide by this decision; and every member refusing, in cases of debt or other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration when recommended to 214 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. him by a preacher or leader; or who shall enter into a law suit with another mem"Ber before these measures are taken, shall be expelled; except when the case is of such a nature, as to require and justify a process at law, as executors or administrators, or when a member is in danger of suflFering an unexpected loss of property. Every class-leader shall keep a record of the proceedings of Church trials, deaths, expulsions aud removals, in a book pro- vided for that purpose; and it shall be his duty, in case of an appeal, to send said record to the Quarterly Conference. Any person wishing to obtain license to exhort or preach, must obtain, from the class of which he is a member, by a vote of two thirds of the members, a recommendation in writing signed by the leader, to the Quarterly Conference, of his circuit or station. SECTION TENTH. PREACHERS' DUTIES. Qst. What are the duties of preachers ? Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers; to form classes; to converse with the luembers on the spiritual condition of their souls; to seek to administer relief; to strengthen and direct those that are aflQicted and labor under temptations; to animate the indolent; to endeavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; to visit the sick on all occasions; to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers, by a well ordered and exemplary life. Qst. What are the directions given to our preachers ? Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away j^our time unnecessarily; always be serious; let your motto be, holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting; converse sparingly; conduct yourself prudently with women; and demean yourself, in all respects, as a true Christian. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of no one, without good evidence; put the best construction on every thing. 2. Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your own thoughts, keep them within your own breast, till you can tell the person concerned what you think wrong in his conduct. .^d. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible. DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 215 To this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need it; and act in all things, not according to your own will, but as a son in the gospel. For as such it becomes your duty, to employ your time in the manner prescribed, in preaching and visiting from house to house, in instruction and prayer, and in meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our I,ord Cometh. SECTION ELEVENTH. CIRCUIT PREACHERS' DUTIES. Qst. What are the duties of a circuit preacher .? Ans. I. To take the circuit assigned him, willingly. 2. To attend the appointments on his circuit, regularly; preach to the people; and hold society -meetings, wherever it is acceptable with the people. 3. The preacher in charge is to see that there are suitable persons appointed in each class, as stewards, leader or leaders. 4. To read the following three sections of our discipline, every six months, in each class, viz: — The Confession of Faith; The Duty of Members; and the Duty of Leaders a?id Stewards. 5. To sit as president on the trial of members, and see that a correct account of the same is kept. 6. To render a strict account of the condition of his circuit, to the Presiding Elder, at each Quarterly Conference, where he is to be held accountable for the neglect of any regular appoint- ments on his circuit. 7. To give charge to all local agents of the Religious Tele- scope, to keep an account of all its subscribers in their respective neighborhoods. 8. To make settlement with the local agents, every six months, and render an account thereof to the district agent. 8. To make out a list of all the appointments on his circuit, and present it to the Presiding Elder at each Annual Conference, for the convenience of his successor. SECTION TWELFTH. ORDINATION OF ELDERS. I. On the day appointed there shall be a suitable sermon or exhortation delivered. 2l6 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. II. After their names have been read aloud, the Bishop or Elder shall read the following articles to all who may be chosen for ordination : An Elder must be blameless, as the steward of God, not self willed, not soon angry; not given to wine, no striker not given to filthy lucre. But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, holy, temperate; holding fast the faithful word as he hath been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine both to exhort and convince the gainsayers. Ti. i ; 7—9. Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the Holy Ghost, to take upon you the ofl&ce of the ministry, to serve God in the Church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy name? A7ts. I trust I am. Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures; old and new Testa- ment? Ans. I do believe them. Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion your life according to the doctrines of Christ; and to make yourself, as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the flock of Christ? Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- ment over you is committed, and follow their godly admoni- tions with a willing and read}^ mind. Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. Then prayer is to be offered. (After prayer the Bishop and Elders shall lay their hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say:) "Take thou authority to execute the office of an Elder in the Church of God, in the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost: Amen." ( Hereupon the Bis hop or Elder shall deliver to every one of them the Holy Bible, saying:) "Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in the Church of Christ." Then the Bishop or Elder shall pray.— And after prayer he shall read from Luke, 12 C. 35 to 38, v : ) Let your loins be girded about, and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he shall return from the wed- ding; that when he cometh and knocketh, they may open unto DISCIPLINE OF '184 1. 217 him immediately. — Blessed are those servants, whom the Lord, when he cometh, shall find watching. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and will come forth and serve them. And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants." (After this the following benediction is to be pronounced:) The peace of God keep your hearts and mi?ids i?i the knowledge of fesus Christ our Lord: A tnen . SECTION THIRTEENTH. ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. Qst. How is an Elder constituted ? Ans. After a probation of three years, a preacher may be presented to the yearly Conference, for consideration ; and if on examination by the Conference, he should be chosen as an Elder, he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a Bishop and two Elders. It shall, however, be the privilege of and Annual Conference, to grant a permit to licentiates, to perform the ordi- nance of baptism, and administer the sacrament where circum- stances make it necessary. 2. What is the duty of an Elder? — To preach as often as he can, and to baptise; and assist the Presiding Elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when the Presiding Elder cannot attend, then one or two Elders shall perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine worship; endeavor to establish and hold class-meetings, and assist in the election of leaders and stewards. 3. Where a local Elder or preacher, who does not suffer want himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes to, he shall make collections — take a catalogue thereof, and bring or send it to the Presiding Elder or to the Conference, for the support of needy preachers who preach among poor people. 4. Should a traveling Preachers or Elder desire to leave the district assigned him, he must first acquaint the Presiding Elder of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect his station, except it be through sickness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be accountable to the next annual Con- ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary for the time he may have traveled during the year. 2l8 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is reasonable and just that the Elders should provide for their support in proportion to the time thej' may be employed, and by making a collection for their benefit among the societies in their District; though not to exceed the sum fixed and alloted to the traveling preachers. SECTION EOURTEENTH PRESIDING ELDERS— ELECTION AND DUTY. Qsi. How are the Presiding Elders to be elected ? Ans. They shall be elected by the Annual Conferences, from among the elders, for one year. Qst. What are the duties of a Presiding Elder ? Ans. I. To travel through the District apppointed him; and to preach as often as he can. 2. He is to take charge of the traveling and local preachers in his district; and to see that they conduct themselves as becometh the Gospel. 3. He shall appoint the quarterly and camp meetings; and, if possible, attend them: he shall hold Quarterly Conferences with the preachers, exhorters, leaders and stewards, and admin- ister the ordinances of God's house: he shall enquire and examine whether the traveling and local preachers do their duty; and particularly, whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sabbath. And where there are several, he is at times, to change them as may seem most beneficial, and to exhort them to maintain discipline and order, love and serious- ness in the society. 4. He can also, in conjunction with two elders, preachers, ex- horters, or leaders, (one from each circuit,) change the preachers in his district. Should any circuit be found without a traveling preacher, it shall be his duty to employ a preacher to travel on that circuit until the next Annual Conference. 5. And should any district happen to be without a Presiding Elder, information shall immediately be given to a Bishop, who shall appoint an elder to preside in said district, until the ensu- ing Annual Conference. discipline; of 1841. 219 SECTION FIFTEENTH. BISHOPS— ELECTION AND DUTIES. Qst. How are the Bishops to be elected? A?is. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority of votes; yet, the Conference may, at their option retain the former Bishops four years longer. The newly elected, how- ever, as well as those retained, must be capable of attending the conferences appointed them; otherwise they cannot be elected. Qst. What are the duties of Bishops ? Ans. I. To preside over the Annual and General Confer- ences. 2. In conjunction with the Presiding Elders, of the past and present years, they are to fix the appointments of the traveling preachers for the several circuits: Provided, that they do not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station or circuit more than three consecutive years; unless particular cir- cumstances require it; and then only, with the consent of the Conference. 3. The Bishops in conjunction with two elders appointed by Conference, shall point out the districts which are to be traveled by the Presiding Elders. 4. They are to attend to and oversee the spiritual concerns of the Church. 5. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- tion. 6. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several Conferences committed to his* charge, he cannot be suffered to retain his office; unless prevented by sickness or other unavoid- able circumstances. 7. If our Church should, at anytime, be destitute of a Bishop, a Chairman shall be elected from among the elders at each An- nual Conference. Each Chairman shall attend the next succeed- ing Conference, in conjunction with the Chairman there elected; that a regular correspondence be maintained until the ensuing General Conference. 8. It shall be the duty of the Bishops to see that a suitable sermon be delivered to the preachers present at each Annual Conference. 220 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION SIXTEENTH. IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS. Qst. What shall be done when a Bishop, Presiding Elder, or preacher, is reported of being guilty of immorality? Ans. When a Bishop is thus accused, it shall be the duty of a Presiding Elder and an Elder after being duly notified, to enquire into and examine whether it is founded in truth. But as the apostle says: "Receive not an accusation against an Elder, but before two or three witnesses," i. Tim. V. 19., they shall not arraign him on mere vague reports; but if it appears that he is justly accused, they shall arraign him; take down their proceedings in writing, and send a cop3^ thereof to the Bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and the accused shall meet; where the case shall be tried by two Presiding Elders and three Elders: and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace until the sitting of the Annual Conference next ensuing, who shall again examine and try the said case. And if again found guilty, he shall be suspended or expelled, as the case may require. 2. When a Presiding Elder is thus accused, it shall be the duty of the nearest Elder and a preacher, to enquire into and examine the same; and if the accused be found guilt}^ they shall take down their proceedings in writing and send the accused a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers and the accused .shall meet; and in the absence of the Bishop, another Presiding Elder and two Elders, shall examine the charge; and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace, until the next Annual Conference; where he shall be accountable. 3. When an elder or preacher is charged with immoral con- duct, the preacher to whom it is known, shall take with him another preacher exhorter, or leader, and examine into the charge: Should he be found guilt}', notice thereof shall be given him, and a time and place appointed where the accusers and the accused shall meet. Then three elders or preachers shall try his case, who are to be appointed by the parties con- cerned, each party appointing one, and the two a third; and if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace, till the Annual Confer- ence, where he shall be accountable. But should sufiicient satisfaction be given, in either of the foregoing cases, by an DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 221 expression of repentance, or otherwise, they may be retained, if considered expedient. But should the accused Preacher, Elder or Bishop refuse to attend, after having been notified of the time and place of trial, he shall be suspended; and the committee shall notify him to appear at the next quarterly or Annual Con- ference, to answer to the charges preferred against him ; and if he fails to attend, (sickness or unavoidable circumstances excepted,) he shall be suspended or expelled, as conference may think proper. SECTION SEVENTEENTH. PREACHERS' SALARIES. 1. The annual allowance of a traveling Bishop, or Preacher, if he has no family, shall be one hundred dollars, and his traveling expenses, if he has a family, it shall be two hundred dollars, his traveling expenses, and house rent not exceeding forty dollars. 2. "When a traveling preacher has a family of children, the Quarterly Conference of his Circuit, is, in that case, to grant him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in their judgdment, will supply the wants of his family. Qst. What shall be done for the needy, superannuated or worn out, traveling preachers, and for their widows and orphans? Ans. The dividend falling to the different Conferences from the benevolent fund, shall be appropriated to their support. — Provided it be strictly observed that the Benevolent Fund money shall not be appropriated to any other purpose. If there are no such claimants as the above specified, it shall be retained by the Conference from year to year, until such cases do occur. And in case the Annual Conference shall, upon evidence received, be satisfied that there are such claimants, it shall be the duty of Conference to appoint a committee, one of whom shall be a Bishop, to divide said fund. Provided, however, that a superannuated preacher shall be allowed no more annually, than one hundred and fifty dollars, if married, and no more than seventy-five dollars, if unmarried: widows, no more, annually, than seventy-five dollars: and an orphan, no more than twenty, while under twelve years of age. Preachers' Presents. — Every traveling preacher in our society shall 3^earl5^ account to the Conference for all the presents he may 222 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. have received on his circuit to the amount of one dollar or more, for the use of himself or family. And if the Conference be satisfied that any circuit has given presents instead of col- lections, or that the preacher endeavored to get such, in place of collections, in such case, presents shall be considered col- lections, by the Conference. But, if on examination, this should not appear, then those preachers having received presents shall hold them as their own; and in addition, receive all the discipline allows them. SECTION EIGHTEENTH. MARRIAGE CEREMONY. ADDRESS. We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as husband and wife, if anj' persons present know any just cause or impedi- ment why these persons should not be joined in marriage, let the same now speak, or for ever hereafter keep silent. ( If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto the man:) N. Wilt thou have this woman to thy wedded wife, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor, and comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and ad- versity; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both shall live. If so then answer, Yes. ( Then shall the Minister say to the woman:) M. wilt thou have this man, to thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor and obey him, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and adversity; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him so long as ye both shall live. If so, then answer. Yes. (Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands together, and say:) Those whom God hath joined together, let not man put asunder. In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage; and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, I pronounce them husband and wife, in the name of the Father, the Son, and Holy Ghost: Amen. DISCIPLINE OP 184I. 223 SECTION NINETEETH. NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. IvCt us be deeply sensible (from what we have known,) of the evil of a division in principle spirit or practice; and of the dreadful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can stand before us ? If we are divided, we shall injure ourselves, the work of God, and the souls of our people. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other? 1. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. 2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 3. When we meet let us never part without prayer. 4. Take great care not to despise each others gifts. 5. Never speak lightly of each other. 6. Let us defend each other's characters, in every thing, so far as is consistent with truth. 7. Labor, in honor, each, to prefer another before himself. 8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils and cures of heart and church divisions. SECTION TWENTIETH. VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE, AND ENFORCING PRACTICAL RELIGION. Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? Ans. I. By instructing them at their own houses; which is necessary to promote confidence and communion with God among us, to wean us from the love of the world, and to inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also, to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that no evil think- ing or judging of one another be found among us; and lastly that we may learn to do, as we would wish to be done unto. 2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the people on every occasion, both public and private; and exhort them to be dilligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this be done and that in sincerity, we shall, upon the whole, be of but little use, and our good shall be evil spoken of; therefore, wherever we may be we should guard against useless and idle conversation. 224 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these solemn words of the Apostle: I charge thee therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quick and dead at his appearing and his kingdom; preach the word; be instant in season and out of season; reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all long suffering and doc- trine. 2. Tim. IV. I. 2. SECTION TWENTY-FIRST. INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? Let him who is in any way zealous for God and the souls of men, begin the work without delay. Wherever children are found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, and instruct them diligentlj'; exhort them to be good, and pray with them, earnestly yet simplj^ and plainl3\ that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days of their youth. SECTION TWENTY-SECOND. DOCTRINAL PUBLICATIONS. No one of our preachers or laymen, shall become the author of any Doctrinal Book or pamphlet, in a printed form without the approbation of the Annual Conference, orof a committee chosen by the same. And if any preacher or layman violates this rule, he shall be accountable to the class, or to the Quarterly or Annual Conference, as the case may be. SECTION TWENTY-THIRD. OATHS. We believe that the mode of testifying to the truth, when required so to do, in a legal form, by way of affirmation, is on us solemnly, conscientiously, and fully binding before God to tell the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 225 SECTION TWENTY-FOURTH. ARDENT SPIRITS. The distilling and vending of ardent spirits shall hereafter be forbidden throughout our whole society. Should any preacher, exhorter, leader, or layman, from and after the next Annual Conference in 1842, be engaged in distilling or vending ardent spirits, he shall be accountable to the class, the Quarterly or Annual Conference to which he belongs, as the case may be. If the offending brother be an exhorter, leader, or layman, it shall be the duty of the preacher in charge, to admonish him in meekness; if he be a preacher, it shall be the duty of the Presid- ing Officer of a Quarterly or Annual Conference to admonish him to desist from his unholy employment; and if all friendly admonitions fail, such oflfending person or persons shall no more be considered as members of our church, but be expelled from the same. — Provided, however, that this rule shall not be so construed, as to prevent druggists and others from vending for medicinal or mechanical purposes. SECTION TWENTY-FIFTH. FREE MASONRY. Free Masonry, in every sense of the word, shall be totally prohibited, and in no wise tolerated in our society. And should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, or join as a member, in any Masonic procession, or otherwise join a Masonic fraternity, he shall, for so doing, be excluded from our church. SECTION TWENTY-SIXTH. SLAVERY. All slaver^', in everj- sense of the word, is totally prohibited, and shall in no wa)% be tolerated in our church. Should any be found in our society, who hold slaves, they cannot continue as members, unless they do personally manumit or set free such slaves. 15 226 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. SECTION TWENTY-SEVENTH. RULES AND REGULATIONS, OF OUR PRINTING ESTABLISHMENT IN CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO. RULE I. ist. The above establishment shall be called the Conference Printing Establishment of the United Brethren In Christ. 2d. The legislative authority, herein granted, is vested in the General Conference of said Church; whose duty it is, to make or amend any rules, as in their judgment, may seem expedient. 3d. It shall be the duty of General Conference, to appoint or elect three Trustees, every four years; and also, to employ an Editor and Treasurer. 4th. If a vac ancy should occur in the Editorial or Treasury Department, it shall be the duty of the Trustees to employ some other suitable person or persons, to fill said vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. 5th. In case a vacancy in the Board of Trustees should occur, it shall be the duty of the remaining two, to appoint a third person, to fill the vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. 6th. The proceeds of said establishment, over and above con- tingent expenses, shall be applied to the traveling and worn out preachers, and their widows and orphans, to be equally divided annually, among the different Annual Conferences. RULE II. ist. It shall be the duty of the Trustees, to make settlement with the Treasurer and Editor, every six months; and cause the Treasurer to make out a report to each Annual Conference, of the Scioto District; and also, to make a special report to each General Conference. 2d. It shall be the duty of the Scioto Annual Conference, in the interval of the sessions of the General Conference, to see that the Editor, Treasurer and Trustees discharge their ofl&cial duties as required. 3rd. On impeachment of an}' of the above named officers it shall be the duty of the above named Annual Conference, to examine into said impeachment; and if guilty, in their opinion, DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 227 to dismiss them and supply the vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. RULE III. I St. It shall be the duty of the Editor, to pay strict attention to all communications sent for insertion; to revise them, if neces- sary, and then insert them. But, if he should receive any, which, in his opinion, are repugnant to the doctrine and rules of our church, he shall present them to the Treasurer, or to one or more of the trustees; and if rejected by them, they shall be withheld; otherwise, inserted. 2nd. It shall be the duty of the Editor, to write editorial for each number of the paper; and to attend strictly to the reading of proof-sheet, making selections, &c. 3d. It shall be the duty of the Editor to keep a general over- sight over the hands in the ofl&ce; and to see that they do not spend their time in idleness. 4th. The Trustees shall have a general oversight over the Editor and Treasurer, and see that they discharge their duty; and if they do not they may be suspended, until the sitting of the next Annual Conference, which shall determine the matter; in which case said Trustees shall supply the vacancy for the time being. RULE IV. ist. It shall be the duty of the Treasurer to take charge of the temporal concerns of the office; to keep all the books pertaining thereunto; to furnish, at the direction of the Trustees, such ma- terials as may be needed at all times; and to act as general book-agent under the instruction of said Trustees. 2d. The Treasurer, when not employed in his official duties, shall work in the office as a hand. 3d. The Trustees shall have privilege to make any by-laws, that may seem expedient to them, for the better regulation of the minor concerns of the office: provided, they do not violate anj'^ part of the above rules. SECTION TWENTY-EIGHTH. BOOK AGENCY ist. There shall be a Book Agent appointed in each Annual Conference district, whose duty it shall be to take charge of all 228 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. books sent to him by the Treasurer of, and appertaining to, the Conference Printing Establishment in Circleville Ohio. 2d. Said Agent shall be accountable to the Treasurer of said establishment. 3d. It shall be his duty, so far as may be safe or expedient, to distribute to the circuit preachers, for the use of the church, all the books that may be sent to him by the Treasurer. 4th. Said Agent shall keep an accurate account of all the distributions of 'books, and collections of money, for and in behalf of, said establishment. If books are wanted in his dis- trict, he is to notify the Treasurer by letter. 5th. Said Agent shall make settlement with the Treasurer, by letter or otherwise, every six months. SECTION TWENTY-NINTH. ORDER TO BE OBSERVED IN BUILDING MEETING HOUSES. Qst. Is any thing advisable in regard to the building of Meeting Houses? A71S. Let all our meeting houses be built plainly and neatly with free seats, and not more expensive than necessary. Qst To whom are our meeting houses, and the premises be- longing to them, to be deeded ? Ans. To a board of Trustees, and their successors in office, in trust, as the property of the Church of the United Brethren in Christ. Qst. How is a board of Trustees constituted .? Ans. Whenever it is contemplated, by a society, to purchase or to build a Meeting House, it shall be the duty of a leader or steward of such society, to make it known to the Quarterly Conference of the Circuit or station to which he belongs, whose duty it shall be to appoint a judicious board of Trustees, of not less than three in number. Provided however, that none be required to serve more than four years, unless indispensably necessary. No person shall be considered eligible as a Trustee for any of our Meeting Houses, who is not a regular member of our Church. Qst. How are the Trustees to proceed in building a house ? Ans. They shall form an estimate of the amount necessary to procure a lot, to build, and to make such other improvements DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 229 as may be conceived necessary. However, they shall not com- mence building, until two thirds of the money according to such est imate shall have been secured or subscribed and also a lawful title for the lot upon which they intend to build. To hold annual meetings and keep a fair and regular record of the transactions of their Board, in a book provided for that pur- pose, which shall at all times be open for inspection by the Quarterly Conference of said circuit or station. To take care of the meeting house property, furniture, prem- ises, burial ground, &c. Qst. What shall be done when a vacancy or vacancies occur in the Board of Trustees ? A7ts. It shall be the duty of the Quarterly Conference to ap- point a suitable person or persons, to fill such vacancies. Qst. What shall be done when any of our houses are vacant ? Ans. It shall be the duty of a Quarterly Conferance of the nearest circuit to appoint, not less than three suitable persons for Trustees, who shall have the power, when authorized by two thirds of the members of that Conference, to lease, rent or sell, such meeting house, and the appurtenances belonging to it; and to appropriate the money arising from such lease, rent, or sale, to what said Conference may direct. Note. — The trustees should be careful, in all cases, to have deeds of conveyance legally executed, and recorded in the county records where the property is: that is; to have the deed made to them and to their successors in ofiice, in trust for, the Church of the United Brethren In Christ and, to erect and build or cause to be built, a house of worship for the use of the members of said Church. SECTION THIRTIETH. CERTIFICATES. Members of our society moving to other places and seeking admission there, shall procure such a certificate as this; signed by a leader or preacher. "This is to certify that A. B. is a mem- ber of good standing, in the church of the United Brethren In Christ, at (Date, &c.) 230 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. Preachers removing' from one Conference district to another, shall when they apply to another Conference for admission, pro- duce a transfer from the Conference to which he formerly belonged. CORRECTION. In the second article of Constitution, page 14, read — "Sec. 8. — The right of appeal shall be inviolate." [This section appears to have been overlooked by the Secre- taries.] DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 231 INDEX. Page. Annual Conference 208 Ardent Spirits 225 Building Meeting Houses, &c. --- 228 Booli Agency > 227 Bishops— Election and Duties .......--- 219 Confession of Faith 204 Constitution 205 Classes -- 212 Circuit Preachers' Duties 215 Certificates - - - - 229 Doctrinal Publications 224 Elders' Election, Ordination, «fec. ----- 217 Forming and meeting Classes ----------- 212 Free Masonry --- -.-.-225 General Conference .-207 Immoral Conduct of Preachers 220 Instruction of Children -.. 224 Members in General ------------- 211 Marriage Ceremony 222 Necessity of Union, &c. 223 Origin of the Church 201 Ordination of Elders - 215 Oaths 224 Preachers' Duties --. 214 Presiding Elders' Election and Duties - 218 Preachers' Salaries .--...-..-... 221 Printing Establishment 226 Quarterly Conference ---- 210 Reception of Preachers --..-.-.--.. 209 Slavery 225 Visiting from House to House ...--.<.... 223 CERTIFICATION. I HEREBY certify that the English form of the Discipline prior to 1815 and of the Disciplines of 1815 and 1817, as contained in this volume, is a correct translation of the original German text. A. W. Drury. Dayton,, Ohio, August 26, 1895. I hereby certify that the English Disciplines from 1819 to 1841 inclusive, as contained in this volume, are a faithful reproduction of the originals, including errors of orthography, punctuation, capitalization, and typography. ,,, . ^ W. A. Shuey. Dayton, Ouio, August 26, 1895. 232 PART II. Disciplines in German, 1814-1819, 1841. ^ic Se|rc bcr Screiuigtcn Sriiber in K^rifta. SCrtilel 1. ^m ^amen ©otte§ Befennen rair wor ^ebermann, bajj loir Qlanben an ben ®inigen roa^ren ©ott, 3Sater, (Sof;tt unb fjeitigen ©eift, ba^ biefe brep (Sing finb, ber SSnter tm ©oFjn, ber ©or;n im S5ater, xmb bet l^eilige ©eift gleicf)eg 2Be[en, mit fieiben, ba§ biefer ©ott, §tmmel unb Srben, unb allee wa^ bartnnen ift, foroo^I fid)t5ar alg unfid^tbar, erfd^affen §at, unb aHeg tra-- get, regiret, frf)i^et unb erf)alt. 2trt. 2. 3Cir glauben an ^efunt ©l^riftum, ba^ er raal^rer ©ott unb SSKenfd), ^jeilanb unb 33erfo^ner, ber ganjen SOSelt ift, iia^ aEe inenfd^en burd^ if^n feelig roerben fonnen, raenn fie mollen, ba§ biefer '^e\u§, fiir \m§ gelitten, geftorben unb begraben, am briten tage raieber auferftanben, gen §innnel ge= fafiren, unb am jiingften tage, raieber lommen raivb, ju rid^ten bie lebenbtgen unb bie toben. 21 r t. 3. 2Ctr glauficn an ben l^eiligen ©eift, ba§ er Dom SSater unb ©ol^n augge^e, ba^ rair burd^ if)n mitffen ge^eiligtraevben, unb ben ©lauben erlangen, roetdE)er un5 reiniget oon Sltler Bef[etfung beg fIeifcE)eg unb be§ geifteg. 21 V t. 4. 2Bir glauben ba§ bie Sibel ©otte§ raort ift, baft fie ben rool^ren roeg ju unferm feelen[}eil unb feelig!eit ent^alte, ba§ ein jeber raa^rer ©l^rift, biefelbe, mit ben einfliffen be§ getfte§=@ott, (Smjig unb alein ju feiner ricl^t= fdEinur nel^men miiffe, unb ta^ ol^ne Bufe unb glauben, an ^efuw Sl^riftuni cergebung ber fiinben, unb nad^folge ^efu (S^rifti, niemanb ein rcal^rer Sl^rift fei;n !ann, 21 rt. 5. 2Bir glauBen \)a§ bie Sel^re, raeld^e bie l^eilige fd^rift entpit, namlic^ ber faU in 2lbam, unb bie errettung burtf) '^e^mn G^riftum ber gan?en SBelt geprebiget unb werfimbiget rcerben folte. 2Ieu^ere ^e\d)Qn, unb cerorb^ nungen ndntlidE) bie taufe, unb bag gebad^tnig be§ §errn, in auSt^eilung beg brobg unb 2Seing, raerben anempfol^Ien, raie aud^ bag fufiraafdE)en, rao eg be= gel^ret roirb. 3 •Hun Hn iie JRegeln Her S^crctnigtcn ©tiiiicr in ^5nN. 21 r t. 1. 3'Jur fold^e b^iiber, follen t)on ben oereinigten Sriiber in (Sl^rijlo, al§ il^re prebiger anerfant rcerben, rcclc^e fid) 511 bem enbe beg i[)rer Gon^ ferenj, ober einer gro^en cerfamlung angemelbet finben, Beg berfelbigen, orbent- l\6), ©jamenirt rcerben, unb folgenbeS beantroortet, ob er an S^riftum (^laube ob er bie oergebung f einer fiinben (gmpfangen, ob er bem frieben unb ber f)eiligung nacf)iage, ob i^nt fein eigen fjeil, mit bem l^eil feiner nebenmen= fd^en am fjerjen liege, ob er bem rati) ber briiber fid^ unterroerfen icill, folcfje joHen eine fd^riftlid^e erlaubni^ eriangen. 31 rt. 2. ©old^e ^rebiger f-oHen in ber ©onferenj bijd^offe erroSI^Ien, burcf) bie mel)rf)eit ber ftimmen, auf br''9 \ai)x. aSa§ finb bie Sifrfjoflid^e ^flic^ten. 21 rt. 3. lten§. in ber Gonferenj, al§ ^reftbent oorjufi^en, 2teg. foQ er ba§ rec^t f)aben, mit beg'timung ber Gonfeveuj ju agiren. 3ten§. burc^ juftimung ber gonferenj ift i^m frei^eit gegeben ditefte ju Grioal^len. 21 rt. 4. ©egen roen finb bie bifrf)bfe unb filtefte unb prebiger megen Titten rcitrigem betragen nerantroortlid^ ? gegen bie algemeine Sonferenj, rao aber ba§ betragen gegen bie bibet ift, ba^ jeigen ba finb J^tnlangltc^, fo foU ber bem e^ befant ift, nod^ mef)r prebiger ?u fid^ nel^men, unb eg unters fuc^en, ift eg gegen bie Sibel, fo foE berfelbige fdiioeigen bi^ jur (Sonferenj. 21 rt. 5. 6in jjeber prebiger foQ alien ficif; aniuenben, bie gemeinbe fo oiel al§ moglid^ ju erbauen mit le^r, unb leben, mit gebdtf) unb gott* )eeligem roanbel, er foQ fid^ beftreben, mit alien glibern feiner gemeinbe hetant |U roerben, fo bag er biefelben Ian beg namen nennen, unb roo eg moglid^, oon i^rem feelenjuftanb mit il^nen reben. 21 rt. 6. Z^ jeber gemeinbe follen Dorgenger errae^Iet merben, bcrren pflid^t foil fegn anfang unb enbe ober befdjlu^ ju mocf)en in ben batftunben unb prioatftunben, aljo bie iiranfen ju befuri^en unb ein jebeg glieb ber ges meinbe ju ermaf^nen unb in liebe ^u erl}alten unb auf fid^ felbft fel^en. 21 r t. 7. ©in jebeS glieb ber gemeinbe foU fiefennen, bag e€ bie 33i6el fiir ©otteS roort l§alte, ba§ e§ fid| von nun an Bon l^erjen fceftrebe, fein l^eil |u fud^en in Sl^rifto, unb feine jeeligJeit ?u fd^affen mit furd^t unb jittern, unb bem (Sroigen jorn gotteg ju entfliel^en.. 21 rt. 8. ®in jjebeS foil fid^ Beftrefeen, eincn genauen unb gott[eeligen rcanbel ju fii^ren, flei^ig fei;n int gebat 5efonberg un oerborgenen unb mo moglid^ alien oerfamlungen fiegbeS offentlid^en gotte^bienft unb betftunben lu feiner erbauung bei)roof)nen. 21 r t. 9. §aubter in familien, foHen e§ nid^t werfeumen, be§ ntorgenbS, unb be§ abenbS tnit ben i^rigen ju baten, benfelben ein guteg ©jempel fe^en, in alien dEirifxIid^en tugenben. * 21 r t. 10. (gin jebeS glieb fott fid^ beftreben, genau al§ in ber gegens maxt gotten ju raanbein, bep feinen gefd^aften an einen genauen umgang mit gott gerao^nen, liebe iiben gegen freunbe unb feinbe, ^en ormen guteS t^un, unb fud^en in ber t^at, ein 9iacI)folger ^efu S^rifti ju fein. 21 r t. 11. ®in jjebeg glieb foil fid^ ftar!eg entfialten, unb eg nur ?u notl§, alS arjenet), unb metejin gebraud^en. 21 rt. 12. (Sin jebeg glieb rairb fid^ ent^alten, ©ontagg gefd^afte ju treiben, ju faufeu unb oerfaufen fonbern foil benfelben in aubad^i, mit fingen geiftreidl)er liber, jur unb lob gotteg jubringen. 21 rt. 13. ®in jebeg biefer gemeinbe folte cirtetjal^rlid^, aug freiem njiHen, fo oiel bex;tragen, alg eg feine umftanbe eriauben unb bie reifenben prebiger ju unterftii^en. 21 r t. 14. (gg ift pflid^t eineg ieben glieb biefer gemeinbe, ein friebtid^eg, ftiHeg, unb gottfeeligeg Ieben ju fiil^ren, in bem umgang mit alien menfd^en, raie eg einem S^riften gejimet, im frieben ju Ieben, abfonberlid^ foU jebeg, ber Dbrigleit, unb tim gefe^en beg lanbeg gel^ord^en, ben bie obtigfeit ift Don gott oerorbnet. 21 rt. 15. 2Cenn fid^ ftreitigfeiten ereignen folten, jmifd^en jroeg ober mefiren gliber ber gemeinben, con roegen fd^ulben, ober irgenb einer anbern urfad^, unb bie ftreibenten part^eien, ?u !einem oertrag fontmen fonnen, fo foE ber prebiger meld^er bie auffid^t iiber bie gemeinbe l^at bie ©ad^e unter= fud^en, unb inn ftreibenten partl^eien eine referent anempfel^Ien, biefelben foE aug breg glieber ber gemeinbe befte^en, roooon ber Ilager einen, ber bellagte ten anbern, unb btefe bret) foEen bie jtoiftigfeiten fd^lid^ten. '^n faE aber eineg ber ftreibenten perfonen mit biefem augfpruc^ unpfrieben fegn foEte, fo mag eg fic^ an bie ndc^fte grofie uerfamlung roenben, eg ben prebigern befant mac^en unb urn eine jicepte frifbenSfd^Iid^tung anl^alten, uub loenti bie prebtger f)inIangUd^ urfad) ba^u finben fo follen fie eine jiDcgte friebengfc^lid^tung ert^eilen, in rceld^em faH, eine jebe ber partt^eien jraei) glieber au§ ber gemeinbe, unb biefe tier ben fiinften errcel^len jollen, bi^ foUen ben auofprucfi ber jraiftigfeiten gan^ticf) ent[(^eiben, follte aber einev ber perfonen, niit bicfent au^fprud^ bod^ nidjt jufrieben jein, jo fdjiiffet er fid^ bamit au5 ber gemeinbe au§, unb rcenn fid) ein glieb ber gentcinbe roeigern fo(te, von inegen fdiulben, ober anbere jioiftigfeiten, bie ©ad)e 511 fd^Iid^ten ju laffen, nad^ bem e§ tl^m oon ben prebigern raeld^e bie auffid^t iiBer bie gemeinbe l^aben anempfof)len rcorben ober ein glieb ber gemeinbe gerid)tUcf) belangen folte el^e bie Dorf)erge[)enbe ma^reglen genommen inorben, fo foU baffelbe oon biefer gemeinbe an^gefd^Ioffen fet)n, ©§ fei;e "Qen baf5 ftreitigfeiten Don ber art rcaven, ba§ fie eine gerid^tlic^e entfd^eibung erfor^ bere unb redjtfertigte. ©i^riftofel ©rofd^ unb ©fjriftian 9Ieu!ommer. 8 e ^ r c unb Sn^t'-Orlinttng hex ^eretntdteii aSrit^er in ©^ttftp* &zbvudt bey 3'^^?<^"'i ^« ^oc^. 1816. $on bem U t f V r tt tt g bcr SBcrcittigten ©ruber in Kftrifti. ^n bem le^t ocrfloffenen ^afirl^unbert, fjat e§ bent ^errn unferen ©ott gefallen, in »erfc^iebenen ©egenben bet 31Belt JJJanner ju erroecten, bie ben oerfaHenen S[)ri[tent[;uin raieber auf^elfen, unb bie Sel^te G^rifti t)om ^reu^, in if^rer Sauterfeit oerfiinbigen foUten. (Sr gebad)te babet) aud^ ber SJeutfd^en in Slnterila, roeld&e l§in unb roieber, in biefem fid^ auSgebteiteten Sanbe lebten ; batjer nur felten ©elegenl^eit l^atten, bie ^rebigt beg (S»angelium§ com ^reu^ ju l^oren um fic^ ju er= bauen, unb nur felten in ifjrer 3Jhitterfpratf)e, unb on mand^en Dertecn nic^t in ber Sauterfeit unb im Grn[t oorgetragen rcie eg follte. Unter anbern mefjr, erroecfte er and) einen Dtterbein, einen So^m, unb einen ©iit^ing; riiftete fie au3 mit ©eift, ©nabe unb 5?raft, in feinem fo jel^r BernadE)Iafjigten 2Beinberge |u arbeiten, uni nud^ unter ben Seutfc^en in Stmerifa, ©iinber jur 93ufie ?u rufen. 2)iefe folgten bem 3luf ifjreg §errn unb 2Keifter§, arbeiteten im ©egen unb errid^teten l^in unb raieber ^errtic^e ©emeinben, unb fiil^rteu (S^rifto manege eble Seele ju. 9iac^ unb nad^ er= roeiterte fic^ ifjr aBiirfungglrei^, bafe fie babei) genotf)tget roaren, fid^ um aWitarbeiter im SBeinberg umjufe[)en ; benn bie (Srnbte mar fo giofe, unb ber 2lrbeiter nur roenig. ©ott enoedtte anbere bie er aud) loiHig mac^te, il^re 5Crafte bem §errn ju rcibmen. Sold^e rourben bann von einem ober bem anbern alg SKitarbeiter angenommen unb von ifjuen ?um ^rebigt^Slmt be= ftimmt. 8 Sie Slnjal^l ber @emcinb§=©Iteber in ien oerfd^iebenen dJegenbett raud^g Don 3eit ?u 3sit» wnb uerbreitete fief) in ben ©taaten Don SJJar^Ianb, '^3ennft)[Daniett unb S^irginien. ®a^er ^at Dtterbein auf ben grofien 3Ser= fammlungen ?u 3eiten ©onferenj ge^alten, mit ben ^rebtgern bie gegenroartig rcaren. ®r l^at il^nen bie SBid^tigfeit im ^rebigt=2lmt Dorgeftellt ; rcie not^ig eg fei), alien ©rnft anjuraenben, iiin ©eelen ju retten ; fie l^ielten babeg 3iatl^ iDie fie am nii^lid^ften feyn tonnten, unb nal^men fol^e auf ju 3JJitar5eitern, Don benen fie Urfad^ l^atten ju glaufien, ba§ fie baS ©fjriftent^um ant ^erjen erfafjren l^atten ; bie treu loaren unb geiibte ©innen flatten ; biefe ritfteten fie JU, 5um 2Berf beg ^errn. S)ie atnjafjl ber ©liebec Denne^rte fid^ immer mel)r unb mef)i-. Urn jje^t rec^t nii^Iid^ unb gemeinfd^aftlic^ ju arBeiten, fa^en fid^ bie ^rebtger oerpfItcl;tet eine ©onferenj ju beftimmen, rao fie jU; fammen famen, um fid^ red)t ?u oereinigen; benn einige rcaren Sieformirte, anbere Sutl^eraner, anbere SJJenoniften, u. f. vo., balder beftimmten fie ben 25ften ©eptember, 1800, in j^'i't^brirf) ©ountt), SRarijIanb, im §aufe beg i^riebrid^ ^emp jufammen ju !ommen. ®g famen il^rer bregje^n |ufammen unb oereinigten fid^ in eine ©efellfc^aft, bie ben ^Ramen fiil^rt : „Sie Det= einigten Sriiber in ©^riflo"; fie errod^tten SBill^elm Dtterbein unb 2)Jartin 23ofjm, JU Dberauffe^ern ober Sifiioffen ; fie rourben einig etnem jeben bie grei;()eit ju laffen, ju ^aufen, nadf) eineg jeben (Srfenntni^. SSon nun an cerbreitete fid^ bie ©emeinbe immer mel^r unb mel^r; fie na^men ?Prebtger an bie immer reiften (benn bie ^rebigt ^ta^e lonnten fonft nid^t bebient roerben;) ba§ 2Ber! oerBreitete fid^ in ben ©taaten »on D^io unb ft'entutft). ®g roar je^t not^ig eine ©onferenj im ©taat D^io |u l^alten, inbem eS §u befd^roerlid^ roar ia^rlid^ fo roeit nad^ ber ©onferenj ju gel^en. 2)er Sruber 93b^m ftarb unterbeffen, unb Sruber Dtterbein Begel^rte baft ein 93ifdE)of follte geiudfjtt roerben, roeil er nid^t mel^r felbft nac^fefjen fonute, ber ba^ SBerf ii5er fid^ nefjme, bomit Qnd)t uiib Drbnung gel^alten roiirbe; be::n eg roar auf ber erften ©onferenj auggemad^t, baf( nenn einer Don ben Sifd^offen fterben roiirbe, ba§ ein anberer erroafjit roerben foHte. SDa roarb Sruber ©l^riftian ?leucommer al§ Sifd^of auf eine g^it erroa^lt, ber bie Stuff id^t iiber fid^ ne^me iiber bie ©emeinfd^aft. ©d^on lange rourbe ber 3)Jangel einer 3"^torbnung in ber ©emeinbe tief empfunben ; eg roar fd^on me^rmal etroag baran getl^an roorben ; enblid^ rourbe auf ber ©onferenj im ©taat D^io befd^Ioffen : ba^ eine §aupt ober ®eneral Gonferenj gef)0lten roerben foflte, bie eg iiber fic^ nef^me, bie 3"ci^t= orbnung in etroaS ooUftanbiger ju mad)en, roie fie fid^ fitr bie ©emeinbc fc^idEen roiirbe. 16 10 Sie ©lieber ju biefer Gonferenj foHten au3 ben '•^rebtgern, in ben unter)(f)ieblid^en ©egenben, burd^ bie ©lieber ber ©emeiabe geraiif^It raev= ben, burd^ bie 2)Jel^rl^eit ber ©tintmen ; unb e§ waren bie f olgenben ^rebi^ ger gegenraarttg auf ber (Sonferenj, nemlicl^ : ©i^riftian 91eucommer, 2l5ra= f)am »ie[tanb, 2lnbrea§ 3«'^f^'^' 3)aniel STreijer, ©eorge 53:nebum, 2(6raf)am 2:racf[et, (Efjriftian Merger, 2l5rar)am 2J?ei;er, So[;anne3 ®d)neiber, §einric^ lumler, §einrtc^ gpiit^, ^faac 3ieu[rf;roanber, 6f;riftian i?rum, unb ^acob Sauhia. S)ie uerfamntleten jidf) am 6ten Suni, 1815, nai)e ter) amount '^sleffing, in SCeftmorelanb Gountr), ^ennfijloanien, roo fie nac^ reifer lleber= legung, bie fotgenbe Sef)re nnb 3^egeln fiir gut unb niil5lid^ befanben, fie ber ©emeutbe in Siebe unb Semut^ ju iibergeben, mit bem Ijerjlic^en SOBunfd^, ba§ biefe Sel^rc unb fold^e S^legeln, nebft bem 2Dorte ®otte§ mod^ten beo6- acf)tet rcerben. Senn (Sott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb ino !eine Drb^ nung unb ilirdienjud^t ift, ba t)erlief)rt fid) alle 2iele unb ©emeinfdEiaft ; barker ta^t un§ bem "Statl) be§ §errn folgen ber un5 lef^rt, ^a^ luir burc^ Semutf) einer 'oen anbern fpfjer ad^ten nl§ un§ feUift, fud)en gefinnt ju fein luie Sefu§ (S^riftu^ aud^ roar, ber ilnec^tS ©eftalt angenommen, rcarb ge^orfam b\% junt 2^obe am 5?reu^, um \m^ bie ©nabe unb i?raft p er; loerben, bafe mir ung auS Siebe unb Semut^ einer bem anbern unterinerfen fijnnten ; roer fid^ nid;t unterraerfen fan, bem mangelt nod^ ©nabe, Siebe unb S)emut^; batjer fagt ^efu§: luer unter eurf) ber ©ro^te ferin rcitt, ber fott be§ anbern 2)iener fetjn, fo mitffen rair einanber lieben; baran, fagt Scfu§ : rotrb jebermann eriennen, ba§ i(;r meine red^te ^linger feijb, fo i^r Siebe l^abt, unb raer nid^t lieb l^at ber bleibt im 2:obte. ©o laffet imS Siebe iiben, auf baf[ rair bie §errlid^leit befi^en mogen, bie ^efuS feinen ^itngern von feinem 33ater erbeten l^at, bafj luir ein5 fetjn mi3d)ten, inie er uuD ber 93ater eing finb. SDarum ifjr lieben Sriiber, laffet un5 fuc^en gteic^^ gefinnet, einfiellig unb eintnigUd^ ju fei)n, unb feinS llebel von bem anbern reben ober benfen, fonbern ben §errn anflc(}en, baf3 er uuS feaien ©eift unb ernft geben mbdjte um ba§ ©fjriftent^um red^t ju feiner @^re ju fu^ren, unb }n unferem eroigen SBofil 2lmen. mux m\^mtt ^a3 ilttuliens=iekemttnig b er SBereuuBtcn ©riiber in £|riftd. Sm Seamen ©otteg befennen mix vox jebermann, ba^ toir glauBen an ben eintgen rcafjren ©ott, S3ater, ©ol^n itnb Jjetligen ©ei[t, ba^ biefe ©rei) (Str.5 ftnb, ber Skater im ©of;n, ber ©of^n int SSater unb ber ^eilige ®eift gteid^eg SBefen mit bepben. 2)a§ biefer bregeintge ©ott §tmmel unb (Srben unb alleS roaS barinnen ift, forool^t ftd^tbar alg unfid^tbar, erfc|affert l^at, tragi, regtert, fd^ii^t unb erf;alt. SCir g(auben an ^e'inm ©^riftum, bafi er roa^rer ©ott unb aJJenfd^ ift, ba§ er feine menfd^Iic|e 9?atur burc^ ben ^eiUgen ©eift in 3Jlaria ange= nontmen, unb t)on i^r gebol^ren ; ba^ er §eilanb unb SJerfol^ner beg ganjen menfd^Ud^en ©efcf)Ied^t§ ift. SBenn fie bie in ^efu angebotene ©nabe im ©lauben an ifin anne^men; ba^ biefer ^ej'ug fiir un§ gelitten l^at, am ©tamme beg J?reu^eg geftorben, begraben, am britten Sage roieber aufer: ftanben, gen §immel gefafjren, roeld^er ift jur Sied^ten ©otteg unb jjertritt ung ; unb roieber f ommen rotrb, am jiingften S^age, ju rid^ten bie i^ebenbigen unb bie Sobten. 2Bir gtauben an ben §eiligen ©eift, ba^ er gteid^eg SCefeng mit bem 33ater unb bem ©o^n, bafs er von bet)ben auggel^t, iia^ mix burd^ il^n er* leud^tet, burd^ ben ©lauben gered^tfertigt unb gef^eiliget roerben. 3Bir glauben an eine §eitige ©emeinbe, ©emeinftfjaft ber §eiligen, 2Uifers ftef)ung beg ^^-^eifd^eg unb ein eroigeg 2ehen. 2Btr glauben bag bie 58ibel alteg unb neueg 2:eftament, ©otteg 9Bort ift; ba^ fie ben rcaf^ren SBeg ju unferer ©eeligfeit ent^atte, ba^ ein jeber roal^re G^rift, biefetbe mit ben ©inflitffen beg ©eifteg ©otteg eimig unb 11 12 aEeiit ^u yeinec 3iidE)tfd^nur netjinett ^oQ, unb baji ol)iie ®Iau5en an Sef"'" 6r;rti"tum, rcafire 33ufe, $5ergebung ber eiinben unb 9Jac^folge GJ^rifti, nie= manb ein loafirer 6f)ri[t fet;n fann. 2Bir glauben ba^ bie 2e[)re loelc^e bte ^eiltge ©tf)rift entl)dlt, ttemlid^ : ben fyaU in 2lbam unb bie Sriofuug burd^ Sefmn Sf)rt{'tum, ber gaiijen 2Celt foUte geprebigt rcerbeu. 2Cir gtauben bajj bie ciu^ere @naben-2)Jittel in ben ©emeinben Cr^nfti geiibt roerben joUten, nemlicf) : bie Xaufe unb bag @ebdc{)tni^ bcj Sobteo be§ §errn, in 2lugtf)eilung beg 33rob§ unb 2Being, bie foUen nadi bom 23efef)l be§ Jgerrn ^efu, unter jeinen ^inbern geiibt luevben ; bie 2trt unb SBeife foil abec einem jeben narf) fciner ©rfenntni^ iibertaffen loerben. 3lucf) bag 33ei) fpiel »on gufjroafdfien [telnet eineui jeben frep. Stoctjtcr 9H)f4ttitt. 9?acf) loeld^er 2Betfe unb Serorbnung, foQen bie SBerl^aublungen auf ben Sonferenjen oorgenommen iperben ? ®g roirb cerlangt, ba^, roaS aud^ immer beg biefer ©elegenl^eit getl^an TOirb, foil fo getfjan roerben alg o& eg in ber ©egeniuart (Sotteg rciire; rcer ju reben fjat ber ftefje auf unb rebe frei;, roie erg in feinem §erjen ^at. 2Bie unb auf roag 2lrt, foUen bie ©lieber einer $aupt=(5onferenj geroa^lt roerben ? 3n einem jeben Siftritte fotlen bie reifenben ^rebiger, roenn foldfie ba finb, roenn ntcljt, fo follen bie fcfjljaften 'J^rebiger bie in benx Sejirf roof)nen, eg ben ©emeinben corfteaen, ba^ fie jroet) Slelteften aug i[}rem SBejirl roal^^ len; e§ foQen aber aUe bie 2lelteften bie in bem Se^irf finb bie ouf bie Sonferenj ge^en lonnen, auf bie 2Ba^l t^un, unb eg einige 3eit corner be- lannt madden, unb bie jroei; bie bie 2)Jel)v[)eit ber ©timmen be!ommen, fotten bie ©tieber von ber $aupt=Sonferenj ferin ; bie ©timmen foQen aber an jebem 13 Drte, fd^riftlid^ aufgejeid^net uierben, unb Don einent anrcefenben ^rebiger, ober t)on einem 3Sorganger unterfcfirieben Toerben. Ser 2lufftcf)t§a[tefte im Sejtrl foU eg unterfud^en, unb joQten jroei) Don il^nen eine gleid^e 2lnjaf)l ©timmen l^aben, fo foH er entfc^eiben roeld^er con il^nen erroa^It ift. 9Bie oft jott bie ^paupt^Sonferenj gel^alten rcerben ? 21116 Dter ^a^ve. §at bie §aupt=Sonferenj eine anbere ©eroalt, bie bie ^afirUc^e nid^t i)(xt ? ^a, fie l^at allein bie ©eroSit einen Sifd^of, an§ "ben 2luffid^tgdUeften, auf »ier ^a^re ju raaf)len ; unb aud^ biefe 3"'^torbnung ober 3iegeln ju oercinbern ober ?u cerbeffern, nac^bem fie e§ fiir gut befinbet unter ben 33e= bingungen unb au§na^m. bafi !ein 2lrtifel geinarf)t rcerbe, ber ben ©ircutt }U bereifen auf^ebt ober roegt^ut. 2)ie ^aupt^Gonfere-nj foU aud^ bie S)is [trifte beftimmen, roo bie jci^rlid^en (Sonferenjen gel^alten roerben foHen. 3BeIc^eg ftnb bie ©lieber ber jd^rlid^en ©onferenj ? aide bie 2lelteften unb ^rebiger, bie einen fd^rifttic^en Grlaubnifefd^ein empfangen l^aben, unb bte in bem Sejirf con einer fold^en ©onferenj finb, ober in folrf)en aufgenominen roerben. ?JadE) rceld^er SOBeife unb Serorbnung fotten bie 3Serl^anbIungen corges nommen roerben ? 1. ®§ roirb juerft ein ©apitet au^ ber 93i6et cerlefen, unb lurje 2lns merlung bariiber gemad^t, a[§bann roirb gefungen unb gebeten, unb bag fo oft al§ bie ©onferenj fi^t ; unb mit gefang unb gebet befdfitoffen. 2. ©ie (Sonfercnj foH einen 2lufftd^t§alteften unb einen ©c^reiber rodf)= Icn, urn mit bem SifdEiof ju agiren. 3. SBerben bie ^rebiger unterfud^t, roie il^r SBetragen gegen ©ott, gcgen einanber unb gegen ifjren 3iebenmenfd)en fei); ob if)r 3BanbeI untabeU^aft, ob fie fo Die! 3ett roie moglid^ anroenben um ba§ 3Jeid^ ©otteS auSjubreiter 4. 2Ba§ fiir ^rebiger finb auf bie ^robe anjunel^men ? . 5. 2Cag fiir ^rebiger miiffen ferner auf ber ^robe bleiben ? 6. ©inb einige ?u 2lelteften ju roal^Ien ? 7. ©inb rool^I einige oon ben ^rebigern geftorben ? 8. aCelc^eS finb bie 2luffic^t-galteften ? 9. SBer giebt fid^ auf ju reifen ? 10. 3Cag ift gefammelt roorben, t^ei(g jufdHige 2luggaben ju beftreiten, unb ben reifenben ^rebigern if^ren ©el^att aufjumod^en? ift 3ted^nung mit i^nen ge^alten roorben ? fiaben fie ba§ i^rige befommen ? 11. 2Bann unb roo foQ bie ndd^fte ©onferenj gel^alten'roerben ? 12. ©inb bie 2Ielteften georbinirt roorben ? 14 13. S" »»ti^ fiir Se;irte [inb bie ^rebiger biefe^ "^aljv angefteUt ? 14. ^[t nocf) etioaS mef^r ju tf)un ? 15. §at bie Gonferen? bie Siftritte Beftimmt in if^rein a3e5ir!, tun bie 2Cal^l ftir bie ©lieber ber §aupt=Sonferen5 ?" l^alten ? 16. Sft a2e^ nin^ yer^anbelt rcorben, in ba^ ^protofoU iihex getragen roorben ? fritter m^nitt S5on iicr paljlung unti Orbinatioii bes JHrd)of0 unb ijon feincm 9lmt unb ^^Jf^iftt SBie foU ei'.t SBifd^of einge[e^t luerben ? S)ie §aupt=6onferenj foil \l)n raaf)[en, burc§ bie !D?el}rf;eit ber ©timmen, au§ ben 9luf[irf)t§a(te[ten, bie ju ber §aupt-(£onferenj geiua()lt fiub; auc^ [tef)t eg ber (Sonferenj frep, ben 33ifrf)ot nod^ aiif oier '^aljre 'bex)iuhel)a[icn. Ser geiud^Ite ober 33ifdE)of muJ5 aber bie unter[c!)ieblid^en 93ejirfe unb 6on= ferenjen bereifen !i3nnen, fonft Jan er nxeriantntlung aufrid}ten, roo e§ t^unlid^ i% init i^nen t)on i^rem ©ee(en=3uft«"be ^u reben, bie angefod^tenen fud^en jured^t ju raeifen, bie Sragen fud^en aufjuntunbern, unb alle im ©lauben in ber ©nabe unb (Bv !enntni§ ^ef" ®f)ri[tt fud^en ju erfiauen, fo oiel raie inogltdf) ; nie unterlaffen bie i^ranfen ju fiefud^en, unb ntit feinem 2eben unb SCanbel fud^en feine SEBorte ju Befraftigen roog er geprebiget. 5. ^M)e 2lmueifungen loerben ein.'n ^rebiger gegeben ? 6r fep flei^ig, nie Derliere er feine 3eit an unnot^igen Singen, an eintgem Drt, immer fet) er ernftl^aft, fein ®en!|pr«d[) fer) bem ^errn gel^ei(igt, er meibe alien Seid^tfinn, unb ©d^er^en, er rebe Befd^eiben, unb l^aBe Bef^utfamen Utngang mit bem roeiBIid^en ©efc^Ied^t, uub Betrage fid^ alS ein raafjrer 6[)rift. 6. (Sr fet; imuter aBgencigt 33efd^ulbigungen ju gtauBen, e§ fet) benn l^inlangli^ erttjiefen er lege aKeS fo t)iel e§ tnit ber 2Baf;rl^eit Beftel^en mag ;um Beften aug. ®r rebe oon itiemanb nidfitS UeBeIg, na^ er \e uoit einem benfen mag, Bel^alte er fold^eS Bet; fid^ felBft, Big er eg bemjenigen felBft, bem eg angefjt, fagen !ann. 20 7. ©eiit (Sef(^aft fct), Beelen ju retten fo t)iel roie mogli^; ?u biefctn ®ef d^afte ge6e er ft^ auf. ®r befuc^e bte e§ bebiirftig finb ; in alien Singen f)anbele er nid^t nad^ feinen eigenen (Sutbenfen, fonbern alS ein (2of)n beg (SoangelhimS, al§ ein jolc^er ftef)t e§ i^m ?u feine 3eit, fo tote biefe 3Sorjc{)n|t loutet: mit ^rebigen, mit §au§befucl^en, mit Se^ren unb Seten, unb Ses tracf)tung be§ 2CorteS ©otteg jujubringen bamit ge^e er urn, 6iS bee §err fommt. ©iebcntcr ^Ibfjftmtt. Sittenlofen J^etragcn bet Prctiiger, IB i e mit t^ttcn fott Dcrftt^rctt tocrben. 2Cag foH getfian roerben, roenn von etnem Sifcf)of, ober 3luf[tci^tgaltejlen, ober aielteften, ober ^rebicjer, bie Siad^rid^t eiiitommt, al^ i)abe er fic^ eineS kJerbrec^enS frf)ulbig gemai^t, ba^ im SBorte ®otte§, alg eine auSfc^tiefeenbe ^anblung geboten fex; ? 1. SBenn ein SifdEiof icegen ©ittenlofen Setragen befd^ulbigt reirb, roie I'oU mit il^m tjerfa^ren loerbeii? SBo fic^ 58efd}utbigung ereignen foEte, bie bem ©uangelium nad^tt^eitig roare, fo foQ e^ einem Sluffic^t^alteften unb einem 2lelteften befannt gemac^t roerben, bie fotlen eg unterfuc^en, ob etroog an ber ©ad^e fei) ; fie fotlen aber feine j?lage auf;er jroeg ober brei) ^ei^m nnne[)men, al5 roie ber 2lpo[tel fagt: frfieint e§ nun, bafe er mit red^t be-- fc^ulbigt roirb, fo foUen fie eg fd)rifttid^ ne^men, unb bem Stfc^of eine 2lb= fc^rift baoon fd^iden, unb eine 3»;it beftimmen roo fie jufammen fommen, roo bie ^lager unb ber Sifd^of gegenroartig fetin follen, unb foH burc§ jroeg 3Iuffid^tgalteften unb breg 2lelteften unterfud^t roerben ; roirb er fc^utbig ge= funben, fo foQ er fd^roeigen big jur ja^rlic^en (Eonferenj ; ba f oQen bie 2tuf-- fitfltgcilteften unb Stelteften eg nod^ ein 3Jkl unterfud^en, roirb er fd^ulbig gefunben fo foU er Bom 2lmt fugpenbirt roerben. 21 2. 5l8enn ein Sluffid^t^dltefter raegen ©ittenlofen SBctrageit 6e[d^ulbigt TDiirbe, toaS foH getf)an loerben? aSo ftd^ 33efci^ulbigungen ereignen foUten bie bent (g»angeliuin nad^t^eitig roiiren, fo [oil eg bee udcf)fte Slufftd^t^altefte unb ein ^rebiger uutecfudien ; ?eigt eg fid^ nun alg o5 er fd)ulbig njare, fo foHen fie eg fd^riftUc^ ne^men, unb bem 2lufftc^tgalteften eine Slfifd^rift baoon fd^iden, unb eine 3eit beftimmen roo fie follen ^ufammen fommen, roo bie ^lager unb ber 2luffitf)tgaltefte gegenroartig feiju ; in 3l5n)efen^eit beg Sifcfpfg, foil ein anberer 2Iuffid)tgalte[ter unh jioei) 3lelte[ten gerufen raerben, bie foHen eg unterfuc^en ; roirb er fd^ulbig gefunben, fo foC er fc^raeigen big jur ©on^ ferenj, ba foH er DeranttDortUd) fegn. 3. 2Benn ein 31eltefter ober ^rebiger ober (Srmat)ner follte befd^ulbigt loerben, rcegen (Stttenlofen=33etragen, toag foil getl^an roerben? 2)er ^re= biger in ber ©egenb bem eg belannt roirb, foil nod^ einen '^rebiger ober ®r= ntal)ner ober einen 2?organger mit fid^ ne^men, unb eg unterfud^en; foltte eg fcfieinen bafj er fd^ulbig roare, fo foil il^m 9Jacf)rid^t baoon gegeben roerben, unb eine Qeit beftimmt roerben, roo fie, bie j?lager unb ber befd^ulbigte ge^ genroartig fet)n; in 2l6roefen^eit beg Stfd^ofg ober 3(uffic^tgalteften : fotten eg bret) 2lelteften ober ^rebiger unterfud^en, roirb er fd^ulbig gefunben, fo foil er fd^roeigen big ^ur Gonferenj, roo er oerantroortlidti foil fegn. mttx %mmtt ^dit ben CiJlletiern Snsgetiiein, ©in jebeg ®Iieb ber ©emeinbe foUte be!ennen, bo^ eg bie Sibel fitr ©otteg 2Bort l^alte ; ba^ eg fic^ oon nun an Don §er^en beftrebe, fein §eil in ©l^rifto ^efu ju fucf)en, unb feine ©eeligleit p fd^affen ntit j5"i^d^t unb 3ittern, urn ben juliinftigen eroigen ^om ?u entfliel^en. ©in jebeg ®Iieb foH fid^ beftreben einen genauen unb gottfeligen SSanbel ju fii^ren ; fleifiig fe^n im ©ebet, befonberg im 33erborgenen ; unb roo mbgs lic^ aHen SBerfammlungen Bet)rool^nen, begbeg offentlid^en ®ottegbienft unb 33etftunben, ju feiner (grbauung. 22 iiiiuptcr in J.^.milien follten e§ nie nerfaumen be^ 2Rorgeng imb 3lbenbo mit bcii 3^)rtgeii 511 beten, unb benfelben eiii gute6 (Sre»ipel fe^en, in alien c^riftlicf)en Jugenben. Gin jebe^ foil fief) beftreben, genau alo in ber gegeniuart Sotted 511 irianbein ; fidj bei; feinen Oefd^dften an eiucn genauen Unxgang ntit ®ott gerabljnen; nie Uebel con feinem 9iebenmenfcf)en reben; i^iebe iiben gegen i^reunb unb ^einb, ben 31[rmen guteg ju tl^un, unb fud^en in ber X^at ein 3iad^fofger ^efu Gfjrifti ju fei;n. Gin jebeS ©lieb foHte fid^ ent^alten, ©onntag§ unnotI)ige ©efc^cifte ju treiben; nic^tg ju !aufen nod^ 511 cerfaufen, fonberu foil benfelben in 3lnbacl)t mit lofen tinb r)oren be€ SBort^ ©otteg, mit fingen geiftreicf)er i^ieber jur ©l^re unb i'ob ©otteS ju bringen. Gin jebeg ©lieb in biefer ©emeinfc^aft follte ciertelial^rlic^ auo fveijem ICirien fo uiel bex)tragen, rao e6 feine Umftcinbe eriauben, um bie reifenben '^rebiger in unterf^alten. GS ift eineni jeben (^Jliebe feine 'iPfIidE)t, ein frieblid^eg ftilleS unb gott= felige^ Heben ju fiif)ren, im Umgang mit alien SJJeitfc^en, loie e'j einem Gljriften gejiemt, im ^-rieben ju leben ; abfonberlicf) foil jebe^ ber Dbrigteit unter; tl}an foi)n, fo mie @otte§ 2Bort eg forbert. Set; folc^en ©liebern ber ©emeinbe, follen bie ^rebiger eine ober mef^rere Glaffen^iBerfammlungen errid}ten luo e5 tijunlii) ift ; bafelbft follen fid) bie ©lieber, roo e6 fet)n fann, ein 3JJaI in jebcr SCod^e Derfammeln, an bem baju beftimmten Drt, um Setftunben mit einanber ju I^alten, um fic^ ju erbauen in ber gegenmart ©otte^ unb in ^iebe ju guten SCerfen in Gl^rifto ^efu. 5n jeber Glaffe foUten iBorgdnger in gegenamrt be3 ^rebiger^ geunif)It roerben, beren ^f(td)t foil fei;ii, bie betftunben beftellen, anjufangen, unb §u befd)lie^en, aud^ ju Qeiten ©laffen^Unterrebungen ju [;alten, ein jebeg ©lieb }n ermaljnen unb in ^iebe er^alteu, unb auf fid) felbft fef)en. SlBenn ©lieber fic^ an einaitber uerfiinbigeu al5 Sriiber ober odjioeftern, fo ftrafe eS juerft jroifd^en 2)ir unb '^Ijm aHetn, l^ovet er bid) fo f;aft bu il) I geioonncn, prt er bic^ nid^t, fo nimm noc^ einen ober imex) ?u bir, auf bap alte Qad)Q beftc^e au^ jioeijer ober brei^er 3*-'i{^eninunbe ; [)oret er bie nid)t, fo fage e6 ber ©emeinbe, I)oret er bie ©emeinbe nic^t, fo I)altc if)n al'j einen §eiben unb 3ollner. SBenn ftd^ Streitigteiten ereignen fotlten, poifdjen 5it)ei) ober ntefjreven ©liebern ber ©emeinbe, uon megen Sdjulben ober irgenb einer anbern Uc- fad)e, unb bie ftreitenben '^artl)eien in feinem JiJertrag fommen fbnnen, fo 23 fott ber ^rebiger rcelt^ei* bie Slufftd^t iiber bie ©emeinbe i)at, ober ber ^re= biger ber in ber ©egenb rool^nt, bie ©ad^e unterfud^en, unb ben ©treitenben eine Sleferen^ anempfe[)[en ; biefelbe foil aug brep ©liebern ber ©enteinbe beftel^en, raonon ber J?lager einen, ber Seflagte ben anbern, itnb biefe jroep ben britten erroafilen follen, biefe breg foHen bann bie 3iDiftig!eiten f(f)lid^ten. ^m %aU abex eine ber [treitenben ^erfonen mit biefem 2lu§fprud^ un^ufrieben fepn foCte, fo mag fie fid^ an bie nad^fte oierteljal^rlid^e ober grofje 33er= fammlung roenben e§ bem 2luffi(^t§alteften ober 2lelteften Be!annt madden, um eine jroetjte griebenSfd^litf)tung an^alten, unb raenn bie ^rebiger l^in= langlid^ Urfac^ baju finben, fo follen fie eine jraegte ^^rieben^fd^lid^tung er= tl^eiten; in raelrfiem %aU eine jebe ber ^art^e:;en jroet) ©lieber aug bee ®e= meinbe, unb biefe niere, ben fiinften erroa^len foQen; biefe follen ben 2lug= fprud^ ber 3roifti9^eiten ganjlid^ entfd^eiben; follte aber eine ber ^erfonen mit biefem Slu^fprud^ borf) nid^t jufrieben fo fd^lie^t er fid^ bamit aug ; ein (Slieb ber ©emeinbe fid^ loeig fon , roegen ©d^ulben ober anbern S'^iftiS^eiten, bie aft f*Qe§ roas Der()anbelt morben, in bag ^rotofoll iibertragen roorben ? fritter 9lbfr(|ttitt ISon Her If filjlung xnib #rMnation kr iifdjiiffc unb Hon l^rem 91 mt nni ^flii^t %t. 2Cie foUen bie Sifd^offe eingefe^t tcerben ? 2tntn). 2)te §aupt:(Sonferen? foil fie roafjlen, burd^ bie 99?e^rl^eit ber ©timmen, Slelteften, bie ju ber ^aupt^Sonferenj geroafjit finb ; aud^ fte[)t e5 ber ©onferenj frei), fie bie Sifc£)offe noc^ auf Dier ^a^re be^jube^alten. 2)ie ©eioal^lte ober Sifd^offe miiffen a6er bie unterfc^ieblic^en 58ejirte unb (£on= ferenjen bereifen !onn!n, fonft !onnen fie nic^t geioa^It raerben ; bie fo ge; iDttl^lte fotlen oon einem Sifd^of unb einem 2telteften burd^ 2luflegung il^rer §anbe orbinirt roerben ; follte aber !ein Sifd^of ba fet)n, fo follen eg jrae^ 2leltefte t^un. %t. aSag finb ber Sifc^offe i^re ^flic^ten ? 2lntn). 1. 33ei) unfern ©onferenjen alg SJorfi^er ju agieren. 2. ®ie l^aben mit einem 2lelteften, ben loa^Ien fie, ben reifenben ^re= bigern il^re oerfc^iebenen Sejirfe anjurceifen, boc^ tmt ber @infcf)ran!ung, bafi fein reifenber ^rebiger longer alg breg ^al^re nad^ einanber in einem geftattet roerbe, an bem nemlid^en Drte ju bleiben, e§ fer) benn, in §infid^t auf befonbern Umftanbe, unb mit SeraiCigung ber Sifd^offe. 3. 3)ie Sifc^offe ^eigen ben 2luffic^tgalteften i^ren Sejirt on, tien fie ?U bereifen fiaben. 4. ^n ber jroifd^en ,3eit, uon ben ©onferenjen l^aben fie mit ben 31(uf= fid^tScilteften ©eroalt, bie reifenoen '^rebiger ju cerraed^feln, roo fie eg fiir Beffer anfefien, au^ ^rebiger aufjune^men ober ju fugpenbiren big auf bie ©onferen?. 5. ®ie ^aben bie oerf^iebenen ©onferenjen, fo roeit fie fid^ erftredEen, ju bereifen, unb ^aben im geiftlid^en, bie Dberauffid^t iiber alle ©ememben. 6. 3^"en ftef)t eg ju, bie Drbination ju noHjiel^en. 7. SBenn ein 33ifcf)of auf^ort bie oerfcf)iebenen Sonferenjen ju bebienen in ber ®emeinfd^aft unb bie Sejirle ?u bereifen, fann er bod^ fein bifd^iifj 33 34 lid^eS Slnit unter uu5 au^iiben ? Wm, e^j fei; benn, bafi er Irani rciive unb rca§ bergleid^en Umftanbe mel^r fer)n nuigten. 8. 22enn e5 fic^ jutragtn foUte, bajj unfere (Semeinfd^aft ?u einer 3eit leinen a3ifrf)of l^atte, raetl fie entiueber geftorben ober ju^penbirt luaren, obcr loie e§ tmmer jet)n mag ; rcie foil 3ktf) gefdjaft luerben ? Ser Sleltefte, loeld^er in 3l5iuefen^eit ciueS 23tid&of3 geiuiifjlt loirb, jum mit agteren an ber Sonferenj, foU bie Sifd^ofS Stelle fo lang bebienen, alg bie ©onfevenj raaf^rt; Oiefer fo geiuiif^lte a>orft|er, foil audi) bie anbece (Eonferenj bcbi.nen ; er foil feinen ©i^, mit bem bort geiDa[)Iten 3Sorfil5er net)nien, um mit i^m in bee Sonferen? ?u agieren, unb ber bort geaiatjlte Sorfi^er, foH eben fo, bie anbere Sonferen? and) bebienen, baniit eine jebe Gonfereni wei^, rcie e§ bet) ber anbern ougfiel^t ; unb bafj Siebe unb ®emeinfd)aft er^alten rcerbe, u. f. lo. bi§ jur §aupt:6onferen5, bie roieber Sifd^offe lud^It. 9. ©^ foil ber 58ifcl)bffe ^flicl)t fei^n, bafe eine fdjicflid^e ^rebigt an bie anroefenbe 'prebiger ber) ©d^Iu^ jeber ©onferenj gel^alteu roirb. mtxitx m\t^n\tt S^on tien 3lufrid)t0 = aelteftcn, il^r er %x. 2Bie fotten bie Stuffid^tScilteften geioal)!! luerben ? Slntro. Sie a3ifc^ijffe follen ber tionteren? einige au^ ben Sleltcften, Die i^re ^robejeit au^geljalten, Dorfd)Iagen, unb mit 3uftimmung ber Son; ferem auf oier "^aljxe lud^len. ^r. Iften^. ffias finb bie ^vf'ierfammlungen fuc^en ju ernc^ten, mo eg bie 9Jte^rl)eit ber ©lieber fUr gut erfennt, fie aucf) Ijalten, unb Ijelfen :i>organger ju erioatjlen. 2. :isiertelial)rlidE) eine freijioittige Collection ju l^eben, fiir bie reifenben ^rebiger unb fiir Slrme; ein i^erjeidjui^ bauon ^u nel)men, an jebem Ort, unb oon bem 3Sorganger unterfrf)rieben, unb roenn fein SSorganger gegens roartig rocire, eg bann oon einem anbern ®lieb unterfcfireiben laffcn, um mit bem Sluffid^tgalteften 9ied)nung }u Ijalten, auf bafj aUeo orbentlic^ 5"9e^e. 3. 2Bo ein fef5l)after 2leltefter ober 'i}3rebiger ber felber nic^tg mangelt, on einem Drt prebigt, rao fein S'ieifenber l)in fonimt, fo foil er bie (£oUection l)eben, unb ein ifierjeid^nife ebenfo booon nef)men, unb eg bem 2lufftrf;tgalteften, ober jur Sonferen? fcf)icten, ober bringen, jur Unterftii^ung ber 33ebiirftigen fefefioften ^rebiger bie orm finb, unb unter ormen prebigen. 4. ©oUte ein reifenber ^rebiger ober 3leltefter, feinen il^m ongeioiefes nen ^Sejirf nerlaffcn rootlen, fo foQ er juoor bem 'Jhiffic^tgalte'ien jctjreiben — 37 joEte einer i^n etioa cerlaffeix ober Derfdumen, e§ fei bann burdi ^ranti^eit ober fonft unDermetblid^e Umftciube, fo foil er ber nad^ften Sotr^renj oer^ antroortlid^ bafiir fepn. 5. SQBo fid) fe^fiafte befinben, toeld^e arm unb fiebiirftig ftnb, unb oer= langt rairb Don il^rten ju prebigen ; fo ift e§ bittig, bafe bie 2lelteften in ben ©emeinben ©otection madden, um fold^e ^rebiger nad^ Derf)altm^e ber 3eit bie fie baju anroenben 511 unterftii^en, bod^ nid^t iiber bag, raag fiir bie reifenbe ^rebiger »eftgefe|t ift. ©ci^fter 9lifi|ttitt. peife Prebiger auf|uueljmen, unb i^tcm 9lmt unb ^flirfitcn i5r. 2Bie foC ein ^rebiger aufgenommen roerben, burd^ bie jal^rUd^e ©onferenj ? 1. ^n ber jroifd^en 3^^^ ^on ber ©onferenj, burd^ ben Sifd^of, ober ben Sluffid^tSdlteften beg SejirfS, ober eineg 2lelteften, ber ben ^la^ eineg 2luffid^tgalteften, certritt auf einer jal^rlic^en ober gro^en 3>erfantmlung, big jur nad^ften ©i^ung ber (Sonferenj ; leiner rairb anberg alg auf ^robe angenommen, einer ber auf ^robe angenommen ift, mag be^bel^alten ober abgeroiefen roerben, o|ne ha^ i^m einigeg Unred^t gefdEie^en roiirbe, fonft roare eg feine ^robe. 2. ©ine jebe ^erfon bie alg ?Prebiger corgefc^Iagen rairb, foil t)on ber ©onferenj unterfudEit unb i^m folgenbe ^"i^age oorgelegt raerben : |5r. §at er ®ott in S^rifto alg einen oergebenben ®ott eriannt ? §at er SSergebung feiner ©iinben erlangt ? 3ft bie Siebe ©otteg burd^ ben f)eiligen ©eift, in bein ^erj auggegoffen rcorben ? ^at er ben j5i^ieben ©otteg erlangt ? 38 ^aget er ber ^eiligung nad^ ? §at er eine rid^tige ©rfenntni^, Don ©lauben, con 33ufe, oou 3led^t: fertigung, ^eiligung imb ©riofung ? 3. Siegt i^m fein eigen ^eil, unb ba§ §eil beineS 9ie5enmenycl^en me^r om §erjen, alg fonft alle§ anbere in ber SGSelt ? 5?ann er fid^ bem 3iatl^ feiner Sriiber unterraerfen ? 2BiU er ger^orfam ferin, ju reben ober fc^ioeigen, tote e§ bie SBriiber fiir gut eriennen ? 3ft er xoxUxQ, jo oiel aB in feinem 3Serinbgen ftef)t, ben reifenben ^lan (ober ben Sejirf ?u bereifen) l^elfen aufredit ju t)alten unb i^m fo oiel voie mbglid) unterftii^en ? 4. 23a§ ift bie ^flic^t eineg ^rebiger^ ? 3(ntn). G^riftum ben ®e!reu§igten ju prebigen, too fid^ nur 3"'&orer einfinben; ©laffen SBerfammlungen aufrid^ten, luo e§ nii^lid) ift, mit i^nen Don il^rem ©eelen:3»ftflnbe ju reben, bie angefodE)tenen fuc^en jured^t ju lueifen, bie 2;rdgen iud)en aufjumuntern, unb alle im @Iauben in ber ©nabe unb ©rfanntnife 3ef» S^rifti furfien ju erbauen, fo Diel rcie moglirf) ; nie unterlaffen bie Hranfen ju befud^en, unb mit feinem Seben unb 2Banbel futfieii feine SBorte ju belraftigen loag er prebiget. 5. JCeld^e 2lniDeifungen uierben einem ''^rebiger gegeben ? 2lntnj. ®r feg fleifig, nie Derliere er feine geit an unnotl^igen Singen, an einigem Drt, immer fet) er ernftfiaft, fein SDenlfprucf) fet) bem §errn ge= ^eiliget, er meibe alien Seid^tfinn, unb ©tfjerjen, er rebe befd)eiben, unb ^abe bel^utfamen Umgang mit bem roeiblid^en ®efrf)Ied^te, unb betrage ftd^ alg ein loatirer 6 thrift. 6. 6r fei; immer abgeneigt Sefd^ulbigungen }U glauben, e§ fei; benn ()in(dngUc^ erraiefen er lege aUeg fo oiel e6 mit ber 2Cal^rl^eit beftef)cn mag jum be ft en au§. (Sr rebe Don ntemanb nidE)tg Uebelg, ma^ er \e Don einem ben!en mag, befjalte er foIdE)t^ bey ftdE) fclbft, bi§ er e5 bemjenigen felbft, bem e5 ange^t, fagen fann. 7. ©ein ©efdjcift fei;, ©eelen ?u retten fo Dtel rate mbglid^ ; ju biefem ©efd^afte gebe er fid^ auf. 6r befuc^e bie eg bebiirftig finb ; in alien Singen l^anbele er nid)t nacf) feinem eigenen QJutbenfen, fonbern alg ein ©ol^n be§ (Soangeliumg, alS ein foIrf)er ftef)t eg if)m ju feme ^ext, fo rcie biefe SBor^ fd^rift lautet : mit ^rebigen, ntit ^augbefud^en, mit I'ebren unb 23eten, unb 58etrad^tung be§ SCBorteg ©otteg jujubringen, bamit gel)e er um biS ber foerr fommt. ©icbcttter ?llifr^nitt. Sittcnlofen J^etragcn ber PreMger, n»ie wit i^ttcn fatt Herfa^ren toerkn. j5^r. 2Cag foil get^an rcerben, raenn oon einent Sifd^of, ober 2luffid^t§s alteften, ober ^rebiger, bie 3la6)vi6)t einfommt, alg f)abe er fid^ eine§ 3Ser; brec^en^ fcf)ulbig gemac^t, bag im SBorte ©otteg, alg eine au§jcf)liefeenbe §anblung geboten fet) ? SlntiD. 3Benn ein 33ifc|of raegen ©ittenlofen Setragen feefd^ulbigt roirb, rate foil ntit il^m oerfa^ren rcerben ? aSo fic^ Sefc{)ulbigung ereignen foEte, bie bem ©Dangeltum tiad^tljetlig raare, fo foQ e§ einem 2tuffid)tgalteften unb einent 2lelteften befannt gentad^t raerben, bie foUen eg unterfud^en, oB ^tna^ an ber ©acf)e fer) ; fie foUen aber !eine ^lage aufier jroet) ober bret) 3eugen anne^men, al§ roie ber 2lpofteI fagt: fd^eint eg nun, bafi er ntit red^t be: fd^ulbigt rcirb, fo follen fie eg ftfiriftlid^ nel^men, unb bem 33ifdE)of eine Stbfd^rift baoon ftf)idfen, unb eine 3eit beftimnten rco fie jufammen !ommen, rao bie ^lager unb ber Sifd^of gegenroartig fet)n follen, unb foH burd^ bie jroe^ 2luffid)tgalteften unb brei; 3lelteften unterfud^t raerben ; rairb er fd^ulbig gefunben, fo foE er fc^roeigen bi§ ?ur jal^rlirfien (Eonferenj; ba follen bie 21uffid)tgalteften unb Slelteften eg nod^ ein SJla^I unterfud^en, roirb er fd^ulbig gefunben fo foil er uom 2ltnt fugpenbirt raerben. gr. 2. SBenn ein 2luffid^tgaltefter raegen ©ittenlofen Setrogen be= fd^ulbigt roiirbe, roag foE geti^an raerben ? 2(ntra. aSo fid^ Sefd^ulbigungen ereignen foEten bie bem (Snangelium nad^tt)eilig toaren, fo foE eg ber natfifte 2lettefte unb ein ^rebiger unters fud^en; jeigt eg fid^ nun alg oB er fd^ulbig raare, fo foEen fie eg fc^riftlid^ nel^men, unb bem 2luffid^tgalteften eine 2lbfrf)rift baoon fd^iden, unb eine 3eit beftimmen, rao fie foEen jufammen !ommen, rao bie ^lager unb ber 2luffid)tgaltefte gegenraarttg fetm ; in 2lbraefenl^eit beg Sifd^ofg, foE ein anbes rer Sluffid^tgaltefter unb jraet) 2lelteften gerufen raerben, bie foEen eg mit unterfud^en; rairb er fc^ulbig gefunben, fo foE er fd^raeigen Big jur ©on* fereni, ba foE er neranttoortlid^ fe^n. 39 40 %t. 3. SQSenn ein 2leltefter ober ^rebiger ober (Snna^ner foHte he- fd^ulbigt roerben, toegen Sittenlofen 33etragen, roag foU get^an rcerben ? Slntro. Xex ^rebiger in ber ©egenb bent e^ befannt rairb, foU nod^ einen ^rebiger ober ©rmal^ner ober einen Siorganger mit fid^ ne^men, unb eg unterfud^en ; jollte eg fd^einen ba^ er fd^xitbig roare, jo foil i^m 5Jiac^rid^t baoon gegeben roerben, unb etne ^eit beftiinmt roerben, roo fie, bie ^lager unb ber Sefc^ulbigte gegenroarttg fei;n; in 2t6roefenl^ett beg Sifrfjofg ober 2(uffid^tgalteften : foQen eg bret) Slelteften ober ^rebiger unterfuc^en, rotrb er fc^ulbig gefunben, fo foU er fd^roeigen big jur ©onferenj, roo er Derant= roortlid) foil fepn. mttv 5l6f(ftttitt. ^on Hen §liet)ern Susacmcin, (Sin jebeg ®tieb ber ©emeinbe foUte befennen, bafe eg bie 33ibel fiir ®otteg 2Bort l^alte ; baf[ eg fid) pon nun an uon §er^en beftreb', fein »etl m g^rifto Sefu ju fud^en, unb feine ©eelig!eit ju fd^affen mit gurd^t unb Bittern, urn ben jufitnftigen eroigen 3oi^n |u entfliel^en. ©in jebeg ®lieb foil fid^ beftreben einen genauen gottfeligen SQBanbet ju fiif)ren; flei^ig fepn im ®ebet, befonberg im 93erborgenen ; unb roo moglid) alien SSerfammlungen bepjuroo^nen, bepbeg bffentlid^en ©ottegbienft unb 33etftunben, ju feiner ©rbauung. §dupter in g'^'^ili^'^ follten eg nie oerfaumen beg SDJorgeng unb 2lbenbg mit ben ^Ijrigen ju beten, unb benfelben ein guteg ©Eempel fe^en, in alien titjriftlid^en ^lugenben, (Sin jebeg foil fid^ beftreben, genau alg in ber (Segenroart ©otteg ju roanbeln ; fid^ bei) feinen (55efrf)aften an einen genauen Umgang mit (Sott geroblinen; nie Uebel oon feinem 9Jebenmenfc^en reben; Siebe iiben gegen greunD unb 'geinb, bem 2lrmen guteg ju t^un, unb fud^en in ber Xfjai ein SfJacfifolger 3efu (S^rifti ju feyn. (Sin jebeg ©lieb foil ben Sabat^ l^alten, fo roie eg @otteg 2Bort erforbert : nid)tg }n faufen nod) ?u nertaufen, fonbern foil benfelben in 2lnbac^t mit lefen unb f)bren beg aBortg (5}otteg, mit fingen geiftreid^er Sieber jur (Si^re imb iiob (55otteg ju bringen. 41 @itt iebe§ ©Iteb in biefer ©emeinfd^aft follte ciertelia^rlid^ ou§ fret)em aCBillen fo oiel fiegtragen, roo e§ feine Um[tanbe erlauben, urn bie reifenbe ^rebiger ju unterf^alteix, eg t[t einem jeben ©liebe feme ^fltd^t, em fribticf)e§ ftifleS unb gott= feligeS Seben ju fu^ren, iiii Umgang mit aUen 9J}enfd)en, rate eg einem 6I)riften gejiemt, im g-rteben ^u leben; abyonberlid^ foil jebeS ber D5rtg!eit untertfjan \ex)n, fo raie ©otteg SBort eg forbert. Set) folcf)en ©Uebern ber ©enieinbe, follen bie 5|]r. eine ober me^rere 6laffen=3}erfammlungen errid^ten, mo eg bie DJJe^v^eit ber ©Ueber fiir nii^tid^ [}aUen; bafetbft foHen fid^ bie ©liebev, roo eg fer)n fann, einmal in jeber aBod)e cerfammeln, an bem ba?u beftimmten Drt, urn Setftunben ntit ein^ aiiber ju l^altcn, um fid^ ju erbauen in ber ©egenroart ©otteg unb in Siebe ju guten SBerlen in Sfjrifto ^efu. ^n jeber ©laffe foEten S5organger in ©egenroart beg ^rebigerg geroal^It roerben, beren ^sflid^t foil fexjn, bie Setftunben befteHen, anjufangen, unb ju befd^Iieffen, aud^ ju 3^'^^" 6Iaffen=Unterrebungen ju f^alten, ein jebeS ©lieb ju enna[)nen unb in Siebe erl^alten, unb auf fid) felbft fel^en. SBenn ©Ueber fid^ an einanber oerfiinbigen alg 33riiber ober ©d^roeftem, fo ftrafe eg juerft ^roifd^en Sir unb S^H" allein, l^oret er bid§ fo l^aft bu il^n geroonn n, l^oret er bid^ nid^t, fo nimm no(^ einen ober jiue^ ju bir, auf ba^ alle Sadfie beftel^e aug 5roet)er ober breijer ^eugenmunbe ; l^oret er bie nidjt, fo fage eg ber ©emeinbe, pret er bie ©emeinbe nid^t, fo [)a[te i^n alg einen §eiben unb 3oHner. SSenn fid^ ©treitigfeiten ereignen follten, jroifd^en jroei; ober mel^rern ©liebern ber ©emeinbe, con roegen ©d£)ulben ober irgenb einer anbern Urfadf)e, unb bie ftreitenben ^art^eien ju !einem SSertrag fommen !onnen, fo foil ber ?Prebiger roeld^er bie 2luffid^t iiber bie ©emeinbe l^at, ober ber ^rebiger ber in ber ©egenb rool^nt, bie ©ad^e unterfud^en, unb ben ©treiten-- ben eine 3leferenj anempfel^ten ; biefelbe foil aug bret) ©lieber ber ©emeinbe beftel)en, roooon ber illager einen, ber Seftagte ben anbern, unb biefe jroei) ben britten erroaf)len follen, biefe brei) follen bann bie 3toiftiS?eiie« fd^lid^ten. 3m %a\i aber eine ber ftreitenten ^erfonen mit biefem 2lugfprud; unjufrieben fet)n follte, fo mag fie fid^ an bie nad^fte Dierteljcit^rlid^e ober gro^e 33er= fammlung roenben eg bem Sluffid^tgalteften ober Slelteften befannt madden, um eine jroegte j^J^iebengfd^lid^tung an^alten, unb roenn bie ^rebiger l^in= langlid^ Urfad^ baju finben, fo follen [xe eine jroegte ^riebengfd^lid^tung er= tl^eilen ; in roeld^em %a\l eine jebe ber ^artf;ei)en jroei) ©Ueber au§ ber ©e; meinbe, unb biefe t)iere, ben fiinften erroci^len follen ; biefe follen ben 2lu§= 18 42 fprud^ ber 3roifti9f"t gSnjli^ entfc^eiben ; foQte oBer eine ber ?Perfonen mtt biefem JHusfprurf) boc^ nicf)t bamit jufrieben fei;n, fo fd)Ue^t er fid^ bamit au^ ; unb roenn ein ©Ueb ber Qiemeinbe fid) raeigern foUte, raegen ©c^ulben ober onbern SnJiftisfe't^"' ^^^ ©ac^e fd^lid^ten ju lafjen, nad^bem eg if)m Don einem ^rebiger ober 3>orgdnger, roeld^e bie 2luf[tcf)t i)aben, anempfo^Ien jDorben, ober ein ©lieb von ber ©emeinbe Dor @erid)t jie^en foCte, e^e bie t)orf)ergef)enbe 3Waaferegeln genommen roorben, jo foil baffelBe oon biefer ©emeinbe au^gefcfiloffen feijn, eg fet) benn, bag ©treitigfeiten oon ber 2ltt iDoren, ba^ fie eine gerid^ttid^e (Sntfd^eibung erforbern unb red^tfertige, als : (Sjecutoten ober 2lbminiftratoren. ^n ^tt 9. iausbcfudjcn unti ber (^infdjarfmtg tints tptigen e^^tiftcttt^umg ! ! ! %t. 3Bte lonnen wir benen bie fief) unferer Dbforge anoertrauen ferner bel^iilflid^ f ei)n ? 2lntn). Snbem luir i^nen Unterrirf)t ertf;eilen, in if^ren §aufern, roeld^eg fel^r niJtljig ift, urn bag a>ertrauen unb bie ©emeinfd^aft mit ©ott ju fees forbern: ferner fid) in ber aSeltliebe ah, an einen f)immltfd^en 3Eanbel gercb^nen ; fidl) l^erjtid)er S3ruber=iiiebe befleifien, auf ba^ fein argeg S)enfen unb 9tid)ten eineg gegen ben anbern fet)n mag, unb t^un rote roir roiinfc^en get^an ?u l^aben. 2ten§, Seber ^rebiger tnu§ e§ fi^ ju feiner ^flid^t madden bie Seute in i^ren iTjaufern befud^en, fte erma^nen in atleui ©uten gefd)idt ju fei)m big bieft getfjan roirb, unb jiuar wit (Srnft unb (Sifer, fo roerben roir im ganjen roenig gebeffert roevben, unb unfere ©ottfeligleit roirb nid^t tief genug gegriinbet; folglic^ roo roir aud^ fei^n mbc^en foil fein unnii^eg ©efd^roa^ Qug bent Slunbe ge^en. 43 Dl^ne 3n>eifel ftni) ^iefe uricf)ti'n, unb fo Diet in bir ift — bid; bev ,v>eerbe Gfjrifti }n einein DJhifter bcS 6f)vti"tlid)en iiebei^ Dorjuftcllcn ? 3lntra. 3^^ wilt, ioo;u mix ©ott uerfjetfen luotle ! ^r. SBittft bu benen wetdjen etraa bie Ue6erfid^t iitjev bid) anuertraut loerben mng niit Gf)rertitetung gefiorjamen, unb itjren guten Srniaf}nungen niit eiueni luiltigen unb fi-ieblid)en §erjen nadjfonmten ? 2lntn). 3d; luill mid; burc^ ©nabe bal^m fieftreben ! 9hin tegen bie 23ifd)i3ffe (ober 58ifc^of unb ein 2leltefter) einem jjeben befonbers it)re Jodube auf bag S^aupt ; uno ber SBifd^of fpred;e alfo : — „9Iintnt anniit [)in, bie SSotlniad^t bag 2tmt eineg ®oangetifd)en ^rebi: gerg in ber ©emeinbe ©otteg ju uertretten. ^m Diamen ©otteg beg 2?ateig, beg ©of)neg, unb beg ^eitigen ©eifteg. 2ltgbann gebe ber Sifd^of einem jeben befonberg bag ^ibetbuc^ iiber: fpred^enb : 9Jintm anmit l)in bie SBottmod^t bag Sffiort ©otteg ber ©emeinbe Gfjrifti ju prebigen unb augjutegen. — ^rt nut) Peifc eincn ?5ifdjof |u orMuircn, dlad) bent ©ebet mag bag 20fte (Sap. uon bem 17ten Serg an in ber 2lpoftet ©efc^id^te getefen iDerben. 3((gbann fpred^e ber 58ifd)of ju bem ber orbiuirt luerben folt. „5yrubcr, bieioeil bie fjcitige ©d)rift befieblt, bi§ loir niemanb jueilig bie pube auftegen, unb jnr 3legierung ber ©emeinbe Gf^rifti annet^men, fo bcant;uorte folgenbe {yragcn" : 45 %v. 3ft e§ beine Ueberjeugung bafi in ber gottUdien ©d)rift alle§ ju imferer ©eltgfeit burc^ ©^rifto ent^atten tft, unb 6ift bu entf^Ioffen baS SSotf baraug ju unterricf)ten ? Slntra. 3a. ^t. 2Bia[t bu ^flid^tma^ig in orbiniren, §anbe auflegen unb SluSfens bung anbcrer getreu l^anbeln ? 2lntro. 3a! 2n§bann lege ber $8ifd^of unb ein ober ivoet) Slelteften il^re §onbe auf bie erioai^Ite ^erfon !nienb vox i§nen, ber Sifd)of fage bonn : „@mpfange bie ®nabe @otte§ jum Sl-nt unb Stenft eineS Sifd^ofg in ber ©emeinbe GJotteg ba§ bir nun burd^ 3luflegung unferer §anbe iiberge: ben roirb, im Siamen beg 3Sater§, beg ©of)neg, unb beg l^eitigen ®ei[teg Slmen." 2lBbann iibergebe ber 93i[d^of bie Si6el fprec^enb : Seflei^ge bid) beg Sefeng, Sefjre unb ®rmaf)nen, bebenfc bie Singe rool^I bie in biefem 33uc^ ent^alten finb ; jeg ein §irte ber §eerbe 3eju (Ef)rifti, roeibe fie, fomm ben ©d^road^en ju JQiilfe, fud^e bag 3SerIorne, fei) mitleib g auf ba^ raenn ber o6erfte §irte ber ©d^aafe erfd^einen roirb, bu bie un»ei-= roelltid^e ©rone beg eroigen Sebeng empfangen mogeft 21 m e n. S^nretic an Jlcunerlolite. aSiel ©eliebte! 2Cir finb ^ier »or bent 3lngefirf)t @otteg, unb in ©egenroart biefer Bei'Sen uerfammlet, biefe 6et)be ^erfonen, alg Wtann unb 2Bei6 e^elid^ jufammen ju geben : 3. 2:a6er! aCiUft bu biefe 2Bei5g=^erfon fiir bein ©l^eroeib annel^men, um in bem (S^eftanb bein 8e6en mit ^l)x nad^ ©otteg Drbnung jujubringen ? roillft bu 3 ^ 1^ £ie5e, S^roft unb Sf^re erjeigen, ©ie in ilranfl^eit unb ©es funbfjeit l^alten unb pflegen unb mit 33erlaffung afier anbern, bid^ ju il^r aHein l^alten, unb'ba^ fo lange bir ©ott bag 2e6en fd^enten mag? raann ba^ bein (Sntfdglu^ ift, fo antroorte, 3a ! (Sann roenbe fidE) ber ^rebiger jum 2Ceib.) 46 33. ©at^ar! SBiUft bu biefe 2Kann§=^erfon filr beinen (S^emanti annel^men, um in bent ©l^eftaub bein Se&en nut t[;m nac^ (Sotted Drbmmg jumbringen ? roiEfi bu ifim ©e^orfam, 3)tenftioiIlig!ett, Siebe unb Sf)re erjeigen, in (Se; funbfjeit unb ^ran!()eit feiner pfl^gen, unb mit S>erlaffung aller anbern, bid^ ju ifjm atlein l^alten, fo lang bir ©ott bag 2eben fd^enlen mag : roann ba§ bein (Sntfd^luf; i[t, fo antroorte, ^a ! „3teid}t einanber bic red^te §anb." ^e^t fa^t ber '^rebiger i[)re bepbe §anbe jufammen, unb fpred^e: tDa§ ®ott jufammen gefiigt f)at, fott ber 3Ken[d) nicfit fc^eiben ; alfo ertlare id^ (gu^ al^ 3Wann unb 3Seib; tin 3lamen ©otte^ beg Sl5ater§, beg ©u^neg, unb beg §eiligen ©eifteg. ©ott bee Skater ©ol^n unb Seilger ©eift, ber fegne er^olte unb be; roal^re (S u c^ in b.'m <0errn, er fet)e mit ©rbaruten auf ® u d), unb erfiille 6 u (f) mit feinen ®eiftUcf)en &abm unb ©nabe, ba^ 3 ^ i^ f o &»-'9 einanber leben moget in biefer 2Belt, ba^ ^ 1^ r in bem 3"fii"fti3en i>a^ ewiqe 2ebm l^aben moget, 2t m e n. S c 5 r c unb 3tt^t--£)rlinttng bey ^eteiiitgteti aStit^et in ®^ttftp* ^eiicutkt bei) (Sruber unD Pag. 47 1819. Itrfprung b er Sercittigten Sriikr in (JJrifto. Sn bem le^t oerftojjenen ^"^'^^"ni'ei^t, ^at e^ bent §etrn unfecm ®ott gefallen, in werfd^iebeneit ©egenben ber SBelt aJJiinner ju erroetfen, bie bent tierfaUenen (S[}rifteittf)unt raieccr auf()e[fett, unb bie Se^re Dont Greuj itt il^rer Sauter!eit uerfiinbigen foKten. Sr gebac^te babet; and) ber S)eutfci^en in Sltnerifa, ttjeld^e l^in unb roieber in biefem roeit auSgebreiteten Sanbe lebten, unb ba^er itur felten ©elegenl^eit [patten, ba§ ©oangelium tjont (Freuj, in ii^rer SJJutterfprad^e, ?u i^rer ©r* bauung cerfunbigen ju pren. Unter anbern erioedte er and) einen Dtterbein, einen SoJ^ni, unb etiten ©iitf^ing, riiftete fie au§ mit ©eift, ©uabe unb i^raft, in feinem jo fel^r oernac^Iaffigt.n SBeinberge ju arbeiten unb audE) unter ben Seutfd^en in 2tnterifa, ©iinber jur Sufie ju rufen. S)ie[e 3JJaitner folgten bem dlu\ i^reg §errn unb 9J?eifterS, arbeiteten im ©egen, erridE)teten l^in unb icieber l^errlid^e ©enteinben, unb fiUjrten 6^ri[to mand^e eble ©eele ju. 9?aci^ unb wad) errceiterte fid) i^r 9Birfungg!ret§, ba§ fie baberi genot^iget raaren fid^ urn 3)Jitarbetter im SBeinberge umjufe^eit; benn bie ©rnbte roar gro§ unb ber 2lrbeiter nur roenige. ©ott erroectte anbere, bie aud^ tcilUg iDurben ti^re Krafte be.n ^errn ju roibmen ; foldie rourben bann won einem ober bem anbern a[§ ajiitarbeiter angenomnten. 2;ie Slnjal^I ber ®emeinbs=®tieber in ben oerfd^iebenen ©egenben roud§§ won 3sit 511 B^it/ wnb ba§ SBer! cerbreitete fic^ in ben ©taaten t)on ^eitn= ftjioanien, aJJarglanb unb SSirginien. ®^ lourben jaJ^rlid) einige grofie SSec^ fammlungen ge^aiten; beij roelc^en ©elegeufjeiten ftd^ Dtterbein mit ben bafelbft gegenroartigen ^rebigern unterrebete, i^nen bie 3Bicf)tigfeit be§ ^re= bigt=2lmt§ worfteQte, unb bie 9lotl^tt)enbig!eit aEen Srnft anjuroenben, urn (Seelen ^u retten, einfd^arfte. Set) einer biefer Unterrebungen, rourbe 6es fd^Ioffen ba^ aUe ^rebiger eine 3iif''i""^enf^i"tt ^ilten foEten, urn fid^ §u berat^frf)Iagen, roie fie am nii^lirf)ften feijn fonnten. 49 50 SHe erftc 3ufa»n"tcnlunft rourbe gel^alten in Baltimore, im Sol^re 1789. ©§ xmxen jugegen : SBill^elm Dtterbetn, 2lbam 2ef)mann, afiartiu $5b[)m, ^oi^anne^ Grnft, ©eorge 2lbam cyittijiiig, Jjeinrid^ SBeibener. (S^riftian SReufommec, 2)ie jroegte 3"ffl'^'"6"f""tt raurbe ge^alten in ^orl ©ouniij, ^arabie^ 2'oronfd^ip, im §aiife beg 58ruber Spangler^, im ^af)t 1791, aOtvo folgenbe ^erfoneu gegenioiirtig roaren, nemlid} : SOBil^elm Dtterbein, So^tt""^^ ©rnft, Tlattin Sofjnt, 3. ®. ^Pfrimmer, ©eorge 2tbam ©iit^iug, ^ofjanneg 9Jeibig, ©^riftian 9ceufommer, $8enebict ©anber, 2lbam ilel^mann, unb 3]ad) retfer Ueberlegung toie fie mit bem gro^ten 9iu^eu in bem 3Sein> 5erge beg §errn art)eiten fonnten, rcurben luieber focf)e alg 5Kitarbeiter aw- genommeu, Bon raelc^en fie Urfac^e ju glauben l^atten, ba^ fie wal^reS ©^riftentl^um an il^rem eigenen §erjen erfal^ren l^atten. ^nbeffen rermel^rte fid^ bie Stnjal^l ber ©lieber immer mel^r unb mel^r ; bie ^prebiger fallen fid) ba^er Derpflid^tet alle ^afjr eine 3uffli"men!tunft ober (Sonferenj ?u beftimmen, itm fid^ nailer ju oereinigen unb recfit nii^lic^ ju einem gemeinfd^aftUcf)en ^med ju arbeiten ; benn einige roaren 3ieformirte, anbere Sutfieraner, aubere 3)?enoniften, unb nodE) anbere 3[)?etf)obiften. 6te beftimmten ba[}er ben 25ften (September, 1800, in ^ri^berid^ Sounti), Tlau)- lanb, im ^aufe bes 33ruberg g'J^ieberid^ 5^emp, jufammen ju lommen. %oh genbe roaren gegenroiirtig : 2BiI^eIm Dtterbein, ©l^riftian Jl'rum, SOJartin So^m, §einrid^ ifrum, ©eorge 2lbam ©iit^ing, ^o^anneg ^errfd^c, G^riftian 9Ieu!ommer, ^acob ©eifinger, 2(bam £e{)mann, £»einric^ 58o{)m, 2lbra^am 3)radtfel, 2)ietrid^ 2lurauf, ©eorge ^frimmer, ©ie Dereinigten fidE) bafelbft in eine ©efettfd^aft, bie ben Seamen fiil^rt : „2)ie SSereinigten Sritber in (Sfjrifto" ; unb eriud^Iten 3Cil^elm Dtterbein unb Wartin W6i)m ju Dberauffet^ern ober 23tfd^ofen, unb rcurben einig einem jeben bie gr^i^O'^it ju erlauben auf bie 2lrt unb SDBeife ju taufen, roie et eg nad^ feiner Ueberjeugung fiir redE)t befanbe. 51 SSon mm an oerbreitete fid| bte ®emetnbe iiumer tne^r unb itiefjr e6 rourben ^vebiger aufi;enommen, bie beftattbtg reifeten (benn bie oieten ^re: bigtplci^e lonnten auf feine anbere SSeife fiebtent roerben) ; unb bag 2Bert oerbreitete ftc§ in ben ©taaten Df)io unb ^entudi). ©g rcurbe baf)er notl^ig eine Gonferenj im ©taat Dl^io |U l^alten, inbem e§ ju Befd^roerlicf) gead^tet raurbe, fiir bie bortigen ^rebiger jjal^rUcI^ fo raeit ju ber (Sonferenj ju reifen. ^nbeffen [tarben bie 35ruber S3o^m unb ©titling, unb Sruber Dtterbein fiege^rte, bafi ein anberer jum 58ifcl^of joHte erroiifilt raerben (ineit er felbft, SUterg unb ©c^iodd^e l^alben, nid)t mef)r nad)i'e^en !onnte), ber bag SBerf iibevnal^me, bamit 3"*^^ unb Drbnung erf)alten roiirbe; benn e§ roar 6et) einer ber Sonferenjen fiefd^Ioffen roorben, roenn einer Don ben S3if(jE)ofen fter&en fotlte, einen anbern an feine SteUe ju erroa^Ien. 65 rourbe alio ber $8ruber ©f^riftian 3?eufommer ali 33i[d^of errcal^lt, weld)er bie 3Uiffid^t iiber bie ©emeinbe iiber fid^ ne^men foKte. ©d^on lange rourbe ber 2)?angel einer 3"^to.rbnung in ber ©emeinbe tief empfunben; e§ roar fcfion inef;rmat etroag baran getl^an roorben ; enblid^ rourbe auf ber (Sonferenj im ©taat D^io fiefc^Ioffen, iia^ eine §aupt= ober ©enerat Sonferen? ge^alten roerben foUte, bie e§ iiber fiti) netjinen foHte, bie ^itd^torbnung in etroag DoHftanbiger ju ntad^en, fo roie fie bem 9Borte ©otteg gemdg fet). 2)ie ©lieber ju biefer (Sonferen? foUten an^ ben ^rebigern, in ben unterfd^ieblid^en ©egenben, bur(^ bie ©lieber ber ©emeinbe gerodf^lt roerben, burd^ bie 2)Je[)r^eit ber ©timmen ; unb e§ roaren bie folgenben ^rebiger, bie geprig ecrodt)It roaren, gegenroartig auf ber Sonferenj, nemlidE) : €^riftian Jieufontmer, 2(6ra^ant £>ieftanb, 3(nbreag QeUev, Saniel S^reper, ©eorge 33enebum, Slbraf^am Xrad'fel, G^riftian Merger, 2l5raf}ant dJlexjev, ^ol^anneS ©d^neiber, §einrid^ Sumter, ^einric^ ©pdt^, ^faa! 9Jeufd^roanber, ©^riftian i?rum unb ^alofi Saulug. Siefe uerfammetten fief) atn 6ten ^""9/ 1815/ ^la^e 6ei) 9J}ount='ip[eafant, in 3Beftmorelanb Gounti), ^^eiinji)tuamen, roo fie nad^ reifer Ueberlegung, bie folgenbe Sef^re unb Siegetn fiir gut unb nii^lirf) befanben, fie ber ©e^ meinbe in Sie5e unb 3)enmt^ ju iibergeben mit bem l^erjUc^en 3Bunfc|, "aa^ biefe Sel^re unb foIdEie Stegein, nebft bem aSorte ©otteg mod^ten beobacfitet roerben. S)enn ©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb roo !eine Drbnung unb ^irdEienjuc^t ift, ba certie^rt fid^ alle 2\ebe unb ©emeinfd^aft ; bather k^t ung bem 3?atl^ be§ Sterrn fodjen, ber un^ le^rt, bag roir burd^ 2)emutl^ einer ben anbern [jbf)er aditen alg ung felbft, fud^en gefinnt ju ferm roie ^efug ®l^riftug aud^ roar, ber ^nec^tg=©eftalt angenommen, roarb gel^orfam big jum SEobe am 5?reu?, urn ung bie ©nabe unb ilYaft ^u erroerben, ba§ roir ung aug 52 2\ehe unb 3)eniut§ eiuer bem anbecn uiUerwerfen fbnnku; itier fid^ tiic^t iinteriDerfen lonn, bem mangelt noc^ iJnabe, Sie&« unb Seinutl^ ; ba^er fagt SefuS : 3Ber unter eud^ ber ©rbpte fei;n wiK, ber foH beg anbern Wiener fet)n; foil etner beS anbern Siener feyn, jo Hiftfjen wir eiHonber Iie5en. 3efu§ fagt : alfo loirb jebermann erfennen, brt^ i^r metne recite ^iinger fei)b, fo iE)r Siebe untereinanber 'ijait, unb reer m^t Siebe l^at ber bleibt int 2;ob. ©0 kffet un§ Siebe iiben, auf b«| wk bie i^crrlic^feit beft^en mogen, bie ^efuS jeinen ^""S^i^tt ^o" feinem S8«tec erb»tert l^ot, ba| roir em§ fet)n modfitert, roie er unb ber SSater ein^ ftnb. ;jarum tf)r lieben Sriiber, lafjet unS ^u6)en gleidigefinnet, einl^ellig unb etntriiditig ju \e\)n, imb !eing Uebel oon bem anbern reben ober benfen, fsnbern ben §erru onfle^en, ba§ er ung feinen ®ei[t unb ©rnft geben Mibi^k, \¥m bag 6f)riften= t[)um rec^t jur 6"f)re feineg l^eUigen ?Jameng m fii^w, unb ju unferem eigenen eroigen 3Bo()l. 2tmen. (^rjtcr m^^nitt €>laubcn5=Pekcmitutfj ber SScrcittlgtcn Sriibcr in S^rifta. ^m 9lamen ®otte§ erflaren unb befennen loir uor iebcvmann, ba^ luir glauben an ben einigen roafjren ®ott, 3Sater, ©ofm unb §eiligen ©eift, bafe biefe 2)rer) (Sing ftnb, ber Sater int Sor}n, ber orgdngci' nnterfdirieben tcerbcn. S)er 2lnffici^t5ttltL')"te im 33ejirf foK e^ nnterind}en, imb foUten jioei) von iijmn eine gleid^e Slnja^l Stimmen Ijaben, fo foil er burets 2oo5 entfd^eiben, voeU d^er Don ifjncn erindfjlt ift. i^-v. SCie oft foil bie .^anpt:Gonferenj ge^alten roetben ? 3lntn). 2tIIe cier ^ai}xe. %x. §at bie §aupt:Gonferenj eine anbere ©eioalt, bie bie ^fil^rlicl^e nicljt f;at? 2lntit). ^a, fie t)at allein bie ©emalt pnev) 33ifc]^ijfe aui ben 3leUeften, anf uier Sa[)ve ju ma[;len ; nnb and) bie 3i«i)torbnung ober 3iVgeIn ^u Der= dnbern ober p oerbeffern, nad)bem fie eo fiir gnt bcfinbet; unter ber Se= btngung unb 3Ui5na^me, ba^ fein 3lrtitet gemad;t luerbe, ber ben 31eife= ^lan auffiebt ober megtfint. 3)ie ^anpt-Gonfcrenj foil and) bie 2)iftri{te Ibeftimmen, ido bie jaf^rlid^en (Sonferenjen gefjniten rcerben follen. j^r. 2BeIdje§ finb bie Glieber ber idf}rlid)en Gonfereuj ? 9lntiD. 3l(le bie 3lelteftcn nnb 'ipvebiger, bie einen fd)rift(id;en (SrIanOs nifefdiein empfangen l^aben, nnb in bem 33ejirf won einer folc^en (Sonferen? finb, ober in foldjen aufgcuommcn mcrben. j^r. ''Mti) luelc^er SBeife nnb ilierorbnnng follen bie 35erl^anblungen oorgenommen loerben ? 2(ntiD. 1. (£g loirb ein (Sapitel aug ber 33it)el cerlefen, nnb fnrje 2tnmerhmgen bariiber gemad^t, al^bann iwirb gefungeu unb gebetet, unb bag fo oft alg bie Gonferenj fi^t ; unb mit ©efang unb &ebei feefc^Ioffen. 2. 3^ie (Sonferen; foil einen ®d)reiber enodt^len, unb foUte einer ber Siid)bfe abmejenb fei)n, and) einen ber 3(uffi(^tS:2leIteften, um mit bem 33ifd)of }n agicren. 3, 3Berben bie 'i^vebiger unterfud^t, mic ifjr 58etragen gegen t^ren 9ieben-- menfc^en fei) ; ob \i)v 31}anbel untnbel[)aft, ob fie fo uiel Qext rcie mbglid) anrocnben, nm bao ^)leic^ ©otteg auo^ubroitcn. 55 4. 3Ba§ fiir ^rebiger finb auf bie ^ro6e anjunel^men ? 5. 2Ba§ fiir ^rebtger miif jen ferner auf ber ^ro6e bleiben ? 6. ®inb einige ?u Slelteften ?u raafilen ? 7. ©tub \x>ot)l einige con ben ^rebiger geftorfien ? 8. SBelc^eg finb bie 3luffic^tg=3leaeften ? 9. 2Ber giebt fid^ nuf ju reifen ? 10. aBa§ ift gefammelt luorben, tf)eil§ jufatlige 2tu§go6en ju Beftreiten, unb tr^eilg ben reifenben ^rebig^rn if^ren ®ef;alt aufjuinacf)en ? 3[t 9ied)= nung mit il^nen ge^alten raorben ? §a£)en fie bag ifjrige befomnien ? 11. 2Bann unb rco foil bie ncicfifte Gonferenj gel^alten rcerben ? 12. ©inb bie 2leltefteu orbinirt raorben ? 13. 3" ii't^ jiii'* Sejirfe finb bie ^rebiger biefeg ^al^r angefteQt ? 14. 3ft iioc^ etioai ntef)r ?u t[)un ? 15. §at bie ©onferenj bie Siftrifte Beftimmt in if;rem Sejirf, unt bie 2Bal^[ fiir bie ©lieber ber ^aupt^Gonferen^ ju l^atten ? 16. 3ft flUeg rcag Derf;anbelt worben, in ia^ ^roto!oll iibertragen jDorben ? Srittcr 9Hfi^ttitt. Son Iicr iUJiljUmg unb (DrMuation ber iifdjofe unb boil i^rcm 91 mt uub ^fltt|t. %x. 2Bie foKen bie Sifd^ofe eingefe^t roerben ? 2lntn). ®ie §aupt=(Eonferenj foft fie raa^len, burd^ bie 3Wel^rl^eit ber ©timnten ber 2lelteften, bie ?u ber ^aupt^Sonferenj gercal^It finb ; aud^ ftel^t eg ber (Sonferenj frei;, fie, bie Sifd^ofe, noc^ auf oier '^al)ve beyjubef^alten. 2)ie ©eiDcifjIten ober 58ifd^ofe niitffen aber bie unterfc^ieblicf)en Sejirfe unb Sons ferenjen bereifen fonnen, fonft fonnen fie nid^t geradf^lt raerben ; bie fo ge= raa^Iten ?Perfonen follen Don einem 93ifc^of unb einem 2lelteften burd^ 2luf= legung i^rer §anbe orbinirt roerben ; foflte aber fein Sifd^of ba fetjn, fo foHen eg jraet) 21elteften tfjiin. 56 %x. 2Ba§ finb bie '':pflicf)ten ber 23ifc^ofe ? 2lntiD, 1. ^ei) unicrn ©onferenjeii al5 Siorfiftei- ju agiren. 2. ©ie f)aben mit etnem 2(elte[ten, ben fte auoiuiifilen, ben reifenben ?Pres btgern i^re Devid)iebene SBejirfe anjuraeifen, bod; nut ber ©infd^rnnhmg, ba^ feinem 3iet)e:'iprebiger geftattet raerbe, langer al5 brei; aufeinanber fol= genbe Saf)re an berfelben ©teEe ju oerbleiben, auogenommen befonbere llm= ftanbe marf)en e5 iiotf^iuenbig imb baiin nur mit 23eroi([igung ber Sif^ofe, 3. Sie Sijd^ofe jeigeu ben 2(uffid)tQ=3(elte[ten if^ren 33e5irt an, tfm fie ju bereifen f;aben. 4. ^n ber ^'J^ift^^^j^'t ^o" ^^'" (Sonferenjen l^aben fie mit ben Sluf^ fid^tg=3lelteften ©eiualt, bie reifenben ^rebiger ju Derroec^feln, ico fie eS fiir befjer anfe^en, and) ^^rebiger aufjunefjuten ober ju fuspenbiren big auf bie Smferenj. 5. ©ie f)aben bie cerf^iebenen Gonferenjen, fo roeit fie fid^ erftredcit, ju bereifen, unb [)aben im geiftlid)en, bie Dberauffid)t iibec alle ©ememben. 6. ^I^nen ftef;t e5 ju, bie Drbination 511 ooHjief^en. 7. SDBenn ein 33iid}of auff;ort bie iiorid)iebenen Gonferenjen in ber ®e= meinjd;aft 511 bebienen unb bie 23e5irie }n bereifen, !ann er bod§ fein bifd^of= lidieg 2lmt unter un§ ausiiben ? 3iein, eo jei; benn, ba§ er iranf nnire unb rcaS bergleidien Umftctnbe mef)r fet)n mod)ten. 8. SGBenn e§ fief) nttragen foUte, ba^ unfere ©emeinfdiaft ju einer 3eit !einen 33ifd^of fjdtte, meit fie enticeber geftorben ober fu^penbirt jociren, ober luie eg immer feijn mag ; roie foU 9iatl^ gefd)aft merben ? 2)er 9le(tefte, raeld^er in 2lbioe)en[;eit eineS SBifd&ofg geroaf)It roirb jam 9JJitagieren an ber Gonferenj, foil bie 33ii'cl^of'3=iSteIIe fo lang bebienen, alg bie ©onferenj loafjrt; biefcr fo geanifjlte 'Borfit^er foil au^ bie anbere Gonferem bebienen ; er foil feinen ©i^ mit bem bort geiuii^Iten iBorfi^er ne[)men, um mit ifim in ber Gonferenj }u agieren ; unb ber bort geioiitjlte 58orfi|er foil eben fo bie anbere Gonferen? aud^ bebienen, bamit eine jebe Gonferen? luei^, njie eg bei) ber anbern augfief)t ; imb bafs 2iebe unb ©emeinfdiaft erf)a[ten luerbe, u. f. m. bio inv Saupt^Gonferen^, bie raicber Sifdpfe uidfjtt. 9. Gg foil ber 33ifc^ofe ^sflid^t fei;n, ba^ eine fc^itflidje '^prebigt beijm ®d)ln§ jeber Gonferenj gcfjalten loirb. Alerter %b)^niU S^on iien J^uffidjts = Mitfttn, 260^1, 9lmt uttb *)Jfliit|te«. 5r. SBie follen bie 3tuffid^t^=3teae[ten enoa^It roerben ? 2lntn). Sie Sifd^ofe foHen ber Sonferen? einige con ben Slelteften, bie i^re ^robejeit au^ge^alten, oorfc^Iagen, unb mtt 3"''ti"i'«"»3 ''ft: ©on= ferenj auf nier ^a^re rcci^Ien. %v. SBag ftnb bie ^flic^teit be^ 2Iuffic^t§=5aelteften ? 2lntro. 1. S)en i^m oon ben Sifd^ofen angeraiefenen aSejir! ju 5ereifen, unb fo oft ju prebigen at'o er !ann. 2. ®r ^at bie Ueberfic^t in feineui Sejirf iiber bie reifenben unb fe^= l&aften ^rebiger, baft fie fid^ bem ©oangelium gemafi betragen, 3. (Sr foil bie oierteljal^rlid^e unb grofie 95erfammlung befteHen, unb too miDglid^ bebienen ; ba5 2tbenbmal^l ert[)eilen, unb Diertelia^rlid| ©onferenj l^alten nxil ben gegenrocirtigen ^rebigern, ©rma^nern unb ^Sorjangem; autf) unterfud)en oh bie reifenben unb feB^aften ^rebiger i^re ^flid^t tl^un, befonberg ob bie fe^fjaften ^rebiger loo mbglicf) alle ©onnttxg preiigen, unb roo inef}rere ftnb, biefelben ju 3eiten ju Derined^feln, roie am me^rften 5Ru^en gefd^afft roirb ; fie erma[)nen, ba§ fie 3"ci^t ""^ Drbnung unb Siebe unb ®rnft Bet) ben (Sentcinben erfialten, 4. (Sr !ann and) bie reifenben ^rebiger in feinem Sejirfe nerraed^feln ; er foK aber einen 93ifc^of mit ju 3tat^ jiefien ; er !ann and) ^rebiger aufne^^ men ober fuSpenbtren bi§ ouf bie ©onferenj. 5. ®r foil bem SSifc^of 3la(^x\d)t geben, raie eg in feinem aSejir! au^-- fiel^t, unb nad^fel^en, ba^ bie reifenben ^rebiger Diertelja^rig eine Kerpltnif;= maftge Unterftii^ung er^alten: inbem il^nen i^r ®eE)alt aug bem ©elb ba§ fie in i^rem Sejir! fammlen mogen gegeben roirb ; einem lebigen foE aber bod^ nid^t iiber ad^jig 2;^aler, unb einem oere^lid^ten nid^t iiber ein l^unbert 19 57 58 unb fed^jig %f)alev ertaubt feyn ; foUte aber es nic^t jureid^en, n)a§ in einem ober bent anbern Sejirf gefammelt toirb, fo foil e§ einer Somntittcc au§ ber Sonferenj iibergeben roerben, bie nad) ©utbefinben au3 ober oon anberen il^rem gefammelten ®elb bem 3}langetnben ?u t^un ; ido aber ein ^rebiger in einer ©tabt fte{)en joHte, ba mu^ bie ©exieinbe il^n uerforgen. 6. ©oHte e§ fid) f« jutragen, ba^ ju einer 3eit iexn Sifc^of ba racire, fo foflen bie 2luffidE)t3=2lelteften, ein jeber in feinetn Sftejirl, befonber^ auf bie Oemeinben Sld^t |aben, bamtt aHefi in Siebe mxb ^rnft erljalten raerbe, unb einer beni anbern tflad^rid^t gebe, rcie e§ in feinem Sejtrl au^fie^t. ©ollte eg fic^ aber jutragen, bafi fein Shiffid^t^attefter in 'Dem ob»r jenem 93ejirf rcare, raie foS 3tatl^ gefc^aft loerben ? 6^ foil bem Sifc^of 5la!l|rici^t barton gegeben raerben ; biefer foC einen Don ben 2lelteften im Sejirf baju be= ftimmen big jur (Sonferenj, roo eg ju tl^un ift; follte aber lein 58ifd^of ba fet)n, fo foH ber nac^fte 21uffid)tg--9leltefte einen rvaijlen, wenn er eg nic^t felber tl^un f onn. f iinftcr ^iifr^nitt. Sleltcflen il|rcr Paljl, J(mt, Pflidjt unb CrbtKtttiott. %r. 3Cie foil ein 3leltefter geioafjit loerben ? 3lntro. 9{ad^ einer jroei)ia^rigen 'iprobejeit, mag er ber ja^rlicfien 6on-- ferenj worgeftetlt roerben unb won ben Sifd^ofen mit 2luflegung i[)rer §anbe orbinirt luerben; mit biefem 3]orbef)aU fo fid) bie Gonferenj iibcrjeugt fii^It, baf5 ber 3"f)on iicr PJeifc Prel)i0cr ttufiuueljmcn, unb e5r. 2Bie foU em ^rebiger aufgenoiumen roerben ? 2lntra. 1. ®urci^ bie jja^rtid^e ©onferenj ? 2. ^tt ber S'l^'i^e^jeit oon ber Sonferenj, burd^ ben Si[d^of, ober ben SluffidjtS^^Ielteftcn beg Sejirr^, ober eineg 2(e[teften, ber ben ^la^ eineS 2luf[i(l;t§=2lcUe[ten nertritt auf einer jctl^rlid^en ober gro^en 3>er[amm[ung, Big jur nacfiften ©iljung ber 6onf;renj. Keiner rairb anberg alg auf ^ro5e angenommen ; einer ber auf ^lobe angenommen i[t, mag Bei)6e^a(ten ober abgeioiefen loerben, oI)ne ba^ ifjin einigeg llnrei^t gefc^efjen luiirbe, fonft roiire eg !eine ^robe. 3. (Sine jebe ^erfon bie atg ^rebiger worgefd^lagen loirb, foU oon ber ©onferenj unteriud)t nn'b if)m folgcnbe tfi^agen oorgelegt loerben : §at er (Sott in 6f)rifto alg einen oergebenben @ott eriannt ? §at er 33ergebung feiner Siinben eriangt ? 3ft bie iiiebe ©otteg bucd^ ben ^eitigen ®eift, in fein ^erj ouggegoffen toorben ? &at er ben grieben ®otteg eriangt ? ^aget er ber §eiligung nac^ ? §at er eine rid)ttge ©rfenntni^ oon ©tauben, oon 33ufe, oon 3led^t= fertigung, §eitigung iinb Srlofung ? Siegt il^m fein eigen ^eil, unb bag §eil feineS 9Zebenmenfc^en me^r am .^gerjen, alg fonft aKeg anbere in ber 3Bc[t ? £ann er fid^ bent diatl) feiner Sriiber unterioerfen ? aSiH er gel^orfam fei;n, ju reben ober fd^roeigen, roie eg bie Sriiber fiir gut er!ennen ? 60 61 ^ft er raiCig, fo oiel al§ in feinem 33ennogert ^ef)t, ben Sieifes^Ian (ober ben Sejirf ?u fiereifeu) l^elfen aufrerfit ju i)alten unb Ujn jo ciel roie ntoglid^ ?u unterftii^en ? g=r. 2. SOBag ift bie ^flid)t eineg ^prebigerg ? 2lntn). 6^riftum ben ©efrcMjigten ?u prebigen, roo fid^ nur gul^orer einfinbeu ; ©lafjen=3SerfammIungen aufjurtd^ten, roo e§ nii^licl^ ift, tnit il^nen von il^rent ©eelen=3iiftttnbe ju reben, bi*e angefotfitenen fud^en juredEit ju raeifen, bie S^ragen fud^en aufjumuntern, unb alle im ®Iau6en in ber @nabe unb ©rfenntni^ S^fu (5[)rifti fud)en ju erbauen fo ciel icie tni3gUd^ ; nie untertaffen bie ^ranfen ju fiefuc^en, unb tnit feinem Seben xtnb SBanbel fud^en feine SOBorte jitf befraftigen roag er prebiget* %v. 3. 3Bc[c^e 9(uioeifungen loerben einein ^rebiger gegeben ? 2lntn). 1. Gr fet) flei^ig ; nie Berliere er feine 3ett an unnot^igen Sin^ gen, an einigem Drt ; immer feg er ernfttjaft ; fetn Senfiprud^ feg bem §errn geljeiliget; er meibe alten Seid^tfinn unb ©c^erjen; er rebe Befc^eiben, unb f)0&e Bef)utjamen Umgang mit beat raeiblic^en ®ejdE)(ed^te, unb Betrage fic^ in aHen ©tiiden al^ ein roal^rer gfjrift. 2. @r fei) intmer abgcneigt Siefcfiutbigungen ju glauben, e§ fei) benn l^inldnglic^ enniefen ; er lege atleg fo mel eg mit ber 2BaE)rf)eit befte^en mag jum a3eften an^. (Sr rebe uon niemanb nid^tg Ue6e(g ; roag er je Don einem ben!en mag, bel^alte er fold^eg bet) fid) felbft, 6i^ er eg bemjenigen felbft, betn eg angel^t, fagen !ann. 3. ©ein (^efc^iift fet), ©eelen ju retten fo t)iel raie moglid^ ; ju biefem ©efd^Sfte ge6e er fic^ auf. @r befudfie bie eg Bebiirftig finb. ^n aUen Singen f)anbe(e er nic^t nad; feinem eigenen ©utbiinfen, fonbern alg ein ©ofin beg ©oangetiutng ; olg ein foIrf)er fte[;t eg ifjm ju feme geit/ fo i^ie biefe 3Sor= fcf)rift lautct : tnit ^rebtgen, mit §aug6efucf)en, mit Sel^ren unb Seten, uttb 93etrad)tung beg SBorteg ©otteg jujubringen; bamit gefie er um, big ber ^err fommt. ©ichetttcr TOfi^jnitt ^on Hem fittenlofctt l^etrageu tier Pretilgci:, ^ rate mlt Iftneii foil bcrfa^ren toerbcn. ^-r. 1. SBaS foK getf^dn rcerben, mnn von einem Stfd^of, 3lufftd§t§s SCelteften, ober ^rebiger bie 3iad^rid^t ein!otnmt, a[§ l^abe er fid^ eine6 a>ev= l&recf)en3 fd^ulbig gemad^t, \)a^ tm 2Borte ©otteg, al§ eine auSfd^liefienbe ^anblung uerBoten fet; ? 2lntro. 2Beim ein 35ifd^of roegen ftttenlofem Setragen &efdE)uIbtgt toirb, roie foU mtt il^m werfa^ren roerben ? 2Bo fief) 23eict)utbigung ereignen f oUte, bie bem ©Dangelium naditf^eilig loiire, fo joH e§ einem 2luffid^t§=3lelteften unb einem 2(elte[ten befannt gemad^t roerben, bie follen e§ unterfud^en, ob etroaS an ber ©a(^e feij ; fie foHen aber feinc ^lage ouffer jroeg ober bret; 3s"3^" annef)tnen, aB roie ber 2lpo[tel fagt. ©d^eint e3 nun, ba§ er mit red^t i)i= yd;u(bigt rcirb, fo follen fie e§ fc^riftlid^ nef}men, unb bem 33ild)of eine 3l6fdt)rift bauon fd)i(fen, itnb eine Qe'xt beftimmen roo fie jufantmen fommen, TOO bie 5?lager unb ber 33ifdf)of gegenroartig fei;n follen, imb fott burd^ bie jroeg 2luffid^t§=2lelteften unb brep 2lelteften unterfud;t roerben. 2Cirb er fd[;ulbig gefunben, fo fott er fc^ioeigen 5i3 jur iar)rtid^en Souferenj ; ba follen bie 2Uiffic^tg:2le[te[ten unb Sleltcften eS nod} einmal unterfudfien; rcirb er fdjiilbig gefunben, fo fott er com 2lmt fufpenbirt roerben. gr. 2. SBenn ein 2luffidE)t§:3IeItefter roegen fittenlofem 58etragen te- fd^ulbigt roiirbe, roag fott get[}an roerben ? 2Intro. 2Bo ftc§ 93efdE)ulbigungen ereignen fottten, bie bent (Soangelium nod^t^eilig roaren, fo fott eS ber nadE)fte 2leltefte unb ein ^Prebiger unter= fuc^en; jeigt eg fid^ nun al^ o5 er fd^ulbig rcdre, fo fotten fie eg fd^riftlidf) nef)men, imb bem 2luffid^ts=3lelteften eine 2lbfd)rift bauon fd^idEen, nn'Q eine 3eit beftimmen, roo fie fotten jufammen lomnten, roo bie iiliiger unb ber 2luffidE)tQaUefte gegenroartig fei)n. ^n 2l[)rcefenfjeit bes ^lifc^sfg fott ein anbe= rer 2luffid)tgaltefter unb jroei) 2letteften gerufen roerben, bie fotten eg mit unterfud^en; »irb er fd^utbig gefunben, fo fott er fdiroeigen biS jur 6on= feren?, ba fott er BerantrcortUdj fei;n. 62 63 (5r. 3. 2Benn ein 2teltefter ober ^rebiger ober (grmal^ner foCte be-- fc^ulbigt toerben, loegen fittentofem Setragen, tcag foil getf^an roerben ? 2lntn). 2)er ^:ebiger in ber ©egenb, bem e^ befannt rcirb, fott noc^ einen ^rebiger ober ©nna^ner ober einen 3Sorgartger mit ftd^ nefjmen, imb eg unterfud;en ; fcltte eg fd^einen ba^ er fd^utbig ware, fo foil irjm 9Jacf)ri(^t bat)on gegeknx raerben, unb etne 3fit 6eflimmt roerben, roo fie, bie ^liiger unb ber Sefijulbigte gegemodrtig fet)n; in 2l6roefenf)eit bog Sifd)ofg ober 2lufftc^tgalteften, foHen eg breg 9lelteften ober ^rebiger unterfitd)en, tuivb er fd^ulbig gefunben, fo foil er fd^roeigen Big jur Sonferenj, rco er Derant= rcortlidE) fegn foil. 9ii^tcr mmut l^on lien ^liebern insgemein. ®in jebeg ®lieb ber ©emeinbe foftte fielennen, ba§ eg bie 33i6e( fiir ®otteg SCort l^alte; bafe eg fic^ oon nun an Kon gan^em feenen beftrebe, fein feeil in G^rifto ^efu ju fud^en, unb feine ©eligiEeit ju fc^affen mit ^-urcfit unb Sittern, urn ben jufiinftigen ercigen 3°^" 5« entfliefjen. Gin jebeg ©lieb foil fid^ beftreben einen genauen unb gottfeligen SBanbel ju fii^ren ; flei^ig fei;n im @ebet, befonberg im 3Ser6orgenen ; unb too mbglid^ aUen SJerfammlungen bepjuraol^nen, bei)beg offentlid^en ©ottegbienft unb 33etftunben, ?u feiner ©rbauung. §aupter in g-amilien follten eg nte uerfaumen beg aJJorgeng unb 2l6enbg intt ben ^^rigen ju beten, unb benfelbeu ein guteg ©Eempel ju fe^en, in alien G^riftlic^en S^ugenben. (Sin jebeg foil fid^ beftreben, genau alg in ber ©egenroart ©otteg ju roanbeln ; ftd^ bet) feinen ©efc^aften an einen genauen Umgang mit ©ott ge«ot;nen; nie Uebel oon feinem Dlebenmenfc^en reben; Siebe iiben gegen greunb unb geinb; bem 2lrmen guteg ju tl^un, unb fud^en in ber 2;i^at ein Jtad^folger Sefu 6l;ri[ti ju fei)n. ©in jebeg ©lieb foil ben ©abbatl^ l^alten, fo roie eg ©otteg SBort erforbert ; nid^tg ju faufen nod^ ju certaufen, fonbern foil benfelben in 2lnbac^t mit Sefen unb &oren beg aCortg ©otteg, mit ©ingen geiftreicf)er Sieber jur ®^re unb ^ob ©otteg jubtingen. 64 ©in jebeg ®lieb in biefer ©emeinjd^aft foUte uiertelja^rlid^ au§ frepem SBillen fo ciel beptragen, ido eg feine Utnftanbe erlauben, urn bie reifenbe ^rebiger ju unter[)alten. ®g ift einem jeben ©liebe feine Wif^t/ ci" friebtic^eS, ftilleg unb gott: jeligeg Seben ?u fii^ren ; iin llmgang mit alien il'ien|d)en, luie eg einem (Sf)ri[ten gejicmt, im grieben ju leben; abfonberlid) foil jebeg ber Dbrigteit untertfian fet)n, jo icie ©otteg SOBort e§ forbert. SBep jolrfjen ©liebern ber ©emeinbe, foUen bie ^rebiger eine ober mel^rere Slaflen^SSerfammlungen erricf)ten, too e§ bie SJief^r^eit ber (Slieber fiir nii^licf) l^alten ; bafelbft follen fief) bie ©lieber, ido eg fegn fann, einmal in jeber 2Bocf)e werfammlen, an bem baju beftimmten Drt, urn Setftunben mit ein= anber ju l^alten, um fic^ ju erbauen in ber ©egenioart ©otteg unbtnSieb. ju guten SBerfen in Sl^rifto ^efu. 55n jeber ©laffe foHten SSorganger in ©cgenroart be§ ^rebiger§ geroablt roerben, beren ^flid^t foU feijn, bie Setftunben in befteCen, anjufangen, unD ju fcf)Iie|en, auc^ ju 3^'^^" Claffenuntervebungen ju ijalten, ein jebeg ®Iieb ?u erma^nen unb in Siebe ?u er^alten, unb auf fid) felbft ju fel^en. 2Benn ©lieber fid) an einanber Derfiinbigen, aB SBriiber ober Sd^raeftern, fo firafe eg ^ucrft 5ii)ifd)en Sir unb SO'" i^^^ein ; l^bret er bid), fo f;aft bu il^ii ge^onnen; f)oret er bid) nid^t, fo nimm nod) einen ober ?ioet) ju bir, auf ba^ alte ©ad^e befte^e a\x^ }mev)ev ober brex)er 3eugen=9)htnbe ; fpret er bie nid^t, fo fage eg ber ©emeinbe ; f)oret er bie ©emeinbe nid)t, fo l^alte il^n alo einen §eiben unb 3'^^^ner- aBenn fid^ ©treitigfeiten ereignen follten, jiuifd^en jroei) ober ntel^rern ©liebern ber ©emeinbe, oon toegen ©dE)ulben ober irgenb einer anbern Urfad)e, unb bie ©treitenben ^^artf)even ju feinem ^Sertrag fommen fbnnen, fo foU ber ^rebiger iDeId;er bie i)(uffid)t iiber bie ©emeinbe i)at, ober ber ^rebiger, ber in ber ©egenb loofjnt, bie ©ac^e unterfudijen, unb ben ©treiten= ben eine Jicferenj anempfer^tcn ; biefelbe foil aug brei) ©lieber ber ©emeinbe befte^en, roouon ber illager einen, ber Seflagte ben anbern, unb biefe jroeg ben britten ern)at)len follen, biefe brey follen bann bie 3iDiftiT5!eiten fdE)lid^ten. ^m %all aber eine ber ftreitenben 'Sjierfonen mit biefem 3lusfprud) unjufrie^ ben fei)n fotlte, fo mag fie fid) an bie nad)fte nierteliaf)rtid^e ober grofie SSer^ fammlung luenben, eg bem 3luffid^tg:3lelteften befannt madden, um eine jrae^te '5riebcnQfd)lid)tung anf)alten, imb rcenn bie ^rebiger l^inlanglid^ Urfac^ baju finben, fo follen fte eine jiuepte 'griebengfd^lic^tung ertf)eilen; in roeld)em "^aU eine jebe ber 5partl)ei)en jioei) ©lieber aug ber ©emeinbe, unb biefe »iere, ben fiinften emja[)len foUen; biefe foCen ben Slugfprud^ 65 ber 3"''f*i9f6''t Qfinjlit^ entfd^eiben; foHte ahev eine ber ^erfonen mtt biefem 2lu§fprucl^ boc^ nid^t jufrieben fegn, fo fd)liefet er ftd^ bamit an§; unb roenn ein ©lieb ber ©emeinbe ftd^ roergern foUte, roeijen ©cf)ulben ober anbern giciftigfeiten, bie ©acf)e fc^Ud^ten ^u lafjen, nad^bem e5 ifjm oon einem ^rebtger ober 33organger, welc^e bie 2luf[icf)t t)aben, anempfol^Ien iDorben, ober ein ©lieb von ber ©emetnbe wor ©eric^t ^ie^en foHte, e§e bie oorl^ergel^enbe 3}Jaa^regeIrt genommen niorben, fo foil baffell6e oon biefer ©emeinbe au§gefcf)loffen feijn, e§ fei) benn, baft ©treitig!eiten oon ber 9(vt raaren, ba§ fie eine gerid^tlicfie ©ntfd^eibung erforbern unb red^tferlige, al5 : (Sjecutoren ober 2lbminiftratoren. 91 n I a u 9 . Bon iicr JlotljmeuMgkeit ber Scremigung unfrcr feliftcn. Saffet un§ (a\i^ bem, rceld^eg rair fc^on erfannt l^aben) bag UeBel ber ©pattungen in @runbfd|en, ber Unetnigfeit im ©eift, ober in ber Slusiibung, raie aud^ bie fc^recflidien t^'O'tS^" bacon fiir un§ fe(6ft unb anbere tief e.n= pfinben. ©inb rcir einig, rcag !ann un§ roiberfte^en? S:fjeilen rair nng, fo oerberben rair un§ fellbft, baS 2Ber! ©otteg, unb bie ©eelen unferer 2}litglieber. %x. 2Ba§ fann balder getl^an raerben, um eine genauere 2?ereinigung unter un5 ju 2Bege ju 6ringen ? 3lntra. 1. So^t ung Bon ber Siiotfjraenbigleit berfelBen uollig unb lief ii&erjeugt fepn. 2. 33etet ernftlid^ fiir, unb rebet treu unb offen^erjig ntit einanber. 3. SBenn rair un§ cerfammlen, fo la^t ung niemalg o^ne ©ebet au§s einanber gel^en. 66 4. Saltet fe^r barauf, baf; feine^ be§ anbern ©aben oerad^te. 5. 9lebet niemalg unlauter ober Icid^tfinnig von einanber. 6. 2a§t un§ fu(i)en eine§ be§ anbern Character in aUen Singen 5U t)ert()eibtgen, in jo fern e6 mit ber SEBal^rl^eit iibereinftimmenb fe^. 7. 3Irbeitel in (S^ren, ad^tet einer ben anbern pl^er al§ fid^ fel6ft. 8. SBir empfel^Ien eine ernftUd^e Unterfuc^ung ber Urfarfien, Uebeln, unb ilur beg §er|eng, unb ber jEirc^lid^en 2:rennungen. Jausbefudjen nnti ber (Binrdjarfiing fines tliatigcn PliriftcutljuuKl %x. 2Bie !bnnen tuir benen, bie i"i.l) un[erer Dbforge ancertrauen, ferner Beplflid^ fetjn ? 2lntn). 1. Snbem lutr i^nen Unterrid^t ertl^eilen, in il^ren §aufern, loel-- d^eS fe[;r not^ig ift, urn ba^ 3>ertrauen unb bie ©emeinfc^aft mit ©ott ju bes forbern : forner fid^ in ber 2Belt=Stebe ab, an einen f)inunlifd^en SBanbel geroijl^nen; firf) f^erjlid^er 33ruber=8iebe befleifeen, aiif bag fein argeSSenfen unb 3iid^ten etneg gegen ben anbern fepn mag, unb tl)un loie rair roiinfd^en getl^an ?u f)abeii. 2. '^eiet ^rebiger mu^ e§ fid^ ju feiner ^flid^t madden bie :^eute in il^ren §aufern ju bejud^en, fie enna[)nen in aHem ©uten gefd^idEt ju feijn. S3i§ bie§ get^an loivb, unb jioar mit (Scnft unb (Sifer, fo loerben roir im ©anjen rcenig gebcfjert loerben, unb unfere GJottfeligfeit mirb nic^t tief genug gegriinbet : folglid^ ido roir and) feytx mogen, foil fein unnii^eg ©efd^md^ aug bem 9Jhmbe geljen. D^ne 3ii^cifel finb bieie s^aug=33efud£)e unb befonbere (Srmafjnungen auf bie feperlicfie 2Borte beg 2(pofte(g gegriinbet. iJ^d) gebe bir ben 'J(uftrag cor 0o!t unb bem .^errn S^u 6f)rifti, ber beg feiner 2Bieberer}d)einung bie iiebciiDigen uno bie Sobten ridjten loirb: Sitte, prebige ba§ aSort, l^alte bamit an, e§ fep ju red^ter S^it/ ober jur Unjeit, ftrafe, brol^e, erma^ne, mil aller ©ebulb unb iJangmittf)." — Ilott htm l(ntcrrid|t l)er Jugenb, ^. 2Ba§ foH jum Seften ber J^eranroad^fenben Suseni> getl^an roerben? Slntn). 2Ber fiir (Sott unb bag §eil ber ©eelen einigen ®ifer i^at, bet fange bag 2Ber! oljns 35erjug an. 3Bo 5t'inber fid^ fiefinben, beren (Sltern in ber ©emeinfd^aft finb, cerfammle fie fo oft eg t[)unli(f) unb nu|(tcl^ ift : rebe ntit i^nen ; unterroeife unb erma^ne fie in bem ©uten ; bete tnit i^nen ernftlid^ t>oa§ 3"traueit, ba^ bu innerlic^ .burc^ ben J^eiligen ©eift boju ongetrieben roerbeft, ba§ 2lmt eineg 2)iener§ auf bid^ ?u ne^men, urn barinnen ©ott ju feineg 9lamen§ ©l^re, in ber ©emeinbe 6f)ri[ti ju bienen? 2lntn3. ^c^ traue, mit ber ^iilfe ©olteg. i5r. ©laubeft bu ber ^eitigen ©dirift, olteS unb neue§ Seftament ? Slntn). S'* it^ gtau5e. i5r. 2Sinft bu beinen ^leif; ba[)tn anraenben, beinen eigenen SOBanbel ttod^ ber Seljre Sf)ri[ti etnjuric^tcn, unb fo Diet in bir ift bid) ber §eerbe ©l^riftt ju einem 9)Jufter beg d^riftlic^en i.'eben§ Dorjuftetlen ? 2lntn). S*^ i^iU' fo ®ott "i^i" §elfer ift. %v. 3BtlIft bu benen, ir)eld)en etioa bte lleberfic^t iiber bid^ anuertraut toerben mag, mit ©fjrerbietung ge^orfamen unb i[;ren guten (Srma[)nungen mit einem joilligen unb frieblicfien Jgerjen nad^fommen ? 2lntra. ^df) mill mid^ burd^ bie ©nabe ©otte§ bai^in beftreben ! Sann rairb gebetet, 3lad) bem ©e6et legen bie Sifd^ofe (ober 33ifdE)of unb 3(elteften) einem jjeben bie §anbe auf ba€ §aupt unb fprerf)e : (jjiimm anmit f)in, bie 3SoI(niac{)t bag 3lmt eineg 2(e[teften (ober Sies nerg) in ber ©emeinbe ©otte§ ju ooH^ieOen. ^ni 9iamen ®otte§ be§ SSatcrS, be§ (Sol^neg unb beg §eiligen ©eifteg," 3(men. §ierauf iibergebe ber ^ifcf)of einem jeben befonberg bag Sibelbud^, fpred^enb : ^Jiimm anmit I}in, bie SSolIntac^t bag SBort ©otteg ?u lefen unb ju prebigen in ber ©emeinbe (£[)ri[ti." atlgbann lefe ber Sifd^of au§ bem 12ten ©apitel Sucft, il 35—38 : Saffet eure Senben umgiirtet fetjn, unb euro 2id)teY brennen ; unb fet;b gleid^ ben SOienfc^en, bie auf if^ren £»errn marten, menu er aufbrcdjen loirb t)on ber §od)jeit, auf bafe roenn er lommt, imb anftopft, fie ifjin balb aufs tl^un. ©elig finb bie i{ned)te, bie ber JQerr, menu er tommt, roac^enb finbet. 2Baf)rIid^ tc^ fage eud^: 6r rairb fid^ auffd^iirjen, luib rairb fie ju S:ifd^e fe^en, unb Dor if)nen gef)cn, unb i^nen bienen. Unb fo er fommt in ber anbern 2Bad)e, unb in ber brttten 3Bad^o, unb rairb eg alfo finben, felig finb biefe iCncc^te. Sann bete ber 23tid}of, ober einer ben er Oeifet ; raorauf bann ber folgenbe Segen uom 33i)d)of geiprod)en rairb. 2)er 'Jriebe ©otteg er^alte cure §erjen unb ©innen in ber (Srfenntnifj 3efu Sfirifto unferm ^errn. 2lmen. %xi unti Peife ciiini ]3ifdjof |u orMnlren. 3laeinr. SBeibner, 6f;ri[tian 3?eu!ommer, Sie jroeite 3"f'^""itfi"f""ft luurbe in ?)orf Gountp, ^arabieS Saunffjtp, ^ennfijlcanien, itn §au[e be^ Sruber^ ©pdnglerS, inx '^ai)te 1791 ge^alten, rco folgenbe ^rebiger gegeniDartig roaren : SBiifjcIm Ctterbein, ^oi^anneS Grnft, 2)lartin 33o^m, % &. ^frimer, ©eorg 2lb. ©iitl^ing, 3of)ctnn SJeibig, (El^r. yieufontmer, 33enebilt ©anber, 9(bam i'e^= niann. 3laaufe be§ 33ruber§ ^^i^iebrid^ jlemp, jufannnen ju !ommen. j^olgenbe ^rebiger luarcn jugegen : 2Cilf)elm Dtterbein, 6[;riftian ilruut, 3JJartin 33bfjm, Jpeinrirf) ilrunt, ®eorg 21. @iitf)ing, ^oi^ann ^perrfd^e, 6^r, 5teu!ommer, "^acoh ©eifinger, 2lbam Sel^= mann, §einrid) SSof)m, 9lbraf)ani ^ra^fet, SJietrid; 2Iuvauf, Sol^ann ®eorg ^frimmer. ©ie tjereinigten fid^ bafelbft in eine ©efcEfd^aft, bie ben 9^anien fiifjrt: „35 1 c 35 e r e i n i g t e n 58 r ii b e r in G f) r i ft o" ; itnb enodf)Iten SCilfjelm Dtterbein unb SKartin 33b[)n: ju Dber=2Uiffe[}ern ober 33ifd§bfen, nnb luurben einig einen jeben bie j^rei^i-'it ju erianben auf bie 3lrt itnb SBeifc ju taufen, loic er eg nac^ feiner tleberjeugung fiir red)t befcinbe. SSon nun an Dcrbreitete fid^ bie ©enieinbc inimer nie^r unb mei^r ; e§ tour* ben ^rcbiger aufgenonnnen, bie Beftiinbig reifeten (benn bie Dielen ^rebigt= pldt?e lonnten auf leine anbere SBeife bebient luerben), unb bag 3Cerf uerbreitete fid) in bie ©taaten Dl^io unb ilentudfi). ©g rourbe balder nijti^ig, eine 6onfe; 77 renj im ©taate Dl^io |u l^alten, inbem e§ ju befd^roerlid^ georfitet rourbe, fiir bie borttgen ^rebiger jal^rltd^ fo roeit §u ber (Sonferenj ju reifen. ^nbefjen ftarSen bie SBruber 33oE)nt unb (Sutl^ing, unb 33ruber Dtterbein bege^rte, ba^ ein anberer jum Sifcfiof jollte erical^It raerben (toctl er felbft, 2llter§ unb ©d^road^e l^alber, ntcfit mel^r nad^jefien fonnte,) ber baS SBerl iiber* nel^me, bamit Qu^t unb Drbnung er^alten rourbe ; benn e§ roar iei einer ber ©onferenjen befd^Ioffen rcorben, roenn einer con ben 33ifrf)ijfen ftirbt, foU ein anberer an jeine ©telle erroal^lt roerben, S^ rourbe alfo ber Sruber Sl^riftian ^eutommev alg SBifd^of erroal^It, roeld^er bie Sluffid^t iiBer bie ©emeinbe iiber ftd^ nef)men foKte. 6c^on lange rourbe ber 3}Jangel einer 3wc^t=C)rbnung in ber ©emeinbe tief empfunben ; e§ roar fd^on mel^rmalS etroag baran getl^an roorben ; enbli^ rourbe auf ber ©onferenj im ©taate D^io fiefd^Ioffen, ba^ eine §aupt= ober ©enerahSonferenj gel^alten roerben joQte, bie eS iiber ftdf) nel^men follte, bie 3ucf)t= Drbnung in etroag ooHftanbtger ju madden, foroie bem SOorte ©otte§ ge* mix^ fein. 2)ie ©lieber biefer ©onferenj foEten au§ ben ^rebigern, in ben unterfd^ieb= lid^en ©egenben, burd^ bie ©lieber ber ©emeinbe geroal^It roerben ; unb e§ rours ben bie folgenben 33riiber erroiifilt, namlid^ : gi^r. SiJeufommer, Slbral^. §ieftanb, 3lnbreag S^^^^r 2)aniel Xtexjex, ©eorg SBenebum, 2l6ra^am ^rajel, 6f)riflian Serger, 3l5ra^am SJJetjer, ^ofjnnn ©d^neiber, §einrid) ft'umler, §einrid^ ©pcitl^, % SfJeufd^roanber, (S^r. i?rum, Safob aSauIuS. Sie[e Berfammelten fid^ am 6. ^uni 1815, naf^e Bei SWount^^Ieafant, in SCSeftmorelanb ©ountr), ^ennfitoanien, rco fie nad^ reifer Xleberlegung bie fol* genbe Sef;re unb Siegein fiir gut unb nii^lid^ befanben, fie ber ©emeinbe in Siebe unb S)emut§ ?u iibergeben, mit bem l^erjtid^en 2Cunfd)e, ba^ biefe Sel^re unb fold^e 3iegeln, nebft iem SBorte ©otteg mbd^ten beobad^tet roerben. 2)enn ©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb roo feine Drbnung unb ^ird^enjud^t ift, ba oerliert fid^ atle Siebe unb ©emeinfrfiaft ; balder la^t un§ bem 3iat[)e be§ §errn folgen, ber un§ lel^rt, tta^ rcir burd^ S)emut^ einer ben anbern ^o^er ad^ten, al§ un§ felbft, fud^en gefinnet §u fein, roie ^efuS (Sl^riftug aud^ roar, ber 5lnec^t§geftalt angenommen, roarb ge^orfam big jum 2;obe am ^reuj, um un§ bie ©nabe unb j?raft p erroerben, baf; roir un^ au§ £iebe unb Semutl^ einer bem anbern unterroerfen fonnten, roer fid^ nid^t unterroerfen lann, bem mangett nod^ ©nabe, Siebe unb S)emut(; ; baf;er fagt S^fw^ ' 2Ber unter eu^ ber ©rij^re fein roiti, ber foE beS anbern Siener fein. ©oE einer be§ anbern 2)iej ner fein, fo miiffen rcir einanber lieben. 78 3e[u§ fagt : baran roirb Sei>ermann erfeimen, ba§ il^r meinc red^te Siinget feib, fo i^r Siebe unter einanber l^aBt, unb luer nic^t Siebc l^at, ber hle'M im Xob. ©0 laffet ung Siebe ilben, auf baf( roir bie ^errlid^Ieit 5efi|en mogen, bie Sefu^ feinen ^"ngern won feinem SSater erbeten l^at, ba| roir eing jein tnod^ten, roie er unb ber 3>ater ein§ finb. 2)arum, i^r lieben Sriiber, lafjet un§ fudfien gleic^gefinnet, ein^eHig unb eintrad^tig ju fein, unb leiner Uebet con bem anbern reben ober benfen, fonbern ben §errn anfle^en, ia^ ex una feinen (Seift unb ©rnft geben mod^te, urn ba§ 6^ri[tentl^um rec^t jur e^re feine§ l)e\lu gen 3tamen§ ju fiil^ren, unb ju unferem eigencn ercigen SBo^l. 2lmen. e^rfJct 9l6fiftttitt. Bas iilaubcnshekcuntni^. 3m Seamen ©otteS er!Idren unb be!ennen roir Dor ^eberniann, ba§ roir glauben an ben einigen roaf;ren ©ott, SSater, So^n unb fjeiliger ®eift, ba| biefe 2)rei ©ing finb, ber SSater im ©ol^n, ber ©ol^n im 3Sater unb ber §eilige ©eift gleid)e5 2Befen mit beiben. S;a^ biefer breieinige ©ott §immel unb ©rbe unb aHeS roaS barinneu ift, jorool^t fidE)tbar alg unfid}tbar, erfd^affen fjat, tragt, regiert, fdE)ii^t unb er[;dlt. 2Sir glauben an ^efum ©^riftum, ba^ er roafjrer ©ott unb SJJenfd^ ift, ba^ er feine 3Ken[d^^eit burd^ ben ^eiligeu ©eift in 3Jiaria angenommen, unb won il^r geboren, ba^ er §eilanb unb 33erfof)ner be§ ganjen menfd^Iid^en ©efc^Ied^t^ ift, roenn fie bie in ^efu angebotene ©nabe im ©lauben an i[;u annef^uten ; ha^ biefer S^f"^ 1^^ ""^ gelitten Tjat, am ©tamme beS jlreutjeg geftorben, begra= Ben, am britten S^age roieber auferftanben, geu §imme[ gefa[)ren, roeld;er ift jur 3ie(f)ten ©ottcg unb uertritt un5 ; unb roieber !onunen roirb am jiingften 2^age, ju rid^teu bteJ2ebenbigen unb bie Sobten. 2Bir glauben an ben ^eiligen ©eift, baf( er gleic^eS SCefen mit bem SBater unb ©o^n ift, ba^ er bie ©laubige trbfte unb fie in ode SBafjrfjeit leite. 2Cir glauben an cine §eilige (Sr^rifttidie ©emeinbe, bie ©emeinfd^aft ber ^eiligen, bie 2luferftef)ung beS Scibeo, unb ein eroigeg 2d)in. 79 ajJir glauben, ba§ bie SBibel, alte^ unb neueg S^cftament, ©otteg aSort ift ; ba^ fie ben roa^ren SBeg ju im[erer ©eligfeit entl^alte, ba§ ein jeber toal^re (Shrift biefel6e mit ben (Sinfliiffen be§ ®eifte§ ©otteS einjig unb aHein ju feiner ^lici^tfci^nur nel^men foH, unb ba^ ol^ne ©lauben an ^efum (S^riftum, maf)xe 33u^e, 33erge5ung ber ©iinben unb Stad^folge ©l^rifti, SJJiemanb ein rca^rer ©j^riji fein fann. 2Bir glauben, ba^ toag bie l^eitige ©(^rift entf)alt, namlid^ : ben 'gall in 2lbam unb bie ©rlofung burd^ ^efum Sf^riftum, ber ganjen SBelt foHte geprebigt roerben. SBir finb iiBerjeugt, bafi bie aufieren 33erorbnungeti, nemlid^ bie Saufe unb t>a^ @ebadf)tni§ be§ Xobeg unfereg §errn ^efu ©l^rifti, in aUexi (Sfiriftlid^en ®e- meinben geiibt njerben foUten, unb ba^ e§ 5linbern ©otteg befonberS gejiemt, biefelben ju gebraud^en. S)ie 3lrt unb SBeife aber, rcie biefelbe geiibt roerben foUten, fon bent Urtl^eil unb bem 6r!enntni§ eineg Segtid^en iibertaffen jein. 2luci^ ba§ Seifpiel be§ f^"!""*!^^"^ f^^^t eirtem ^eien frei ju iiben ober ju unterlaffen. S^^O"^ ift e§ leinem unferer ^rebiger ober ©emeinbe^gliebern ge= jiemenb, feinen 3)iitbruber, beffen Urtl^eil unb ©r!enntni§ von bem jeinigen vex- fd&ieben ift, be^roegen offentlid^ ober in ^ricat |u oerJIeinern, ober feine 2lrt unb SBeife, roie er biefelbe iibt, ju uerad^ten ; roer [x^ Ijievxn fd^ulbig mad^t, [oU aB ein SJerloumber jeiner Sriiber gead^tet, unb begl^alB oerontroortlid^ fein. Stocitet 9l6fi|ttttt. tottjlitutiott ber $ird|e. 2Sir, bie ©lieber ber i^irc^e ber aSereinigten Sriiber in ©firi- ft 0, fe^en in bem 3iamen ©otteg, jur aSerooHIontmnung ber ®otte§fiird)tigen, ba§ 2Ser! be3 ?prebigts2lmt§, bie 33eforberung ber ^irc^e (Sf^rifti, jorool^I alS eine regelma^ige Seftimmung be; aHen §anblungen im ©lauben unb in ber Slu^fii^rung ju fid^ern, joroie aud^ bie 3Kad^t unb bie ©efd^cifte ber tjierteljal^r; lirfien, jaJ^rlid^en unb ©eneraUGonferenjen ju beftinxmen, roie eg biefe ^ird^e on^ genommen f)at, folgenbe Strtifel feft : 80 21 r t i f e I 1. 2lbfc^mtt 1. — 2lIIe i^ierin beiuilligte getftUdie ©eroalt, irgenb einc S^^^' regel m madden ober auf5uf)eben, foil einer ^aupt^Sonferenj iibertragen fern, n)elcf)e au^ 3lelte[te befte^eit foil, bie ooii ben (Sliebern in jebcm Gonferenj; ©iftrifte, burcf)an5 ber ©efeHfrfiaft gerod^lt icerben foUen. j^eftgefe^t i»irb jebod^, ba^ bie 3lelteften in ben (Sonferenj=2)iftriften, con roel(^en fie geroal^lt, brei ^af)xe geftanben l^aben. 2l6f(]^nitt 2. — 2lHe »ier Sa[)re foU eine ®eneral:6onferenj ge^alten wev ben, in roeld^er bie SSifd^ofe alg ajJitglieber unb priifibirenbe 33eamte betrac^tet rocrben follen. 2lbfd)nitt 3. — ^ebe jja^rlicfie Sonferenj foH ber @efellf(^aft bie Stamen ber= jjenigen 2lelteften oorlegen, n)elcf)e jur 2Ba^I, alS ©lieber ber ®eneraI:®onferenj, faf)ig finb. 2lrtitel II. 3lbfcf|nitt 1. — S)ie (55eneral=©onferenj foE bie (Sranjen ber jai^rtid^en Son* ferenjen beftimtnen. 21Cbfd^nitt 2. — 2)ie ©eneral^Sonferenj foQ in jeber il^rer ©i^ungen au5 ben 2lelteften, rceld^e fed^g ^afjre in berfelben geftanben l^oben, SBifd^ofe erroa^s len, 2lbjcf)nitt 3. — 2)ie ©efd^afte jeber jaf^clic^en ©onferenj foKen ftreng ber gud^torbnung gemcip get^an loerben. ^rgenb eine id^rlicf)e Gonferen?, bie ge^ gen bie Serfiigimg ber Jgaupt^Sonferenj fjanbelt, foQ burd^ 2ln!Iage t)on berfel* ben gerid^tet roerben. 2lbfdf)nitt 4. — ^eine 3?eget ober ©efe^ fott ju irgenb einer geit paffiren, tDoburcf) bag ©laubenSbefenntnif;, raie e§ je^t beftefjt, Deriinbert ober ueriDor* fen, unb ber 3leifeplan jerftort loirb. 2lbfdE)nitt 5. — 5?eine 3fiegel foK angenommen roerben, bie ben Stec^ten irgenb eineg ajlenfd^en (Sintrag tf)ut, in Sejug auf bie 2lrt unb SCBeife ber 2;aufe, ba§ ©acrament beS 2l5enbmaf)l5 bed £>errn, ober beg 'g:i^ei»afd^en§, jc. 2lbfd)nitt 6. — ©§ fott leine 31eget gemarf)t loerben, rooburd^ ben fe^rjaften ^Prebigern iC)re ©timmen in ben ja^rlidEien Sonferen^•n, ju benen fie oerfd^ie^ bentUd) ge()oren, beraubt roerben. 2lbfd|nitt 7. — i^eine aSerbinbung nitt ge[}eimen CS5e|enfdE)aften, nod^ unfreis n)iaige S)ienftbar!eit fott unter irgenb einer Sebingung eriaubt rocrben. 2trtile( III. 25ie SRed^te, bie 3lamen, bie ^ntereffen unb bie 2lnred^te aOeg ®igent^um§ in liegenben ®runben, ^irdien, aSeriniidjtniffcn ober Sdjentungen irgenb einer 2lrt, roeld^e burc^ 2lnlauf ober auf anbere affieife Don einer ober mcOrere '^3erfo= 81 nen, fiir ben ©ebraud^, 35ortl^eiI unb yiu^en ber ^ird^e ber SSereinigten Sriiber in ©firifto, beftimmt ftnb, foU f)iermit oolHommen 5eruc![tcl^tiget unb alg (Sigens tl^um befagter ^ird^e betrad^tet raerben. 2lrttfel IV. ^etne SSeranberungen ber norfiergefienben ©onftitittton fold gemad^t rocr* ben, e^ fei benn, burd^ eine ©timmenjal^l von jroei S)ritt^eilen ber ganjen @es ieUfc^oft. fritter m\mtt. encral = Olottferen^, 1. %taqe. SBetd^e finb bie ©lieber ber ©eneral ©onferenj ? S&" ©iefie ©onftitution. 2. %v. 3Bie unb auf raeld^e 2lrt ftnb bie[el&en ju wa^len ? 1. Slntroort. ^n ber SBa^l Don 2l6georbneten jur jpaupt^fionferenj foH e5 bie ^flidEit jeber ia^rUdjen ©onferenj fein, eine Sommittee oon breien in i^ren unterf(^ieb(id)en (Sonferenj^Siftriften ju ernennen, urn bie ©timmen 511 empfan* gen unb ju jci^ten, unb e^ unmittelbar benjenigen anjujeigen, roeld^e geraa^lt rcorben fein mogen, foroie aud^ ben j)orftel§enben 2lelteften eine Sifte aHer mal^Is Baren 9le[teften jufommen ju laffen. 2. 3lntn). 3)ie 9(uffid^t§-3lelteften foQen ftc jebem beauftragten 3ieife=5pres biger liefern, bercn 'Pflid^t eg fein foH, jeben ©la^leiter ober 2luffe[)er burdE) ben ganjen UmfreiS ferf)g SJJonate vox ber @eneraI=(5onferenj mit einer 3l6)d^rift baoon ju DerfeEien. 3. 2lntiD. ©5 foH bie ^flid^t eineS jeben (S(a§leiter§ ober 2luffef)er§ fein, eine SSerfammlung ber 2)Jitglieber jebejc ©laffe anjuorbnen, um burd) 33aIIotiren ober auf anbere SCeife einen ober me^re 2l6georbnete ju roal^Ien, biefelben in ber §aupt=6onferen5 ju reprcifentiren. 4. 2lntro. @g foQ gteid^erroeife bie ^flid^t eineS jjeben ©la^leiterg ober Sluffel^erg fein, jeben JBa[)t6erid^t ju unterfd^reiben, einjufc^lie^en unb jugefies gelt bem beauftragten ^rebiger einjufianbigen ; biefer r)intt)ieberum bem 2luf= fid^t§=3lelteften, beffen ^flidfit e§ fei, foldfien ber oon ber jal^rlid^en ©onferen| ernannten Committee ju iiberfenben. 82 5. 2lntro. 2)ie jum (gmpfange unb jur 3S^Iung ber Stimntcn ernannte Gommitte foH ein SSerjeid^nifj ber ^erfonen, fiir roeld)e geftimmt toorben, unb bte Sdijafil DOtt ©tinimen, bie jjebe er^alten, au^fertigen. SoHten jioei ober me^r ber (Sanbibateii eine gleid^e 2tnja[)l ©ttmmen Robert, fo foEen bie fo er-- nannten ^erfonen burd^'^ 2oo§ entfd^eiben, rcer ober roelc^e oon t^nen geroal^rt fmb. ©ie foUen ebenfo bie ^amm berer, bie geroa^It finb, an bie (Sonferenj^ 33ud|brudEerei jur 33efanntma(^ung einfenben. 3. iJrage. 2Cie oiel Stbgeorbnete foQen jur ®eneral=6onferenj gefd^icft roerben ? 2lntn). 2)rei won jebem jd^rlicfien (Sonfereni^Siftrilte. 4. ^raqe. 2Cie foQen bie itoften ber Sfbgeorbneten jur ®enerol:(£onferenj gebectt roerben ? 2lntro. SBenn ber ©la^leiter ober 2luffel^er bie ©timmen fiir bie 2lbgc= orbneten jur ®eneral=(5onferenj fammelt, foU eine ©ottefte ju bent Qwede »on i^m Deranftaltet roerben, bie er ber ©ommittec, roeld^e mit bem 3Si^len ber ©timmen befdEiaftigt, iibergeben fotl, bie e^ on bie geroa^Iten Slbgeorbneten ju ja^len i^at. Wmttx 5lbft^iutt. al)rlid|e Confer etif. 1. %taQe. aSer finb bie ©licber ber iaJ^rlid^en ©onferenj ? 3lntroort. 3nie 2lelte[te unb licenfirte ^rebiger, roeldje ju ber 3eit in bem 5!)iftri!te finb, roo bie Gonferenj ge[)alten roerben foE ; roenn aber folcf)e licen; ftrte ^rebiger jur Drbination »orgefrf)tagen finb, fo foUen bie 2lelteften allein baffelbe burd) 9lbftintinen entfd^etbcn. 2. (jrage. 3luf roeld^c SBeife finb bie 3Serl^anbIungen einer (Sonfereuj ju fii^ren ? 1. 2lntroort. ®g foU bei ber ©roffrtung ber Sonferenj {e'Den %aQ eine 2lb= tl^eilung au§ ber 33ibel getefen unb gefungen unb gebctet, unb beim ©d)Iuffe gebetet unb gefungen roerben. 2, 3lnbD. 2)ie Gonferenj foH jroei ©efretaire roci^len roenn eg not^ig ifi, einen 2)eutfd^eu unb eincn (Snglifdjen unb ift nur eiii IMfdjof jugegen, fo foU bie ©onferenj einen ©eOiilfen ernennen, um in 3Serbinbung mit bem Sifd^ofc ju l^aubeln. 83 3. 2lnttD, SBctbcn bie ^rebiger untcrfud^t, in 2lnfel^ung t^reS 3}erl^alten§ gegen il^re 2)iitmenfci^en, o& t^r Seben^toanbel untabel^aft, unb ob fte fo otel 3eit aB ntoglic^ anioenben, bag 3leic^ ©otteg ju beforbern. j^otgenbe j^^igett foHen bann erlebigt raerben : 1. ©inb rod^renb bem oergangenen ^al^re ^rebiger geftorBen ? 2. SCetd^e finb Sanbibaten fiir ba§ ^IBrebtgtamt ? 3. ®inb roeld^e ju bem 2letteften=2lmte ju orbiniren ? 4. 2Sag ift fiir jufaHige 2luggaben unb ben ©e^alt von SJeifeprebigetn gefammelt loorben ? ^ 5. 3ft Slbred^nung mit ben reifenben ^rebigern ge^alten roorben ? 6. §aben fie if)re ©ebiifjren er^alten ? 7. SBer ift raiHig, ba§ lommenbe ^a^r ?u reifcn, o^nc SJotbel^alt ? 8. SDerc^e finb 2Iuffic^t§=2leltefte ? 9. SDBie finb bie ^rebiger biefeS ^af)x angefteHt ? 10. SBann iinb rao foil unfere nac^fte ©onferenj gefiatten roerben ? 11. 3ft fonft nod^ etroag ju t^un ? 12. Sft SlHeg, rcag getl^an roorben, in bag ^rotofoH eingetragen? ^fiittftcr 9lbf4ttitt. ite Slufnaljme tion PreMgern. 1. j^age. 2Bie foQ ein ^rebiger aufgenommen roerben ? 3lntroort: Sine jjebe a[§ ^rebiger oorgefdilagene ^erfon foH t)on ber 6on= ferenj ober tjon einer ©ommittee ejaminirt, unb il^m folgenbe ^^i^agen worgelegt roerben : ^aft bu ®ott in S^rifto alg einen ©iinbe nergebenben ®ott ertannt unb felbft SSergebung beiner ©iinben eriangt ? §aft bu nun j^i^ieiieii ""t ®ott/ u"^ ift ^ie Siebe ©otteS burd^ ben ^eiligen ©eift in bein ^erj au€gegoffen ? Sageft bu ber ^eiligung nac^ ? ©laubeft bu, ba^ bie Sibel ©otteg SBort ift, unb bap biefelbe ttHein \>tn roa^ren 2Seg ju unferer ©eelen Seligfeit entl^alt ? 2Cel(^en ©runb l^aft bu fiir biefen ©lauben ? 84 SlBa§ t[t bein Seitjcggrunb, baf( bu @rlaubni^ Derlongft bo§ @»angelium ju ptebtgen ? 2Cag ift bein ©rlenntnift Bom ©lauben, t)on ber ©iinblid^feit be^ DJJenfd^en, »on Su^e, won ber 3tec^t|ertigung, §eiUgung imb (grlojung ? :^iegt bir bein eigen §eil imb bag igeil beineg 3]e6enmenfd^en inef)r am ^erjen, al§ jonft alle§ aubere in ber SBcIt ? ^annft bu bicf) bem 3iatfje beincr 33riiber iinterroerfen ? Sift bu mit ber 3uc^torbnuug unferer Mirc^e einnerftanben ? ilBiaft bu gel^orjam fein urib bereit, ju reben ober ^u fc^roeigen, roie eg bic 33riiber f iir gut fiuben ? Sift bu roittig, jo oiel in beinem 3Sermogen ift, ben 3fleifeplan l^elfen ju er* f)alten, unb i^n fo Dtel alg mogtid^ ju unterftii^en ? ^'einer fann auf anbere SBetfe roie auf ^robejeit aufgenomnten toerben, unb jei er aufgenommen ober juriidEgejoiefen, fo foQ if)m lein Unrec^t gefd^el^en. ©c4ftcr m\mtt Pie tiiertcljnljrlidjc (roufctcn^ 1. (^rage. SGBeld^e finb bie ©lieber ber Diertelja^rlic^en ©onferenj ? 2lntiDort. 9llle ^rebiger, ®rmaf}ner, j^iifirer unb 2luffe^er, roeld^e in bem ^reife ober ber ©tation luofjnen. 2. S'^age. 3Beld^eg finb bie ©efd^iifte ber oierteljal^rlid^en ©onferenj ? 1. Slntioort. ©inen ©elretair ju crnennen, beffen ^flic^t e§ fein foil, ein genaueS 3Serjeid)nifi aller il^rer Hnternel^mungen 2C. in ein befonberS bnju he- ftimmteS Sud^ einjujeidjnen unb in felbem eine £ifte ber ©lieber aug benen bie Gonferenj beftetjt, ju fiiljren. 2. 3lntn). (Sine atlgemeine, ober loenn not[)ig, eine befonbere 5Rac^fragc in ioinfid^t beg moralifdjen Serfjalteng ber Sonferenjgtieber anjufteHen. 3. 3lntn). 3ln?unel^men unb ju unb ju unterfud^en, alle ^IppeKationen, ^Jad^ioeifungen unb iCIagen, roeld^e regetntiifeig »or bie (Fonferenj gebrad^t roer-- ben. 4. 2lntiu. 9lbrerf)nungen mit bem 9(ufier)er imb reifejiben 'i^Jrebigern ju mac^en. 85 5. 3lntn). 2)enienigeti ^erfonen, raeld^e burd^ roenigftenS jroei 2)rittl^etle ber Ma'^e, ju toeld^er fie gel^oren, empfo^Ien, bie ®rlau6ni& ju gefeen, ju prebi= gen, ober ju ermal^nen. S^^Jod^ foil Reiner angenommen raerben ber ber (Sons ferenj nid^t l^in(angU(f)e 33efrtebigung, in ^infid^t feine§ 9Jufe^ : ©rfal^rimg, i^eftigleit in ber Sel^re, unb ©incerftanbni^ trtit unferer J^ird^e mib ber 3uti^t= orbnung berfelben geBen lann, 3. 9Bie foHen ^rebiger con anbern ©efettfd^aften aufgenommen loerben ? STntn). SBeun fie mit gnten 3^"S'"fff" ^^^'^ ^^^ Bi^i^erigeS 33er^alten 6ei ber ©efeUfd^aft, ?u rceld^er fie t)orbeni ge^orten, ju un§ ionnnen itnb ber t)terieljal^rlid^en Gonferenj Stad^rid^t ge6en, ba^ fie fid^ ben 3?egeln unferer (3e- fetlfd^aft foroie il^ren ©ebrciud^en unterroerfen rcoHen. ©ann mag bie v'xextel- jcii^rnd^e ©onferenj fie licenftren Bi§ jur (Si^ung ber nad^ften jal^rlidEien Confer renj, unb follen fie bann, rcenn i^r Setragen nut bent Gnangelium ©l^rifti ii6ers einftimmt, al§ ^Prebiger ober 21eltefte Betrad^tet toerben. 4. %vaQe. SSeldfie S'Jad^roeifungen finb bet einer Stppetlation erforbertid^ ? 2lntn)ort. 9Senn ein Grmal^ner ober ^rebiger utit bent SluSfprud^e ber Bierteljal^rHd^en (Sonferenj nid)t jufrieben ift, fott er iitnerl^alB brei|ig S^agen nad^ einer fold^en uiertelja^rtid^en ©onferenj, bem ©efretair J^ietjon fd^riftlid^ Slnjeige madden, ntit ber ^iitjufiigung, ber il^n baju t)eranlaffenben Urfad^e, unb e§ foil bann bie ^ftid^t be§ ©efretair§ fein, bie aSer^anblung tnit bem 2tppeIIan= ten fd^riftlid^ ber jal^rlid^en Sonferenj ein?ufd^idfen. 6§ foil bie ^flid^t ber Dierteljal^rlid^en ©onferenj fein, biefelBe mit (Sefang unb ©eBet ju bffnen unb ju Befd^Iie^en. ©ic6 enter 9l6fi^ttUt. Pitglieber im ^Ugemeincn. 1. ^rage. 2Bie foHen ©lieber in unferer ©efeUfd^aft aufgenommen roer* 2lntroort. SBenn fid^ 5ei irgenb einer SSerfammlung eine ^erfon anmels bet, ein SRitgtieb in unferer ©efellfd^aft ju merben, fo foil ber ^rebiger, ber gegenroartig ift, il^m folgenbe ^^ragen uorlegen : §aft bu SSergeBung beiner ©iinben eriangt unb bift bu je^t entfdEiIoffen burd^ bie ©nabe ©otteg beine ©eele ju retten ? 86 2Benn bie ^erfon biefe ^^rage tntt \a beantroortet, unb 5JJiemanb ntrf|t§ gegen fein 33etragen einjurcenben i)at, fo foH il^m ber ^rebiger bie red)te ^an'b geben, foId)e ^erfon foH alg ein 3?(itglieb in imferer ©emeinbe gead)tct fcin, unb mit ber (iinroilligung eineg '^ehen foH ber ^srebiger befjen 9kmen in ba^ 5£IaJ5bu(^ einfc^reiben ; aber jo lange eine ^erfon obige (Srage nid)t avfrid}tig mit '^a be» antiDorten lann, fo foH er nid)t al§ ein DoIIe§ C)Iieb unferer ©emeinbe ange= fefien roerben. Sin jebeg @Iieb ber ©emeinbe foil betennen, ba^ eS bie Sibel fiir ©otteg SBort i)alte, ba^ e§ fid) Don nun an Don ganjem §erjen beftrebe, fein §eil in ©Firifto Sefu ju fuc^en, unb feine ©eligfeit ju fdjaffen mit gurdit unb 3ittern, um ben jufiinftigen eroigen Qoxn ?u entflief)en. (Sin jebeS ©lieb foil fid) beftreben, einen gottfeligen SDBanbcI ju ful^ren ; flei^ig fein im ©ebet, bcfonberg im SSerborgenen, unb mo miiglic^ ju fciner eige; nen ©rbauung, aHen 3SerfammIungen beijurooljnen, beibeS offentlic^en ©otteg; bienft unb Setftunben. §dupter Don ^amilien follen eg nie Derjdumen, beg 332orgeug unb 9lbenbg mit ben Sf)tigen ?u beten, unb beiifelben ein guteg ©jempel ju fd^^en in aHen (EI)riftIid)en 2:ugenben, ©in iebeg foE fid) beftreben, genau alg in ber ©egenioart ©otteg ju man- beln, fid^ bei feinen ©efd)aften an einen genauen Umgang mit ©ott geinot;nen ; nie Uebet Don feinem ?}ebenmenfd)en reben, :yicbe iiben gegen ^reunb unb ^einb ; bem 3lrmen ©uteg ju tf)un, unb fuc^en in ber Zijat ein 9iad)foIger ^efu (Ef)rifti JU fein. Sin jebeg ©lieb foil ben ©abbatl^ l^eilig Ijalten, foroie eg ©otteg SSort er-- forbert ! nidjt ju !aufen nod) ju Derfaufen, fonbern foE benfelben in 3lnbttd)t mit Sefen unb §bren beg SBorteg ©otteg, mit ©ingen geiftreic^er Sieber ?ur Gf)re unb £ob ©otteg jubringen. Sin jebeg ©lieb in biefer ©emeinfd)aft foEte Diertelja^rltd^ aug freiem SBiEen fo oiel beitragen „ba ber ^^exx Ujn gefegnet I)at," 1. 6orintI)er 16, 2, um bie reijenben ^rebiger ju unterl)alten. 2;ie Dor[)ergel^enben Slegeln fmb jur befferen Drbnung in unferer ©efeE* fd)aft Dorgefc^rieben, unb loir glauben, ba^ biefelben in bem 2Borte ©otteg ge= griinbet finb, roeg^alb ein jebeg ©lieb ber R\vd)e fclbe, alg il)m obliegenb, genau }n bcad)ten l)at. ©oEtcn nield)e fie iibertreten, fo foIIen fie juerft ennal)nt, im 3Bieber^olunggfaEe aber !onnen rcir fie nid)t liinger unter ung bulbeiu 9lr^tcr Wbf^nitt. ffilolfen ]n crddjten irnb ?u !|altcn. ^nbem eg btc ^flid^t ber ^rebiger unb 3lelte[ten ift, Slaffen ju erric^ten, unb 6Ia§=3SerfammIungen ju l^alten, t»eld^e§ tmmer mit grower SJla^igung unb ©anftmutE) geft^el^en joUte, fo ift in Siebe ju i^offen, ba^ !ein ©lieb ber &e> meinbe in biefem ^^eile einem ^rebiger in ber SlugiiBimg feiner ^flic^t anfto^ig ober ^inberlid^ fein roerbe, ©ollte aber ein SRitglieb bagegen l^anbeln, fo ift er ber nad^ften cierteljal^rlic^en Sonferenj oerantnjortli^. 9ltmUv m^mtt. tlttffCU. 1. Sine (Slaffe foH au§ brei ober mel^rere ©lieber Beftel^en, roeld^e jal^rlid^ ein ©lieb oug il^rer eigenen ober anbern (Slaffe ernennen follen, raeld^er il^r j^iifirer genannt rcerben foQ. grage : 2CaS ift bie ^flid^t emeg ^u^rerg ? 2lntiDort : @g foK bie ^flirf)t eineg fold^en fein, raenigfteng einmal in ber SSod^e in Set= ober ©Ia^--3SerfammIungen, fetne (Staff e jufammen §u berufen urn wit il^nen itber bie geiftlid;e 2Bof)lfal^rt ifjrer ©eelen ju fpred^en unb jur ®inigfeit unb Siebe unter einanber ju ermal^nen. ©obann foH er bie 5Teif)eit unferer 33et= unb (Sla^=3SerfammUtngen auf atte fid) gut auffu^renbe ^erfonen augbel^nen, bie benfelben beijuroofinen roitnfd^en. 2. ^ebe Slaffe foH ja^rlic^ etnen erroa^len ber ©teroart ober SBerroalter genannt loerbe. ^rage : SBag ift bie ^flic^t eineg SSerroalterg ? . (Srfte 2lntn)ort : (Sr foQ otertelidfirlid^e GoUelten jum 33efien ber reifen. ben ^rebiger l^alten ; eine genaue 3ied)nung bariiber fiil^ren, unb biefelbe jeber Dierteljd^rlici^en ©onferenj iiberliefern. 87 88 3n)eite 2lntn)ort : Gr foH ber oiertelja^rlid^eu Sonferenj fur bte %ts\ie imb forgfaltige ©rfuHung feiner ^fltd^ten aB S?en»alter feiner Glafje Derant= iDortlid^ \e'm. i^rage : 2Ba§ foH gefcfiel^en, im jyaHe eineg unmoralifcfieu 58ernel^men§ ? 2lntiDort : Siejenigen ©lieber, ir)eld;e ftc^ ber Uumoralitat jd)ulbtg ma: (i^en, foUen con ber Slaffe ju irielii)er fte gepren, ober einer (Sommittee, be- ftefjenb au^ SJJitglieber ber Slaffe fiir unb gegen if;n, geridE)tet raerben, unb ber ^rebiger bor ©tatiou ober SSejir!, rconi ber 2lngeIIagte geprt, foH ber Claffe ober Sommittee Dorfi^en ; unb loenn ber 3[iigef(agte fd^ulbig feefunben intrb, fo foE er au^ ber ©emeiube auSgefd^loffeu luerben, e§ fei benu, bafi er fein 3Ser-- ge!^en burcf) 23u^ unb 23e!el^ning rcal^rf^aft bereue. ^ft inbefj ein Drutglieb mit bem 2luGiprucE)e ber Glaffe ober Sommittee unjufrteben, fo !ann befjioegen an bte oierteljal^rltd^e Gonferenj appeliert loerben, loenn bem ^rebiger, iueld;er Bei ber 3iid[;tung beS 2lngeflagteu bie Sluffid^t fiif^ret, ^uoor Slnjctge baoon gomad^t ift, jebod^ foU e^ ben ^erfonen, bie juDor ben Slngeflagten rid^teten, nid^t er= laubt fein, in ba^ Urtfjeil ber oiertelial^rlid^en Gonferenj einjufpred^en. ^•rage : 2Bag foU getljan roerben, menn fid) 3JUttgIieber gegen einanber Berfiinbigen ? 2lntrcort: ©iinbiget aber bein Sruber an biv, fo gef^e ^itx, unb ftrafe il^n jioifd^en bir unb il^m aHein. Sgoret er bid^, fo l^aft bu beinen 33ruber gen)on» nen. §bret er bidf) nid)t, fo nimm nod^ einen ober jiceen ju bir, auf ha^ atte ©adE)e beftef)e auf jroeier ober breier 3f"S^" aJhmb. J^bret er bie nidjt, fo fage e§ ber ©emeinbe. §bret er bie ©emeinbe nid)t, fo l^alte il^n al§ einen ^eiben unb Conner. 5Kattf)ai 18, v. 15, 16 u. 17. Jrage : 2Ba§ foQ gefdfiel^en, roenn jraifd^en ©Ueber unb ^rebiger Uneinig^ !eiten entfter^en. 2lntiDort : 3)er ''-jirebtger, ioeld)en e§ belannt mirb, fott bie er§ 35—38 lefen : £affet eure £enben unigiirtet fein, mtb eure Sid^ter brennen ; unb feib gleid) ben 3Wenfd^en, bie aitf ifjren Serrn roarten, inenn er aufbrec^eu luirb Don ber <^^od;jeit, auf ba^ tuenn er lomnit unb anflopft, fie i^m balb auftf}un. ©elig finb bie ^ned^te, bie ber §err, tuenn er lommt, toadfienb finbet. 9Baf)rtid^, i6) fage eucf; : 6r rcirb fic^ auffdjiirjen, unb roirb fie ju %i\en, fo foil er ber nad^ften ja^rlidfien ©onferenj Derantraortticf) fein, unb ju fei^ nem ©el^atte fiir bie ^^it bered^tigt fein, bie er racil^renb bem ^a^ve gereifet fein mag. 5. SBo ^rebiger an einem Drte angefiebelt gefunben roerben, raetd^e arm unb biirftig finb, unb bennodl) prebigen foUen, fo ift e5 billig unb red^t, 'Da^ bie 3lelteften fiit il^ren Unterfjalt forgen, in SSerpltni^ ber 3eit» ^te fie anioenben, unb tnbem fie eine €olle!te ^u il^rem 33e[ten unter ben ©efeCfd^aften il^reS SiftrifteS madden ; boc§ fott biefeS bie fiir bie 3ieifeprebiger auSgefe^te unb 6es ftimmte ©umme nirf)t iiberfteigen. a>ievjc5nter 5lbf(||ttitt. ^rage. 2Bie foUen bie 2luffid^tg=3letteften geroal^lt roerben ? 3(ntroort. ©ie foCen »on ber jal^rlid^en ©onferenj au§ ben 2lelteften fiir ein ^ai)v gejcal^It rcerben. %x. SBag finb bie ^flic^ten be§ 2luffic^t§=3lelteften ? 1. 2lntro. Sien il^m angeroiefenen S5iftri!t p bereifen unb fo oft ?u prebi* gen al§ er lann. 2. ®r l^at bie llefierfid^t in feinem ©iftrilte ilBer bie reifenben unb fe^* l^aften ^rebiger, ba§ fie fid^ bem ©oangelium gema| betragen. 3. @r foil bie Bierteljal^rlid^e unb gro^e 95erfammlung fieftellen unb too moglid^ fiebienen, bag 2(6enbma^l ertl^eilen unb oiertelial^rlid^e ©onferenj I^al* ten mit ben gegenrocirtigen ^rebigern, (Srmai^nern unb 33organgern, auc§ unterfudtien, o5 bie reifenben unb fe^l^aften ^rebiger il^re ^flid^t If^un, befon= ber§ ob bie fe^ljaften ^rebiger roo mijglid^ aUe ©onntage prebigen ; unb roo 94 mel^rere finb, biefelben ju 3eiten ju Derroec^feln, rote am tneiften ^Ru^en gefd^afft luirb : fie ermal^nen, ba§ fie 3"^t unb Drbnung unb Siebe unb ©rnft bei ben ©eineiuben erf;alten. 4. @r fann glei^erroeife, in SSereinigung tnit jraei aielteften, ^rebigern, Gnua[;nern ober £eitern, (einen Don jebem Umfreife,) bte ?Prebiger auf feineut S)iftrifte roe^felu. ©oUte ein lltnfrei§ ol^ne einen Sieifeprebiger gefunben loerben, jo joE eg feine ^fltd^t jein, einen ^rebiger jum Sereifen biefeS Urns IreifeS big jur nadfiften ja^rlidien Gonferer? anjufteHen. 5. ©otlte eg fid^ jutragen, ia^ fein 3luf[id)tg 3(elte[ter in irgenb einem Siftrifte loiire, fo foK bem Sifd)of augenblidEItd^ 9Jacf;ric^t bacon gegeben iDer= ben, biefei* foil einen 2lelteften im 2)iftrt!te baju beftininien, bio ^ur jd^rlic^en ©onferenj. lioljl tier Sifdjofe nub iljvc |1flidjt. forage. 2Bie foQeii bie 33i}d)i3fe geroal^lt toerben ? 2lntroort. ©ie ^aupt^Gonferenj folff fie erioa^len, burd^ bie 3)le^r^eit ber ©tinimen ; aucf) ftef;t eg ber ©onferenj frei, fie, bie Sifd^bfe, nod^ auf Dier "^aijve beijubef^alten. Ste (33ejoaf;Iten ober 33ifd^ofe niiiffen aber bie unterfd^ieblid^en ©onferenjen bereifen fi3nnen, fonft !onnen fie nid^t gerodl^It roerben. %x. aBag finb bie ^flic^ten ber SBifc^ofe ? 2(ntiD. 1. Sei xinfern jnl^rlidien unb ©eneralsGonferenjen a(S SSorfi^er ju l^anbeln. 2. ©ie l^aben niit ben 3(uffid)tgalteften, bie auf ber (Sonferenj gegenroars tig finb, ben reifenben ^rebigern if)re uerfdjiebenen Sejirfe aniuroeifen, bod^ mit ber ©infdE)ran!ung, ba^ !einent 3leiie:^rebiger geftattet luerbe, liinger alg brei auf einanber folgenbe ^afjre an berfelben ©telle ju Berbleiben, auggenonnnen, befonbere llmftcinbe ntad£)en eg notfjioenbig, unb bann nur mit SeioiHigung ber ©onferenj. 3. 2)ie SBifd^ofe in SSereinigung mit jioei won ber Sonfercnj ernannten 2leltefteu jeigen ben 2luffid^tgalteften bie ^Bejirfe an, bie fte ju bereifen l)ahen, 4. ©ie Tjaben bie Sonferenjen ?u bereifen, unb Ijaben im ©eifttid^en, bie Dberauffidjt itber aUe ©eiueinben. 5. ^l)nm fte[;t eg ju, bie Drbination ju uoUjiel^en. 95 6. SBenn ein Sifd^of aufl^ort, bie il^m angeraiefenen ©onferenjeu in ber @e» ttieinfd^aft ju bebienen, fann er bod^ fein 6tfc]^i3fltcf)e§ 2lmt itnter un§ augiiben ? 3iein, eg fei benn, ba^ er !ranl ware, xtnb roag berglei^en Umftanbe me^r fein mod^ten. 7. SBenn e§ fid^ jutragen foHte, ba^ unfere ©emeinftfiaft ju einer 3eit leinen 93tfd)of l^atte, raeil fte enttoeber geftorfien ober fugpenbirt lodren, obec n)ie eg immer fein mag ; me foil 9iat^ S^f^^ifft roerben ? S^er 2leltefte raeldfjer in 2{bn)efenl^eit eineg Siftf)of§ geraal^It rairb jutn ajJitagiren an ber ©onferenj, foU bie Sifcfiofg^SteKe fo lang bebienen alg bie (Sonferenj rcdfiret ; biefer foge^ roal^Ite SSorfi^er f oH aud^ bie anbere ©onferenj Bebienen ; er foU feinen ©i^ ntit bem bort gercal^lten $8orft^er nel^men, urn tnit il^m in ber Sonferenj ju agiren ; tmb ber bort gerotifjtte 35orfi|er foE e6en fo bie anbere (Sonferenj aud^ 5ebienen, bamit eine jjebe ©onferenj roei^, raie e§ Bei ber anbern auSfiefjt ; unb ba§ iiieBe unb @eineinfdE)aft erl^alten roerbe, u. f. m. Bi§ jur Jgaupt^Sonferenj, bie rcieber 93ifd^bfe xtial)lt 8. ®§ foU ber aSifd^ofe ^flic^t fein, barauf ju fel^en, ba§ roal^renb jeber jafjrlid^en Sonferenj eine fd^icElid^e ^rebigt gel^alten loerbe. Sitteulofcs f etragcn mn IJrebigern, grage. aSag foU gefdiel^en, loenn ein S3iftf)of, Slnffid^tgaltefter ober ^re* biger fidE) eineg 3Ser6red^eng fd^itlbig gemad^t, ba§ im SDSorte ©otteg BerBoten ift? 2lntn)ort. 2Cenn ein Sifd^of raegen fittenlofem SBetragen befd^ulbigt loirb, fo foQ eg einem 2luffid^tga(teften unb einem Slelteften Be!annt gemadbt roerben, bie follen e§ unterfud^en, oB etroag an ber ©ad^e fei — fie foHen aBer !eine Ullage au^er jraei ober brei ^eugen annel^men, a'i^ rcie ber 2lpoftel fagt. ©dEieint eg nun, ba^ er mit 3?ed)t Befd^utbigt toirb, fo foQen fie eg fd^riftlid^ nel^men, unb bem 33ifd^of eine 3l6fd^rift baoon fd^icEen, unb eine 3eit Beftimmen TOO fie jufammen fommen, too bie illager unb ber 33ifcf)of gegenroartig fein foUen, unb foE burd^ bie jraei Sluffirfitgalteften unb brei 2lelteften unterfud^t TOerben. 2Cirb er fd^ulbig Befunben, fo foE er fd^roeigen Big jur ja^rlid^en ©onferenj ; ba foUen bie 2luffid^tgalteften unb Slelteften eg nod^ einmat untecs fud^en ; roirb er fd^ulbig Befunben, fo foH er Bom 2lmt fugpenbirt TOerben. 96 2. 2Benn ein 2lu|fic^t§=2lelte[ter rcegen fittenlofem Setragen 6efd)ulbigt toirb, fo foE e§ ber niidifte 3leltefte unb etii ^rebiger imterfuc^en. 3^'';]* ^^ fid) nun al§ ob er frfiulbig loiire, fo foUen fie eS fd^riftlicf) net)men, itnb bem 2luffi(^t§alteften eine 2(bid)rtft bauou fd)tcfen, unb eine 3t'it beftimineu, rao fic foUen jufammen lomnien, rco bie Kliiger unb ber 2tuffid^t^altefte gegemuartig fein. S" Slfiroefenfjeit beg a3ifd^of5 foK ein anberer Sluffid^tgaltefter unb jroei 2(eltefte gerufen wevben, bie foUen eg nut unterfud;en ; loirb er fd)ulbig gefuns ben, fo foil er fd)n)eigen biS jur Sonferenj, ba fott er cerantioortlid^ fein. 3. 2Benn ein 2(eltefter ober ^rebiger follte befc^ulbigt rcerben, raegen fittenlofem Setragen, fo foil ber ^rebiger in ber ©egenb, bem e§ belannt rairb, noc^ einen ^rebiger ober ©rma^ner ober einen Sjorganger mit fid§ ne^men, unb eg unterfud;en ; foHte eg fd^einen ba^ er fd^ulbig racire, fo foU il^m 3iacf)rid)t baoon gegeben unb eine 3^'^ beftinintt rcerben, roo fie, bie Hliiger unb ber 58e= fc^ulbigte gegenroiirtig fein. S)rei 2(eltefte ober ^rebiger foUen biefen 'gall unterfurfien unb entfc^eiben, roeld^e non ben bie ©ad^e betreffenben ^artf)eien evnannt luerben follen, inbem jebe ^artl^ei einen, unb biefe beiben ben britten ernennen ; loirb er iiberfiif)rt, fo foE er big jur ©ouferenj fc^roeigen, unb ber- felben oerantiDortlid^ fein. ©ollte aber l^inreid)enbe ©enugt^uimg in irgenb einem ber uorgelienben §oIIe gegeben roerben, entioeber burd^ bie 2leufeerung Bon 9Ieue ober auf anbere 2Beife, fo mogen fie beibef)alten luerben, raenn eg fiir rat[;[am erad^tet mirb. ©ollte aber ber angellagte ^rebiger, 2lelte[te ober 35>fd)of eg Denoeigern, ju crfd^einen, nac^bem er a3enad)rid)ligung erljalten, roann unb unb loo er jur Itnterfud^ung unb 3?ed^tfertigung f ommen mufe, fo foU er fugpenbirt loerben, unb bie Committee foil itjm benad^rid;tigen, oor ber t)ierteliar)rlid)en ober fa()ilic^en ©onferenj ju erfd^einen, urn fid) joegcu ber gegen iljn anfjcingigen Rlagen ?u cerantraorten, follte er aber auc^ I)ier nid)t erfd^einen, fo foil er (rocnn et nid)t burd^ ^ranfl)eit ober fonftige triftige Umftanbe abgetialten rairb) foa er fugpenbirt ober auggefd&loffen roerben, roic eg bie ©onferenj fiir ratljfam l)alt. ©iebcttjc^ntcr 9lbf(ftnUt. C!5eljalt hn Jlrcbigcr* 1. ©ag &c^ait eineS reifenbeu ^^rebigerS ober 93ifc^ofS, toenn er leine gamilie i)ai, [oil 100 ©oEare unb feine Steifeunfoften fein ; tDenn er eine ^a-- milie l^at, foH er 200 SoUare, unb feine ^ietfeunfoften, unb ^augrente, bie jjebod^ nid^t iiber $40 fid^ belaufen barf, fein. 2. 3Benn after ein 3teife='iprebtger eine §amilie niit ^inbern l^at, foil bie Diertelial^rl. ©onferen? feineg iJreifeS e§ in Ue6erlegung nef;men, unb nad^ i^rem ©utbiinlen, fold^em ^rebiger, nefift oBiger ©umme, nod^ eine lueitere Unterftii^ung geftatten, fo 'oa^ eg im ©anjen ben 33erf)altnife unb Umftanb folc^er jyamilie gemd^ fein mag. ^rage. SCag foE fiir folcfie ^rebiger get^an rcerben, raeld^e nid^t mef^r fdfjig finb, il^re ©teflen ju Bebienen, ober beren 3Bittit)en unb SGaifen ? 2lntrcort. S)ie ^ntereffen, rceld^e ben oerfd^iebenen (Sonferenjen Don bem „a3enet)olent j^onb" ju fallen, follen §u beren Unterftii^ung rerraanbt jebod^ ftreng barauf gef^alten roerben, ba^ ber „a3enet)olent g^onb" ju leinem anbern 3rcecEe oerroanbt roerbe. 2Benn fid^ fotc^e %aUe, raie in ber 'forage tefagt, nid^t ereignen, fo foUen bie ^ntereffen oon ^ai)v ju ^al^r aufberoal^rt raerben, 6ig fid^ fold^e %aUe ereignen ; unb in biefem 'gaCe foE eg bie ^flid^t ber ©onferenj fein, eine Committee ju ernennen, oon raeldjer ein 9Jiitglieb ein Sifc^of fein foE, bie ^ntereffen beg '^oni^ ju cert^eilen. ^ebodf) rairb feftgefelU, ba^ einem unfdf)i: gen ^rebiger, roeld^er oerfjeiratfjet, nid)t inefjr raie $150 idfjrtid^, unb toenn unDerf)eiratf;et nid;t mel^r raie $75, einer SBittroe |75 unb einem SCaifen, nid^t mef;r rcie 120 jdf^riic^ menu e§ unter 12 S^^r alt ift, bejal^It roerben foE. © e f d^ e n i e. ^eber Jieifeprebiger in unferer ©efeEfd^aft foE ber ©onfes renj jal^rUd^ einen Serid^t aftftatten iifter aEe ©efd^enfe ju bem Setrage Don einem Xf)aler ober mel^r, bie er in feinem Sejirfe fiir fid^ felt) ft ober fiir feine (^amilie erfialten l^aljen mag. Unb foEte bie (Sonferenj iiberjeugt fein, ba^ irgenb ein ^ejirf ©efd[)en!e anftatt SoEectionen gegeBen l^at, ober ia'^ fid^ ber ^rebiger Bemiil^t l)at, ©efd^en!e anfiatt ©oEectionen ju er^alten, in fold^em j^aBe foEen bie ©efdienle, al§ ©oEectionen con ber (Sonferenj betrad^tet roer^ ben. ©oEte eg fic^ aber nac^ Unterfud^ung nidjt fo jeigen, fo foEen biejenigen ^rebiger, bie ©efd^enfe erl^ielten, biefelben a(g i[)r (Sigent^um bei^alten, unb jufd^ltd^ oflcg, roag il^nen bie gucfitorbnung eriaubt, er^alten 97 Sli^tjc^tttcr m\mtt leirtttlj5=(!Icrfmouic, 21 n r e b e. ■ 2Bir finb l^ier vox bem 2lnge[tcf)tc ©otteS unb biefer gegenrodrtigen 36"9^tt Derfatnmelt, biefe fieibeii ^erfonen, nanUid^ 31. luib 9JJ, al^ Wlann unb ^e\b ef)ehd^ jufamiuen ju geben. Sft ""» jemanb gegentudrtig, bem etioa einige §mberni^ befannt finb, roarum bie[e beiben ^erfonen ni^t oerel^elicfit luerben foltten, ber §etge eg nun in gebiif^renber Drbnung an, ober jcfiroeige ouf eiDig barnad^. (2Birb nun leine Sinbernifs angejeigt, jo frage ber ^rebiger ben 3)Jann :) 3i. SBiUft bu biefeg g-rauenjimnter fiir bein GI)eiDei6 anne^nien, um in bem @l^e[tanb mit \l)x na getl^an roer* ben? SCntroort. 2Ber filr ©ott unb ba§ §ei[ ber ©eelen etnigen (Sifer l^at, 'Ser fange bog 2Ber! ofine SSerjug an. 2Bo ^inber ftd^ befinben, Bcrfammle fie fo oft e§ tf)uttUd^ unb nu^Ud^ ift ; rebe mit il^nen ; unterioeije unb erma^ne fie im ©uten ; bete ntit il^nen ernfttid^ bod^ finblic^, ha^ fie i^ren ©d^opfer unb (Srlo* fer mogen lennen lenien in il^rer ^ugenb. Stoei tt. jtaianjigftcr 9l6f^ttitt. 3M]n -- irurken. ^etnem t)on unfern ^rebigern ober SDiitglieber foil e5 eriaubt fein, 3Ser= faffer eineS So!trinal:33ud)e§ ober ^anxp^letS ju roerben, ol^ne bie ©ene^mis gung ber jafjrlidEien ©onferenj ober einer t)on berfelfien geroal^Iten auSerlefenen ©ommittee. ©oCte irgenb ein ^rebiger ober 3)iitglieb biefeg ©efe^ iibertreten, fo ift er ber ©laffe, ber Diertelja^rlitfien ober jci^rlid^en ©onferenj, rote bie ©ad^e fein tnag, oerantroortlid^. Srci ttttb jUittttjtgfiter Slbfiftttitt. ^ dj m d r c tt . 2Cir glauBen, ba§ bie 2Irt unb 2Beife bie SOBal^ri^eit ?u Bejeugen burd^ 2lffirmation, roenn roir in gefe^tid^er ^^^orm baju aufgeforbert roerben, feierlid^, geroiffenl^aft unb tjor ©ott unb 2Kenfd^en & i n b e n b fur ung ift, bie 2Cal^rl^eit ?u fagen, bie gan?e 2Bal^r§eit, unb nid^tg alg bie 9Baf|r[;eit. 101 2?icr ttttb jtoaujigftcr 9Hfr^nUt. liili^e Cletriinke. Xk !£ifttIIation unb ber 3SerIauf f)i^iger ©etranle foil burc^aug ber gan; jen ©efellfd^aft t>erboten fein. ©oUte irgenb ein ^rebiger, ©rniaf)ner, gii^rer ober aJlitglieb Dor unb narf) ber niic^ften ja^rtidien Gonferenj im 3nf)re 1842 fic^ bamit abqeben, fo foil er fiir bag 3>erge^en ber Diertelia^rlid^en ober id^r» lid^en ©onferenj, »on toeld^er er ein 3JZitglieb ift, DerantrcortUc^ fein. SCenn ber iiBertretenbe 33ruber ein 6rmat)ner, (^iifFei^ ober 3JJitglieb ift, fo foQ e^ bie ?Pflicf)t beg beauftragten ^rebigerg fein, i[)n in ©anftmutl) ju Dermat)nen, roenn eg ein ^rebiger ift, fo foH eg bie ^flirf)t beg oorfte^enben 2luffe§erg ber »iertel= jjdi^rlicl^en ober ial)rlid)en Gonferenj fein, il)n ju erma^nen, oon feinem unljeili- gen ©eroerbe abjufte^en ; unb rcenn aQe freunblid^ 3ierfuc^e fc^eitern, fo foQ fold^' ein Uebertreter, ber ju unferer Sixxdje gef)ort, oon berfelben auggefd^loffen rcerben. ^nbeffen foE biefe 9legel nic^t fo in 2lnt»enbung gebrac^t roerben, um Sruggiften unb anbere in i^rem aSerfauf oon 2Kebijinen, ober anbere in il)ren gefcf)aftlidE)en Slrbeiten, abju^alten. pttf unb jttiattjiBfter 9lbf(^tiitt. Ir elm ail ere I ^reimauerei in jebem ©inne beg SBorteg, ift gan^ltd^ con ung geun^= billiget, unb foE auf feine SBeife in unferer ©efeCfd^aft gebulbet loerben. ©oaten eitiige unferer 3Kitglieber fortfal)ren, 'greimauer^Sogen ju befuc{)en, ober irgenb einer if)rer ^rojeffionen alg ©lieber beijurcoi^nen, ober fonft fi^ ber a3riiberfd£)aft beigefeHen, fo fd^liefeen fie fid^ baburc^ ai§ ©Ueber unferer jiird^e aug. ®erft§ unb ^toanjigftcr 9lbf^ttitt. S k I a u e r e i ♦ 2inc ©flaterei, in jebem ©inne beg SBorteg, ift ganjiidtj oerboten, unb foil auf feine 2Beife in unferer ^ircf)e gebulbet loerben. ©oUten einige in unferer ©efeUfd^aft gefunben loerben, roeld)e ©Ilaoen l^alten, fo fonnen fie feine TliU glieber bleiben, au^er fie manuniittiren ober fe^en folc^e ©flaoen perfonlic^ frei. 102 ©Icktt mi jtoattjigftcr 9lifrftttltt. Conjlitutiott tier Conferen? = l^udjbrudietei in CirckuiUe, ®l)io. I. Slrtifel. 1. S5a§ o6ige ®taBliffement foil bie Sonferen5:93ud^brucferei ber Sereimg^ ten Sriiber in Sl^rifto genannt rcerben. 2. 2lIIe pterin berailligte gefe^gebenbe ©ercalt ift ber ^aupt:(Sonferenj 6e= jagter ^trd^e iibertragen, beren ^flicf)t e§ ift, irgenb einige SfJegeln ju madden unb ju Berbeffern, bie if)rem Urt^eite nad) jroedmci^ig fd^einen ntogen, 3. ©g foil bie ^flidfit ber ^aupt-Gonferenj fein, alle Dier '^a^ve brei S^ruftee'g }n ernennen, ober ju rad^Ien, beSglei^en einen §erau§ge5er unb ©d^a^meifter anjunefimen. 4. SOBenn fid^ eine ©rtebigung in bem Separtement beg §erau§ge&er§ ober be§ ©d^a^meifterg burc§ j?ran!f|eit, Xoh unb auf fonftige SCeife ereignet, fo foQ e§ bie ^fIidE)t ber S^ruftee'g fein, eine anbere taugUcf)e ^erfon ober ^er* fonen jur 2lu§fuIIung Befagter eriebigter ©telle bi§ jur ©i^ung ber nad§ften §oupt=©onferenj anjunel^men. 5. ©leid^erraeife foU eg, im ^^alle fid^ eine ©riebigung bei ben ^rufteeS burd^ Xo)) ober fonft ereignet, bie 5PfIid)t ber u6rigen beiben fein, eine britte ^erfon ju roaljlen, urn befagte eriebigte ©telle bi§ jur ©i^ung ber ndd^ften §aupt--®onferenj ju fiillen. 6. ®er ©rtrag beg befagten Stabliffementg iiber bie 2luggaben fiir reifen* be unb unfal^ige ^rebiger, foil fiir SCittinen unb SCaifen oerroenbet, unb ju biefem ®nbe unter bie nerfd^iebenen iaf)rlid§en (Sonferenjen oert^eilt roerben, rcie eg bie §aupt=Sonferenj anraenben nxag. II. 2lrti!el. 1. ®g foH bie ^flid^t ber Xrufteeg fein, aHe fed^g 2JJonate mit bem ©dia^meifter unb §erauggeber ^Jec^nungg^Slbfd^lu^ ju l^alten unb ber ©d^a|= tneifter foH einen a3erirf)t augfertigen unb biefen ber ja^rlid^en (Sonferenj beg ©cioto=®iftri!teg, forote ber ©eneral^Gonferenj iiberfenben. 2. (Sg foH bie ?PflidE)t ber ja^rlidEien ©onferenj fein, in ber gfifd^enjeit ber §aupt=(Sonferen5 barauf ?u fef}en, bafi ber §erauggeber, ©d)a^meifter unb bie S^ruftee'g il^re 2lmtgpflirf)ten tl^un, rcie biefe Sonftitution eg tjerlangt. 103 104 3. 2luf bffentli(^e 2ln!lage irgenb eine§ ber obcngenanntcn Seamten foil, e§ bie ^Pflid^t ber obengenannten jd^rlid^en ©onferenj fein, bie befagte 2lnIIagc ju unterfud^cn, iinb loenit fte t()rer 3)?eimtng nad) fd^ulbig finb, fie 511 t)era6fd^tc= ben, xmb bie erlebigte ©telle 6i§ jur ©i^ung ber ticid^ften §aupt=Sonferenj ju befe^en. III. 21 r t i I e I. 1. eg foil bie ^flid)t be6 §erau§geber§ fein, ftrcnge 2lufmer!fam!eit auf atte jum ©inriidfen eingefanbte 3[)}ittf)eilungen ju rid)ten, biefelben, roenn e§ niJtl^ig ift, ju reuibiren, unb fie einjuriiden ; jebocf;, luenn er irgenb einige er= l^ielte, raeld^e feiner SUJeinung nad^ nid^t niit ber Sef)re unb ien S'legeln imferer Mrd^e iibereinfdmen, fo foU er fold^e bem ©d^a^meifter ober einem ober mef)' ren ber 2:ruftee§ oorlegen, unb loenn biefelben fie nerroerfen, fie 5uriidff}alten, fonft aber einriidfen. 2. ©5 foil bie ^flid}t beg §erauggeber§ fein, eigene 3Katerie fiirjebeg Slatt ?u frfireiben, ba§ Sefen be§ 6orrefturbogen§ genau ju beforgen, Slrtiiel augjurod^len, k. 3. ©leidierroeife foU e§ bie ^flid)t be§ §erauggeber§ fein, eine aUgemeine Sluffid^t iiber bie 3lrbeiten in ber Sud)brudEerei ju l^alten, unb barauf ju fe^en, ba§ fie i^re 3eit "id^t ini 9)?iiffiggange jubringen. 4. 2)ie Xrufiee'g foHen eine aUgemeine 2Iuffid^t iiber ben ^erauSgeber unb ©dEia|meifter l^alten, unb barauf fel^en, ba^ fie il^re ^flidE)t t^un, unb too nid^t, mogen fie il^re5 2lmteg entfe^t roerben, big jur Si^ung ber nad^ften jdl^rs IidE)en Gonferenj, lueldje bie ad)e entfd^eiben foH, in roeld^em %aUe bie befag: ten 2;ruftee'g bie erlebigte ©telle befe^en fotlen. IV. 21 b f c^ n i 1 1. ®§ foQ bie ^flid^t be§ ©d^a^meiftetg fein, ©otge fiir aHe cinftraeitigen 2lngelegenf;eiten ber 33ud^bruderei ju fjaben, aUe bam geprigen S8iidE)er ju fUl^ren, auf 2lnn)eifung ber Xruftee'g fotd^e aJJaterialien ju liefern, alg ^u alien 3citen notf;ig fein tnbgen, unb unter ber 2lnn)eifung befagter 2;ruftce'g alg ein aOgemeiner S8uc^:2Igent ju l^anbeln. 2. S)er ©d^a^meifter, roenn er nid^t ntit jetnen amtlic^en ^pflid^ten be' fd^dftigt ift, foU rcie eine anbere §anb in ber Sud^brudEcrei arbeiten. 3. (Snblid^ foUen bie Sruftee'g bag $)led^t Ijaben, irgenb einige 9?ebenge» fe^e ju tnad;en, alg il^nen jur Dlegulation ber ntinbern Suc^bruderei^Slngelegen; l^eiten bienlid^ fd)einen mbgen, tnit bem aSorbel^alt, baft fie feine ber Seftim' mungen biefer Gonftitution Derle^jen. Pud| = Jlgentfdjofi 1. ®g foe ein 33uc^=2lgent in jebem jjal^rUd^en ®onferen5=S)iftri!te ernannt toerben, beffen ^Pfltc^t eS fein foH, aHe Siid^er tc. ju iiberne^men bie i^m con bem ©c^a^meifter gefanbt rcerben, unb bie bem 6onfcren?=S8ud^bruderci--®ta6* Uffemeitt in ©ircleoiCe jugepren. 2. Ser befagte Slgent joE bem ©d^a^meifter be^ ©onferenj^Sud^brudEereis ©tabliffementS in ©ircIeDtEe 9ted^nung abjulegen fd^ulbig fein. 3. ©g foH bie ?PfIid^t beg SudEiagenten fein, fo roeit e§ fid^er unb tl^unlid^ fein tnag, aHe il^m con bem ©d^a^meifter gefanbten Siid^er an bie ©iftrifts 5Prebiger jum IRu^en ber ^ird^e ju oertl^eilen. 4. 2)er 33ud^agent foU einc rid^tige SRed^nung iiber oHe fitr bag befagte (£onferenj-33ud^brudEerei=(StaBIiffement gemad^ten 3Sert^eilungen unb (SoIIef^ tionen l^alten. 22enn Siid^er in feinem Siftrifte fe^len, foU er ben Sd^a^meis fter oermittelft 93riefe bacon benad^rid^tigen. 5. Ser 2lgent foH mit bem ©d^a^meifter jebe fed^§ SRonate uetmittelft aSriefe ober auf anbere 2Beife abanbern. 9ltm tt. jtottnjigfter TOfrjnitt. Horn l^aueii mn Perrammluu90l)aufei:n unb tier bahci ^tt beobadjtcnbett C^rbnimg, gr. Sft etroag anjuratfien im Setreff beg S3aueg oon 2?erfammlung§= Pufcrn ? 2lnt. Safit aHe unjere $8erfammlunggl^aufer e\n\a6) unb anftanbig, mit freien ©i|en, unb mit nidE)t me^r Soften alg notl^ig ift, erbaut loerben. %v. 2Bem foUen unfere 3]erfammlunggl^aufer, unb bie baju gel^origen ©runbftiidEe im i^aufbriefe jugefdfirieben fein ? 2lntn). (giner 33erfammlung con Sruftee'g unb il^ren Stad^fotgern im 2lmte, all anoertrauteS (Sigentl^um ber ^ird^e ber 3?ereinigten Sriiber in e^rifto. 105 22 106 jjr. 2Bte roirb eine SSerfammlung Don S:ruftee§ gerod^It ? 3(ntn). SBo immer eine ©efellfc^aft bie 2[bftcf)t [;at, ein 35erfammlung§5 I^ait5 ju Bauen ober 511 faufen, fo joE e§ bie ^fli(f)t beS £etter§ obev 9luffe[;erg einer jold^en ©efellfcfjaft jein, e§ ber rierteljar^rlidjen ^ouferenj be§ Siejirf^ obev ber Station 511 iuelcf)er jie gel^oren, anju^eigen, beren ^ftid^t e5 fein foH, eine 25erfammlung von nid;t luenigcr alS brei eiiiftdjtSDoIIen 2;ruftee§ ju ernen* nen. 9)?it bem 3Sor5ef)aIt jebod^, ba^ t)on feinem werlangt roerbe, longer al§ t)ier 5|a^re ?u bienen, e6 fei benn xtnumganglid^ not^inenbig, ^eine ^erfon joU a\§ aiilafjig jur SCa^l aI5 ein 2;ru[tee fiir irgenb ein§ unferer 3SerfammIung§l^aufer fcin, rceld^e fein regelma^igeg SJiitglieb unferer lirdie ift. %x. 2Bie joHen SCrufteeS Beim Sauen eineS ^Oerfammlungg^aufeg Ber= fal^ren ? 2lntn). ©ie foUen eine ©djal^nng be§ 33etrag§ madden, roeld^er notl^ig ifi, eine ©ntnblotte 511 laufen, ?u Baucn xtnb fotc^e anbere S>erbefferungen 311 ina= d^en, alg fiir notl^ig erad)tet raerben mogen ; fie foHen jebod^ nid^t ju hanm an- fangen, Bi§ jinei ®rittr)eile beg nac^ biefer ©dia^ung notf)igen ©elbeg gefid^ert ober unterfd^rieben, iinb gleid^erraeife ein gefe^Iid^eS 3ied^t ju ber Sotte eriongt ift, auf roeld^er fie 511 Bauen Beabfid)tigen, ©ie follen jjal^rlid^e 33erfammUmgen !f}alten, unb eine rid)tige nnb gered^te Urhmbe in einem ju biefem ^mede angefd^afften 33ud}e von alien S5erf;anblun= gen il^rer Serfammlung eintragen, roeld^eS ^nd) ber oierteljafirnd^en Gonferenj be§ Befagten ©iftrictS ober ber Station jeberjeit jur ^nfpection offen fein foil. Sie foKen ©orge fiir iia^ (Sigentfjum beg 9?erfanintlung§f}aufe§, ba§ ©runbftiidf, ben SSegrcibnifipIa^, 2c. tragen. jyr. SBaS foE getf;an inerben, luenn fid^ in ber SSerfantntlung ber 2:ruftee5 eine ©riebigung ereignct, baburd^, ba§ einer auff^brt ein SKitglieb ju fein, burd^ ®ntfel^itng rom 3lmte, 2;ob, ober fonft ? 2lntir). (S§ foU bie ^flid)t ber uiertetja^rUdjen (Sonferen-, fein, eine paffen= be ?Perfon ober ^perfonei; jn ernennen, fo[dE)e ©riebigung ober Srlebignngen auSjufiiHen. %x. 2Ca§ foU getf)an iwerbcn, loenn irgenb eineS unferer §dufer leer ift ? 3lntiD. 65 foil bie ^flid;t einer uiertelidl)rlid;en Gonfereiij beS ndd;ften 33ejir!5 fein, nid)t rceniger nI5 brei fd^idlid^e ^erfonen aI5 S^rufteeS ju ernennen, lueld^e bie ©eroalt IjaBen foKen, roenn fie ba|U t)an jioei 2)rittl^eilen ber ©lieber biefer ©onferen? erntiid^tigt roerben, foId^eS 33erfamntlung5r)au§ unb roaS baju gelprt, t)erpad)ten, ju wcrrenten ober ju »erlaufen, unb ba5 uon fold^ent 9?er= pad}ten, SSerrenten ober 33ertauf entftanbene ©elb ju Derroenben, roie bie 6on= ferenj e§ anioeifen mag. 107 31 n m e r f u n g. S)ie 2:rufteeg foHen in alien ^-allen ©orge tragen, bie Uebertragg=Urfunben gefe^md^tg auSgefertigt unb in ben ©ountt)=Urfunben Sud^e, iDO i>a^ ©igenti^um ift, eingetragen ju l^aBen, bag ift, bie ilauf§=Urfunbe auf fie unb il^re S'iad^folger im 2Inite al§ anuertrauteS ®igent[)um ber J^irc^e ber SJereinigten ^Briiber in ©l^rifto ge[d^rie5en §u I^a6en, unb bafj fie ein 35erfamm= lungSfjaug jum (SeBraud) ber 2)JttgIiebet ber Befagten ^trd^e ben Jlegein ber Sud^t=Drbnung gemiil Bauen laffen, bie »on ^eit ju 3^it Don ber ^ircf)e ange- nonmien raerben tnogen. ^rcijigfter 9lbHttitt. Jeugtiiffc SWitglieber t)on vmferer ©efeEfd^aft roeld^e oon einem ^(a|e nad^ bem anbern uerjiel^en, f oHen fic^ ein 3engnif!, roetd^eS bnrd^ einen ^-ii^rer ober ^rebi= ger unterjeidinet fein foQ, 'nerfd^affen, namlidf) : „3d^ Bejeuge l^iermit, bafi 21. 33. ein ©lieb, con gutem Setragen in ber ^ird^e ber 3Sereinigten Sriiber in ©l^rifto Big[)er geroefen ift. (3)atuin.) 3Benn ^rebiger von einem 6onferen5=S)iftril£t nad^ einem anbern jie^en, fo follen fie fid^ von ber ©onferenj, in roeld^er fie Bigger geftanben, ein 3eugni^ oerfd^affen. 3n{)alt. Seite. Sleltefte, il^re SBa^t Drbination unb il^re ^fltdit 92 2luffid)t§=aelteite, aBa^l unb ^fltc^t 93 a3uc^=2Igentfc^aft .... . 105 35ud)er=Srucfen .... 101 Glaffen ?u errid^ten unb ju ^olten 87 ©laffen ..... 87 ©onftitution ber (Sonferen?=3Bnc^bnicIerei m GircIeoiHe, D ^to . 103 ©onftitution ber Kircfie .... 79 Sag ®lau5en§befenntni§ 78 2)ie 3lufna[;me won ^rebigetn 83 2)ie ciertelial^rlicfie Gonferenj 84 {^reimauerei ..... 102 (Mel^alt ber ^rebiger 97 ©eneraI=6onferenj .... 81 §eiratf;g=Seremonie 98 §t^tge ©etranfe .... 102 Sdl^rUdE)e Gonferenj 82 3}Jitglieber tm 2(IIgemeinen 85 Crbination ber 2lelteften 91 ^fUd^ten ber ^rebiger .... 89 ^flid^ten ber Sieifeprebiger 90 ©(f)n)oren ..... 101 ©flaoerei .... . 102 ©ittenlofeg SBetragen Don ^rebiger 95 Urfprung ber 33ereintgteu Sriiber in S^rifto 75 3Son ber ?{ot^itienbtg!eit ber ©iiiigleit nnter un5 felbft . 99 SSon bcm Unterrirf)te ber ^ugenb . 101 SOoin 33efuc[)en oon ^an^ ju §aii§, itnb bem ©infd^avfe n praltifc^er 3leligtonen .... 100 aSom 33auen oon aSerfammlunggfjdufern unb ber babei ju 6 eobarfitenben Drbnung .... . 105 2Baf)l ber Sifc^bfe unb i^re Wici)t . 94 Scugnifle .... . 107 108 CERTIFICATION. I HEREBY certify that the German Discipline prior to 1815, and those of 1815, 1817, 1819, and 1841, as contained in this volume, are a faithful reproduction of the originals, including errors of orthography, punctuation, capitalization, and typography. Carl Karstaedt. Dayton, Ohio, September 6, 1895. 109 Date Due '^^^^fe,,^ is^ fi-f-r . j igyQ tCAU -r o nm 1 8 iSyi nnD ^ ^\m |\PH ^ f •*' d PRINTED IN U. S. A.